4381 3_MI_A07_sn10900 3 MI A07 Sn10900
User Manual: Pdf 4381-3_MI_A07_sn10900
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 222
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
•
•
••
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
••
•
•
•
•
•
•
I.·.··.,,'
: j·'i.I,:i... i::.
.. to
;'",
:.. i i '
I.:~
,,:
:0'
04
.....
1
Y
i:";-';
t •••• \ ;•• i !
....... : t ' , l " : , •• ,0 0,
t·t':i...Ji·..: i t: i':'
"'Il
!
,... !
··t.. ·!·····!
I
.f.
!'"
f••• I:..
I
.\ 1;.1 ••
L,t)C:'
L.C)f:.
i.. CC
I. Crr~
t\:.
,,-,,'
j
l
!
000044614'
A022~4
00061~9577
A20560
A20558
0036169578
() 'i '::::
t\ ..... :.
.. !i..! ...
t.
;.1
1-\1
••
~.
.....
.~
"'t .' •••, ..... ..
!) !.) J.,.! .-:.: '::\ (' \'::\ -.::. t5
.J
.'. t·;·; ...
! I
•.. 1.J••t
....."' ..... !
••
..~
: I
...
.' 1.:.1 .'
... I..:.J .'
i. C)C::
L.CJC:'
!
,H'"
!
{hI
I ...
,
.'. I,..! .,
, l,J .\
t•••" , ••
t ..
) ••• ' •• }I.U
.
., fA ...
... lJ..I ...
'
f. r'IC:.
i .. CJC:
0006169586
0006i69587
0006169588
0006169589
0000446158
0006i6?613
i:::) (::1 () :::.:~ (':) 'l <:'j ::~:: :::$ (:J
~~ \.;.j . .
() () (; ::! '::' of"' s::":' :'5 ~] (-)
00~6169614
{::. "i ::';
0006169615
~20562
OOS0~46163
A02214
"'1..,.1 . .
000A169557
0006169558
0006169559
0006169560
A205~~
~ 1.:.1 ..
A20562
A20562
.\ h.J.<
.\ lA .
()()02.::\ '?/j3DO
(~; i~:) (:} :::,~ (}.':I "l C':I :~:; [j ()
(.) (.) (.) :::~ l'J 'll; :?) :::5 (:)
l'·, ",::
°t
,.or ,':.. 1
1":.:... :.....
. . !A.\
000::.:::676:::.00
t.~,.1 ..
f.;) () ::;) ::;! s:::, "l ,:':-) ::'S ::::: (:)
.o,
L:J "
() () (~1 :::.': li "l t) :...::; f5 ()
. . \.;.j..
(-)OO:::?l.)7.::):·~B{-)
t,.! ..
,.IA .'.
() (.) () ::;.~ s::\ 'l (:") :::) ~3 (~
(.) () (.) :\::: .:::. ·l .:':.j ::~:; ;:5 <.j
(:) {:i (::. :::~ ,:. 'l C) ::::: (J ()
.0,
.o,
A205~2
00~616956i
~205~~
0006i69562
0306169563
A2056~
,\ l-tJ .'
(~) (.) (::; :::.~ .::.;- ''i' .::') ::5 E:! ()
A2056~
.\ I;.j .',
(.) (.) () :~.: .::':, 'l .::':t ::~:: ;::) ()
0006i6956~
A20562
•. I.;,j .'.
() () I;) :::: 1:::_ O? l,; ::~) ~:j
.\ I.. ,j ...
(.) (.) (:) :::.~ .:-: . 'l .::'i :. ~:: :::5 ()
(.) i~) (;) :::,> ;::\ "l /j :..:~ F~ (:)
(~t (~f (:) ;.:: .:::_ 'll) ::~:: :::~ (~!
1'.. 1 •• 1 i
j:':', ::;.: () ~:::: -:;') :~.::
i;~i::'ivi
i:~f :~:.~ l~'~r ~::; li ~.i
F:Fi····i
F:Ei"';
;'j ':",
..... !
,", l..I..i .\
()"j'i
L.C;C:'
T Ci f} i. S:
or C} C) L. ;:',1
A?0~58
A20S60
A20560
A20559
A02214
A20560
A205A0
j
f::j ::;.~ i~:) ~~; _:":':, ::.~
.'. fA .'.
ti ;.:.~ (.::1 ~::: (:'j '~.~
.\ 1.".1 .'.
1::',,·-;
.'. t·.! . .
i ~I EO ~""i
., i..:..1 ,
F;~
I:;: [' t··..! r:) ,:::~ ::::
:::,11::' :":"1 {}S:.::'_j
F.: E:
j•.•.,
0006169574
00061695J5
() (l :::;
()
~~0562
A20562
..
.. !J." ..
r:: I (~lr; ..
r· J (\ C~
:0, •••• ,'
,
.
;.S •• :'1
~
::) <) () () .(.} l~. (::' 'J :'::; "j
f::j (.~t ::~ :~:.~·l
.\
(oJ (~) (:) ::.! I~:' .? .~) ::5 ;::5 ()
0006169617
0000446183
0006169394
0006169395
0006169396
0006169397
0006169398
0006169399
A20558
A02214
.\ t;J .\
(-) () () ::.:~ (;~ 'll, :',S ~] (~
.• t.;.J .\
() i) () ::.~ (':':•. ~-; l) :.~) [5 ()
~?055R
,', 1;..1 .\
..
.'.
t:> (~ () ~2l'; "1 ,:::- :. ~ f:5 ()
(:1 (.) (.) ~:.~ <:') "l .:::. :. ~:; :::5 ()
,', ~~i .'.
f:;) (.) (oJ ;;.: {::_ 'l-::'; : : ;: ~:) (~
.. kl ..
• t/J . .
(1 (.) (~f :;.~ '::" "? l:t ::5 ;::5 (0)
,~'~
{) ~::; ::;
~006169400
)) J f:~'i C·~ ()? ::~:
0006169401
0006169402
0006169403
A20562
A20558
A20558
A20558
A20558
A20558
A20558
A20558
A20558
C006i6~404
A20~5G
J006169405
0006169406
0006169407
A20558
A20558
A20558
J00~169409
A20558
J) I
[,I
j::1G
Ir',C;
:i) I (:i C~
Ii I f:':l C; ::.) :::~ :::;
J:. I f::'t C: () :? ::~:
'j:.: T{.:ji:;
.', () '::::
I; I f::'j (:~
"1 ,.: :::;
:U:·d:·;
r) J f::'J c.~
.j
)j
r
"f
2 15
:?:: f::;
0006169410
~2055q
~006i69411
A20559
..
t.~J
i..~
! •
e',
\;...1 ...
() J.::) (:) :::,:: l} 'll:) :'::) ~:j (1
(-) (,) (.) ::;.:=
l) ·ll) :. ~; ::3 ()
............:
i... tJi,:: .::.
... /..:..1 ••
.. !i.!
i .. CJ[·~
i, C'iC~
.\ ~.J...
{:i :,::: () ~::; ~::; :::5
.'. \:.! .
., l;..! . .
it::,
.. ·.··..,1 ..
:.:: •. :) ...=
.<
::3
i:-i~;.: (-)~::;:::.:
:? !:::i :5 ~::; :::5
1.. DC:
i... Ci C.
(:)
(-,) f) (:) ::.:: (":1 .~.: 1::) :'!; ~:j
{:.} (::1 (:) :~:~ {:':, ··l .::) :::=:; ~:5 i~.)
(.) () (.) :.;.: t::~; ./ '::j ::~. :::; ()
. t:.j ...
., \.1..1 :
., l;.j ...
. . ll..!
":"!:: ":'''i''
' t...
!.:· :
3006109J8~
A20558
000~169388
() () (~! l) "j l::=~;:= ::::} ! ::; :?
A205~8
t'i ::;.: 1,:) ~~. :=:: ::3
jOOA1673?0
A20560
:
.~ t;,j .\
.'. Ld .
.. ii.j ...
.~ l.J.J \
..
0006169393
J ;."! :'::,; t'
I j ·1 ;S· 'r
'I
t;·~ ~
A20~58
(j ~ l:~:
(:' ::;.~ '1
., \1..i.,
\ !,;J ,
(.) () (:i :..::: ':::. 'l .::~ :.:::~ :::> !~)
() () (:) ~:.) a':·" "? I:::' :.'~: ~:) I~':;
(.) (.) ('J :.:.:: s:::' ·l ,~) :.~:; ~:~ {.)
(:) () (:i :~:: l:; "l t) ::~) i::5 (~!
f
/~
88/02/15
o
SCHED SHIP
•o
o
•
•o
o
•o
o
•o
o
•
'0
o
-0
o
o
•
•
•o
•
•
•
•
•-.
~.
o
o
FEATURE D/M OR DIMS
C·H055
C:· J.. j () {;) ()
c.~
I () () :. :~;
f" T l:'; "Z!:::
$.::" .:.
'~
••' ••••, •••'
0006169596
A20560
0006169598
0006169599
0006169600
0006169601
0000446238
0006169618
0006169619
0006169620
0006169621
0006169622
0006169623
0006169624
0006169625
0006169626
A20562
A20560
A20560
A20562
A02214
A20558
A20562
A20558
A20558
A20558
A20558
A20558
A35269
A20558
... 1,.l.j ,',
0"
l;..!
0"
(.) (:) (:) :::.~ I~:')
() () ()
'l'::':1 : : :; i::~ (-)
::.:.~ S:'::l "? a::'j :::) f:5
(-)
,', tl.j .,
(-) () () :::2 (;') "? i.:'j :.~) :::j (-)
... lJ\i ,',
,', I;.j ,',
(:) 1::') (.) :~.:~ l:\ U? {;'} :::~: f:! ()
() () (;) ::.:.~ '~:I 'll~) ~~:: ;::s (:)
,', {;..I ...
() () (-) ~.:.~ .::) '";1 I:':) :.:~: [~ ()
PAGE
84/10/30
9
I
r
hit
'.WrM Hffl±'bl\ti'1![H
db
'I'
5,,'1'
h!W"." ..
'J'
b't
iti M"tid' H
rl'#NtWMtti". . . H";'
Un
d nlfW 'ti"t' rl'tJl.'n!!:IWHww44=ZIlI I,
+
.,,,,",*,,01/'' ',
fl.!!.!dlJ,
.,',,' .....
(,1.. .
....: ""rlW ','
'j
'.
H
b ,.
L'!
4",*#*,*W
"
J
·t-
H
'1 ),'t!
!n
'n
i
O 'f""#"'"
*"0 'l,t'M! ••"";',,,;'#&'
"'¥I.II.';
±d£'
U;,';"'"!YM;
"'''!!'''''!'
1
'dt.ii ., "., T )+H '[""
n.
:,,'#t""'I"n""
",,4'L·.mUlfiffiK'"pi"!lmrc·~·T!""'rIl'"'i'"P'''m r"lJ'U
J'
L±
J
N!I\U;'UW' 'I
'QIR'T"'mI"
.'
'n ,1"
'i'ft4WtL!!LJ4,i4NI'
""I.;,'jtlLUW' ''1'" ""
'U"''''P:I\ IfHrr........",..M'M'.I'U'..
!Iii.".' '"";,,," ,jI . . ,....'"
"Ni""IU+'. ,. ';"'tu •• ,..:IU.r.w".."
.... #±+idt"t' .;'....;,
1/
0000000000000000000000000000000000
-- - _.------ - --------- •
Maintenance Information
®
4381-3 : 4381-3 I 4381-3 1 4381-3.1 4381-3 1 4381-3' 4381-3
SIN
1 SIN
I
SIN
.
I
SIN
SIN
1
SIN
MI : MI : MI : MIMI :MI
. MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
I MAINTENANCE I MAINTENANCE
I !NFORMATION
SAfETY
IPWR REPAIR
(HWS AND
INDEX
TERMSI
MBC)
ABBREVIATIONS
PR 001
I
THRU
I
I
INTROQUCT!ON I
START
PUREPAIR
CHNL REPAIR
MSS REPAIR
END OF REPAIR
PR 999
I
I
I
I
f INFORMATION
I
I
I
I
I
PVVR REPAIR
(PRoctl
PR 1001
THRU
PR 13 XX
I
1
I
I
1
I
1
1
-=-= .....
-=
.-=-.:-
VOL A02
----~
.
-
=- =---= =
-=== --.=
=
.::: =-=:-
5-=-~=
:~::2676380 1~~9 GA005
o Copyright IBM Corp.
1984
Processor
Maintenance Information
PVVR REPAIR
(PROC)
PR 1401
THRU
PR 18 XX
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
PWR REPAIR
(PROe)
PR 1901
THRU
PR 5001
I MAINTENANCE
I INFORMATION
I SERViCE AIDS
I
I
I
I
I
I
WLAro
WlAM
WlA~WLAOO
SIN
MI
MI
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
LOCATIONS
TOOLS
REMOVALI
REPLACEMENT
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
DIAGNOSTICS
LOGS .
SYSTEM TEST
INSTALLATION
SAFETY INSP
CONSOLE
FUNCTIONS
1------ ________________
- - - - - 1 _____ 1
VOlA01
I MAINTENANCE
PNFO'RMATION
SIN
4381-3
WlAm
MESSAGES
1 - -________
WlAOO
The drawings and· specifications contained herein shall not be reproduced· in
whole or in part without written permission.
IBM has prepared this maintenance manual for you in the use for installation,
.maintenance, or repair of the specific machine indicated. IBM makes no
representation that it is suitable for any other purpose.
Information contained in this manual is subject to change from time to time.
Any such change will be reported in subsequent revisions or Technical
Newsletters.·
..
It is possible that this material may contain reference to, or information
about IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services
that are not announced in your country. Such references or information
must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM
products, programming, or services in your country.
Publications are not stocked at the address below; requests for IBM
publications should be made to your IBM representative Or to the IBM
branch office serving your locality.
.
A form foneader's comments is provided in Volume AO 1. Introduction. If
the form has been removed, comments may be addressed to IBM
Corporation, Processor MIM Development, Department X65, P.O. Box 6,
Endicott, NY, U.S.A. 13760. IBM may use or distribute whatever
information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring
any obligation to you.
.. "",ft ..
... .;JOI
81M 2676380
I ••.
IYII
I. Seg
GA005
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
0 0 0 0 (}()OOOOO
.~.
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .(). 0 0
()OO 0 0 0 0 0 0
IU
o
~.ww."""'''"''I··!·....
'jf,·.......' ....··_
......
'.:..... ._M·M
...•...
·".......
' ...
M·.......N....
'hli........'·....
'\·'M""'!II.44I11oOo'"""W....
·4+....·"",",,,,,,I'.lotlo
[, ...
-"""....
",II&M'''''''''"'"''OIIIIIrl!''......''"'''''"'''''''"J'M''.......
'· ,...
M"W....
' ........
!
0Ui'
H
_I/'_ _
'W_"
......
' ,_'_
......
·i...
' ........................................" ' -___.....
·'II''"',",,","]'JloWn...
"t ...
ru .
lff'
. .....
W'_'(]I"""']'!'...
Wli!dWOJN'....
n .....
sl\·....
f9"""'Ili.
,-Il/l
..
4i.I.
...
" """''..........
" ""',jj.\.....1'....
' ........'-"-""""""'....
",'"","'"",',,",,''.....
II''''''·tb...
f''"_!t1ii.....
'Y' ,"",f'"."",'h
0-'
b''..........
' ' 'W...._ ....
111'"",'
, .....
"UY"""'C....
HV*"""!!I'![w."........
U.QM:_
.........
WW.....
'i..>.!'
ltI. . .
~"'""""'
lIrld.....
IIr' . . .
'II,
. ....
'+'J6J....
Ii4J.......
IIUIt.!tt"'l'.u.'......
' ...
' '"",,"Is. .". .'." . . ..' . . .
!!,.'. .. ."......."............
'
....
N*_'!lI l ioWi'I.I .OI.lJo,.mf~ia'iol"l!
..."M_
........
iw...
w.....
"t
....
" . ..J.M:ItM
. ....
' ....
'......
- :....'_."...
1f'............
.,j.iiej.4.
....
' oIIl.4!t"....
/,i/,
. . .'!;""'ri!..u.!!....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .' ' ' ' ' ,
IIIo/JjJII....
L:Iill,j',LI....
I.:Jl!II'"I+'J.i.IJ,U.l/,/JOIjru....
U'4#"""'n...
nw'W....
't' ...
' ' ....
I!!'W"U...
4MU...
""...
' ..'...
"Y'...
HI"....
H " . .'.'_I"S
.
....
IIf'....
" ......
yy"
....
'."...
"W'''''''.''...
'''WIL'
I"jj,'
i
000000000000000000000000
LOCATIONS
LOC 011
Contents
Machine Layout
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.. LOC 012
Gate Layouts •...•••..••••.•••.•••••••••.•. ••.••••.•.
Gate 01 A ........... ............•... ,.. ..... , ...•.... ,
Front View ........ ..••.•...••...................... ,
Right·Side View .......•........•.....•.............. ,
Rear View ............................•••••..•......
Gate 01B .......................•.•.....•••.•....•.•..
Right-Side View ....•.•••.•.•..••••.•••••••.•..•.•..•.
Rear View/Gate 01B Open •.•.•••.••.•••..••.•••.•.•••••.
Gate 01C .........•......•••••.•••..•....••••.•..••••.
Front View .•••.•....••••••...•••••.•.••••....•••••..
Rear View ..........•.••.....•••....•••••..•..•.•.•.
Gates 010, 01F, 01G, and 01H ..•...............•.......•..
Gate OlE ..................•.•......••....••..........
LOC 015
LOC 015
LOC 015
LOC 015
lOC 016
LOC 021
lOC021
LOC021
LOC022
LOC 022
lOe 022
LOC 025
LOC 026
Board layouts ••.•.•.•...••••••••••••••• ••••••••.••••
Board olA-A 1 .......................•.................
Functional Locations ............. ....•....•............
Board 01 A-A2 ... .........•.••.•......••.............•.
Functional Locations ......••....• ..••. '••..••••..••••••.
Board 01A-A3 ........•. , ...•••.•....••...•...••••. .' ••.
Functional Locations .•......•••....••.•.....•••••...•.•
Board 01 A-A4 (1 Megabyte Cards) .••.•..... ••••••..•••....• ,
Functional Locations ........•.•.....•...•.....•... ...•.
Board 01 A-A4 (2 Megabyte Cards) ...........••..............
Functional Locations ........................ .....•..•..
Board 01 A-A4 (1 and 2 Megabyte Cards Intermixed) ...... ....... .
Functional Locations ..........•........................
Board 01 B-A 1 •...... ..•..•..•......•..••.......•.......
Functional Locations' ..................•.............. ..
Pin Layout for Boards 01 A-A 1 to 01 A-A4 and 01 B-A 1 .•.•....... ,
Board 01A-B 1 or 01A-B2 ....••.....•....•...........•.•.•
Functional Locations •.•.....•...•... ..•••. '........... ..
Board 01A-B 1 or 01A-B2 Resistor Pin Layout ...•......•.....•••
Board 01 A-B 1 or 01 A-B2 Module Pin and I/O Signal Pin Layout .... ..
Board 01 A-B 1 or 01 A-B2 Terminals ......................... .
LOC 031
LOC 031
LOe 031
LOC 032
LOC 032
LOe 035
LOC 035
LOC 036
LOC 036
LOC 037
LOC 037
LOC 038
LOC 038
LOC 041
LOC 041
LOe 042
LOC 045
LOC 045
LOC 046
LOC 047
LOC 048
Connectors
LOC 051
Top Card Crossover (TCC) Connectors •....••...••••.••••.. lOC 052
Service Panel
LOC 055
Operator Control Panel (OCP) ••••••••••••••••••••.•••.••• LOC 056
Power Supplies
.•••.•••••••••..••••.••..•.•••••••••.. LOC 061
Sense Capacitors .....•••.••••••......••.•.•••...•.... LOC 062
Transformers
LOC 065
Primary Control Compartment (peC)
LOC 066
Relays and Circuit Protectors (CPs) •.••••..•••••••••.•••... LOC 071
4381-3
B/M2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GA010
LOC 011
Machine Layout
LOC 012
AFS107
S,
AMO
'07
and
PS
Plenum Glte
",
PS
105
AFS106
PS
105 Ps
106
S2
and
PCC
Plenum Gate
Front View
Left Side View
4381-3
81M 2676380
IMI
IPN
6169577
II
EC A20558
S~e~g:L...::G:!!A:::.:0::...;1:...!:0:"'---L.1.::.2..::o:..:..f-=2_ _----I11 01 Oct 84
LI
I EC A20560 I
118 Feb 85
I
LOC 012
C> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o 0000000000 0000000000
0000 000
(y
"),
,
(')0000
'llfJIi'U' ¥l![RIW5UI!"!lW"W!'P''''5+P*P!!l!IIl!ll11i",,1II1I'''P!II!!H
nTPn'fT.!!DJ]
l!RV'\'9["'''u"
V·,,,,'FIIIV"F\J
'
,
+
"I'
",
"
1,1
II.
V
"ya!:!",,!!,.!
P'
,Ill
,'"
"'I#"",'''.I,ffM,.·.''''.Ji.·
.b' ;..J{ '4=-"
'...
'!",
+'
k'
f
II'
h
• '''''1' , f " U
:lI¥!Hd"
''''irM),!!£! "fl!ll"& '
I', ",
'\~
f· ll , '!f!'J!,NIIH"
lR f'lI/11l!!lun 5141"
,
drie ..', d"+44
£
6 .',
"H '
Ill"
II
,'1,'"
Md'ln
,5'
"hi
II
I'
I"
'IIlLIIIIOcf!!!C1l
,'L
!Hrl!+"'.',
MW*'i!)flhh
!IrH'JII,UI!~jp
Ir,)'
'ft! 'I! :!.
I
"r**A7'W*,,'y:,lltf¥, 'Ii r'
It
001'1''1. t
(!1!ffnftM. +N!I!t!$"/,ww*"
.
dl+ b"
t
I
'
, , )), \
'[
lib!
I yt ..
r
litH 'I. 'I! ' , tliW
0
unJ
k
t!
U I
!
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 015
Gate Layouts
Gate 01A
Front View
Right-Side View
I[
~
- -
-
~
-
--
]
I:--,?
II
I
II
A1 Board
......
Bl Board
I
~
~
}
I
I
[
~-
-- - -
][
-
-
- - - ;....r-
IC:--
_ J
~
B2 Board
I
I
~
!l
>
.... r..
II
>
>
II
....
--
..--
..
.~
.
~
I
uO OS
)
•
J
gs&1
A2
,
AMD 103
[
---
'I~'
11_2
A4 Board
IC-
] )
c
=
)~
--
~
~
II
~
I .......
106
In
III I
A3 Board
I .......
AMD
J
"
I
:J
c:
'I>
II
rI
~
L-'
A2 Board
~
c;......la
II
=
It
Gate 01 B
II
Al
E II
)
Gate Ole
-
~
D
~
~
(T'Air---O
Sensor
AMD
I
t
AMD
103
I
I
104
Gate OlA
N""
" .,
!3~ u u uO 00 00 o 0 00
<7\ ....
ql/'l
Processing Unit Storage Address Register (PUSAR)
Module Location:
DE
Shifter
Module Location:
HA
Module Plug Positions
DA
DE
OJ
ON
OS
HA
HE
HJ
HN
HS
MA
ME
MJ
MN
MS
RA
RE
RJ
RN
RS
VE
VN
COB
PUSAR
CREG 2
CREG 0
CS Control
Shifter
ALU
LS EXT
Keys
CREG 1
Cache 0/1
Cache 2/3
Clock
OLAT/DIR
CREG 3
Cache 4/5
Cache 6/7
ECC 1
Channel Control
Channel Interface 0/5
ECC 2
Channel Interface 6/8
Cable Plug Positions
VA
VJ
VS
WA
WJ
WS
I~~g
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GA045
I
PN 6169584
. 1 of4
II
EC A20558
EC A20562
.~.~0~1_0~c~t~8~4~~~3~0~A~u~g~8~5~__________~________- L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~
LOC 045
LOC 046
Board 01A-B1 or01A-B2 Resistor Pin Layout
Row Number
Pin
Number
us
AOl
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
UT
UU
AOS
AOl
ADS
ADl
AD8
UV
A01
ADS
1
4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
1 o
o 9
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
•• • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
•• • •
•• • •
•• • •
• • • •
• ••• • •
• • • •
• • • •
1
3 2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
0 D 0 0
S 765
o
o
0 0 0
4 3 2 1
• • • •
• •••
• •••
• • • •
•••• • •••
• • • • • •••
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • •••••
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • •••
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
~~
BB~ ~
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
• • • •
o
sc
so
XH
WJ
~
OC
00
UH
SG
SH
BBW~SJ
~
AA
~
::o~~
NCU
lC
NO
lO
~
JAJ8
MGaGA~
JCDGC
JO
GO
;:r::-l~:~ ~:: l2J
r:l~~~
OG ~::Q~:.~
LJ ~~: [;]~:~
xG L.J \.IG
VJ
OH
NG
NH
LG
lH
QJ~ ~NJ
OK
JG
JH
HE
GG
GH
~
~
eA
CA~
EC
CC
o 0 0
3 2 l'
EE
CF
eaGA CB
EO
EF
co
CE~
EH
SK
It<
JK
GK
EK
CK
SL. Q O l
NL.GJu
Jl
GL
EL
CL
UM
SM
Nt.!
JMWGM
OM
lM
A02
A03
CH
u~ ~JJ ~ GJ~ ~EJ 0 CJ~ ~
NK
AOl
eGGJCG
UK
J
Ul
~ BBI
UT01A03
SAGaA~
aa
sa
Row
Number
CA
a
EMUCM
8
8:[:]:8oRB BNRB:G~8lRB 8EGEB
8::0:
~.
BJR
GRB BERWCRB
AOl
:;n~~~
XoL:Jua BSR
xR
UR
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
CB
8~G:R B:GJ~8 B~[:J~R R~O~9
.
Bsv ov8 8
w8 8
GvB 8 U cvB
NV
JV
EV
AOS
AOl
o
Module Side
CC
A08
AOl
CD
A08
Terminating Resistor 80 Ohm
• ••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
••••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
•••
• • •
Terminating Resistor
80 or 120 Ohm
43'81-3
B/M 26763'8f)
LOC 046
~ C~ighll8M Corp.t9'84
o
0 ,·: O·
"
,I
o
0'" 0. ·······*0:··';;·,······· 0'" 0"\ 0·'
"I
I
I
- '
/
I,
':,1
I
'
o
0 ,), 0""
10'"
0'
(~
II'.Y
o
oooooo!
o
00
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 047
Board 01A-B1 or 01A-B2 Module Pin and I/O Signal Pin layout
Row Number
o
nBB~ ~~[J~~ ~~G;~ ~~c:J~~ ~~G;~ n
U~;GJ~~
Row Number
Pin
9876543210
Number
• • • • • • • • • • -A1
• • • • • • • • • • B1
• • • • • • • • • • B2
• • • • • • • • • • B3
• • • • • • • • • • -B4A 2
••••••••••
• • • • • • • • • • 85
• • • • • • • • • • -86A 3
••••••••••
• • • • • • • • • • B7
• • • • • • • • • • B8
• • • • • • • • • • B9
• • • • • • • • • • -A4
••••••••••
••••••••••
• ••••••• ••
••••••••••
• • • • • • • • • • C4
CS
• • • • • • • • • • C6
• • • • • • • • • • -AS
••••••••••
• • • • • • • • • • C7
• • • • • • • • • • C8
• • • • • • • • • -C9A 7
•••••••••
~~[:J;~ ~~~J~~ ~~GJ;~~ ~;~[;]~~ U
on~ CJoo~
A~GJ:R R::B~8 B:GJ~A 8::c:J~A",8 no
lJ BB B", auB 8H. ,.8 B" G~ B,.
U
~ :~ .N:
XNc:JUN~ ~SN
XP
UP
:::8:aN~
SP
OP
~NNGJLN~ ~JNc:JGN~ ~ENGCN~
::.N ~~
IIIP
g,-A-s-----L..lJ:........B BI~ I ~~G;~ ~
WS9A7
LP,
~"' ~~
JP
NS
lilT
NU
NV
Module Side
"":
GP
:~ aH ~
EP
CP
o
E
c
I/O Cables Example WS Position
•
•
• •
•
• •
•
•
• • •
•
•
• •
• • • • •
• •
• • •
• • • •
•
• • •
• •
• • •
•
•
• • •
•
• • •
• • •
• • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
• •
•
• •
•
•
• • •
• • •
• • •
•
•
• •
•
•
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
• • •
• • •
•
• • •
• • • • •
• • •
• • • •
• • •
•
• • • • • • • • • •
• •
•
•
• • • •
•
• • • •
•
• • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
•
• • • • • • • • • •
• •
• • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • •
• •
• • • •
• • • • • • • • •
• • • • • •
• •
• • • • • • • • • •
• • • • •
• • • •
•
• •
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • •
• • • • • • • • • •••••••• •••••• • • • •
•
• • • • • •
• •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
• • • • • • • • • •
• • •
•
•
• • • • • • • • •
• •
• • •
• • • •
•
• • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • •
•
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • •
• • • •
• • • • • • •
• •
•
• •
• •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
• • •
• • •
•
•
• • • • • • • • •
• •
•
• •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• •
• •
• • • • • • •
• •
•
• • • •
• • • •
•
• • • •
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
• • •
• • •
• • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • •
• •
• • • •
• • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
•
• •
• •
•
• • • • •
• •
• • •
• •
• • • • • • •
•
• • • •
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • •
• •
• • •
• • • •
•
•
•
•
..
Module MS Example
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GA045
I
A
321098765432109876543210987654321098765432
.
· ..
Note: All Ax pins are at ground potential.
B
Pin
Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
"
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
MSB638
I' EC
PN 6169584
A20558
EC A20562
.30f4
. llu~O~c~t~8~4~~~3~O~A~u~9~8~5~~__________- L____________~__________~
LOC 047
lOC 048
Board 01 A-B 1 or 01 A-B2 Terminals
A1 Board
B1 Board
A2 Board
Interlock
A3 Board
t-------~
~I
B2 Board
PS105
. Interlock
A4 Board
AMO 104
AMD 101
AMD 102
Rear View
01A-B2
Module Side
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
I
.!·EC
MI
PN 61 69584 ·11 EC A20558
A2056. 21
..-.S.....
eg....;:G;;:.;.;AO~45:...-~.4:...;:.of.:...;;:4~--,.. 01 Oct 84 . 30 Aug 85 .
~CopyrightIBMCorp.19B4
LOC 048
o 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-0-0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
,,,., I"", ""
1.1"
' .w_........"............
"''_. . . _......._......._
i ..." " " " ..'"ii" ......l,...,,,, .• ,i..'.~.""...........................
·......._
........
' · ..................................
" ......................
,,""""'_"'"'''''"'''''''''.,,''._.'''_
.• ~~......
' ,'....
" _'''......
1'' . _.'.' '' ' ' ' ' ' '. . .'.... . . . .
....................___..........__..........................,"""""'"..........."'"""""'''''''''"''''_. . . . . . . . . . . . .' ' '"".="_.,,.,.....
".,._
... _.=
.....
='".",.......
'w__"""'·."""'
....
~"-"-"""",,",,,~""'"
QU
,
. _
...
__
. ."
...
.
•
_
• _• •
1 " , , ".............
'
' - " ' _ '_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~_ _ _
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 051
Connectors
3·Pin
2-Pin
1~0~1
~ ,11
lC
D0[]
ID
(2)
Plug
(Wiring Side)
2
CD
1
Locating
Jack
Plug Pin
(Pin Side)
(Wiring Side)
Jack
(Pin Side)
Plug
(Wiring Side)
Jack
(Pin Side)
Plug
(Wiring Side)
Connected
Jack
Jack .
(Pin Side)
(Pin Side)
Plug
(Pin Side)
8·Pin
0
0
2
0
0
3
0
0
4
0
o
o
o
12-Pin
o
o
o
Plug
(Wiring Side)
Jack
• Plug
(Wiring Side)
(Pin Side)
Jack
Plug
(Pin Side)
(Wiring Side)
Jack
(Pin Side)
Connected
00
0
o 0
o
15-Pin
9-Pin
0
Plug
Jack
(Wiring Side)
(Pin Sidel
Wiring Side
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D
D
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
o 0
00
00
00
o 0
00 18
B A
Diskette
2 x 18 Position
Edge Connector
4381-3
B / M 2676380
1
2
00.0
00000
00000@
3
4
5
6
MI
I
PN 6169585
25
'@OOOO@
@OOO®
@O@
7
8
9
10
14
11
12
EC A20558
Female Plug
OCP Jack (Pin Side)
13
12-Position
Edge Connector
I
OCP Connector !located
in keyboard housing)
EC A20560
,-,S;;..;;e~g-.,;G=A..;..,;0;.,,;,,5~0_......
, _1_of_2"'---_---' L-.;;0,.;..1...;;:O;..;:;ct.;;..8.=...4..:-.&..-..:.1~8-:..F~eb;;;,...;;.85.=...-..I.-".;;;..;;;...;....;...;;;;.;;;---.;;;,--'-_ _ _ _...I.-_ _ _- - - '
It Copyright IBM Corp. , 984
LOC 051
Top Card Crossover (TCC) Connectors
Pin Numbering
LOC 052
, .. ,
,,• .•••
... ,,
, .. ,
01A-A2
01A-Al
8645658
22 • • 2
••
••
••
••
•• •• w
••
••
••
••
33 • •
t • • ,
13
• • • •
, .. ,
22 • • 2
•• ••
••
••
•• •
• X
••
••
••
••
33 • • 13
•
•
•
0
«
0
9
0
«
0
0
0
?
o
?
0
9
0
0
0
0
,
0
?
0
9
,
•
•
,
0
9
0
q
Front
Back
____0_9
• •• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
• • •
• • • • •
• ••••
•••••
• • • • •
•••••
• • • • •
•••••
• • •• •
o
o
o
o
o
o
?
0
o 9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
000
~t
t
0
0
t
0
0
0
000
0
o
t
0
0
0
0
o
o
o
t
000
0
0
~
0
0
0
0
0
000
0
0
!
!
~,
t
0
•
•
•
• ! •
•! •
• ! •
• t •
• ! •
• ! •
• ! •
• • •
• • •
•
t •
o·
Front
t
•
•
Back
,•
r•
r •
r •
, ••
T
•
t •
f •
T •
• •
• •
T
?
0
9
0
9
0
?
0
9
0
?
0
? 0 yO? 0
?
0
?
0
?
?
9
0
Y0
0
0
«
0
«0
o
0
0
?
0
?
0
?
0
000
0
0
0
0
6
0
9 0
yO? 0 Y 0
? 0 £ 090
J
0
Front
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
••
••
••
••
•• •• z
••
••
••
••
• • 13
Front
IpN
2
6169585
of 2
8645777
8645678
22 • • 2
@
9
0
•
33 • • 13
GA050
o ?
o 9
o 9
o 9
o 0
,, .. ,
8645779
6
0
0
0
Back
Component
••
••
••
••
•• •• y
••
•• ••
••
I~g
0
•
Side
4381-3
81M 2676380
000
,
22 •• 2
33
9
o ?
t • • ,
•
?
0
o
8645778
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Back
8645776
o
0"
0
0
o
o
o
o
0
9
0
o
0
0
?
0
0
?
0
9
0
o
o
?
0
9
0
o
0
? 09
0
0
Y
0
Cf
0
9
0
q
0
o
o
o
t •
?
0
9
0
9
0
?
0
T• , •
T• , •
9
0
?
0
9
9
0
?
0
0
q
9
9
0
.!! •
t • , •
t • t •
, ., .
t '. , •
,. • r •
,. ,.
t • , •
t • , •
f·' •
Front
Front
Back
0
0
0
0
0
Back
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
LOC 052
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 000 0 000000 000
1
1
1
'>ft±f'j-1fT7£'"' ; I'l -""W H "-:-
'"l1N!IW"!""'
'of"
"r
"l"' 'it"
'L"'" "-"WrtW1Wf'""[WY' n"1E"CnWU1lM
'¥Dirt ,'MW!fNPI'PMBH
,1,_
' I
t' b
11'**,,111'
"'''''"Iil'II''I!'w'II' lItr M, j wi.'",M.t
'I .. t",'!
ftlMw#i"!I!/"tJ!LUN'
"I,I,!
ftt't'!U··'NW"t"'ri,=,W".'I=iriIgj=".,."
ftM'ONIweb'"**'d
t
""
'C(''Z''wff!t1na
+'
em
tf"!""
I
:,"1.
I_it
ttt
!.
t'
!
""
,
t:
t
,
I
'be.
r
tOM d
b'. . . .
"f.*"N""t.,wHy"i:!l't.WM"WrM,Mwll ':If
k'Wi l
',
WWMt'
h
'Hb'
0 •• 0000.0000000000.000.000 •• 00000 ••
Service Panel
LOC 055
(£J 6 Places
To Al and
A2 Boards
Gate 01 C Front View
Hinge
Not Used
PS109
PS107
PS108
AMD 105
Service Panel·
• CP2
r------------------lI
Rear View
I
I
I
Normal
CE
Mode
Power
On
PS102
PS101
PS103
Located Behind
Normal
Power
PS101
Off
Hinge
Normal
I/O
Power
---Hold
L _______________ _
Gate 01 C Front View
B
0
B
B
c::J
Power In
Process
.
1
I
Check
Reset
II
Logic
Reset
I·
IIML
t:::J
Power
r::::::J
r::l
t:::J
CJ
Basic
MBC
Check.
On
5 Volt
Complete
24 Volt
I
III
I
MSS Code
c::J
I/O Power
Hold
o
Power
Code
Lamp
Test
Unit Emergency Only
.t===b
·TR 104A. 8, C. and CP2
Only on all 50 Hz and 60 Hz Japan machines
t=::tJ
On
Emergency
Puwer Off
Service Panel (Front View)
4381
81M 2676380
(0
I~~q
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GA055
LOC 055
J
LOC 056
Operator Control Panel (OCP)
Power
On
IML
Lamp
Test
Channel
To
Channel
Power
Off
DODD
o
o o o
Power In
Process
Channel
To
Channel
o
CJ
System
Wait
o
Power
On
o o
Chan-Chan
Disabled
o
Basic
Check
o
0
Q
ju;l.
~
IML
Power
Complete
~
3278·2A and 3279·2C
A
B
A
8
A
8
n
Uc Uc Uc
n:~: n:~:
Power Onl
I til
Power Off
N/C
NIO
Lamp Test
r----------,
I 12 J I i
111
41 i
I
5
I
IL__________
_
JI
Chanhel To Channel
OCP Switch Pin Layout
4381
81M 2676380
'l;
o
i~~g
CopyrIght IBM Corp. 1984
GA055
' PN 6169586 I' 'I
.
I.20f2
EC A20558 "
~.~O~1~O~c~t~84~•.________~______~~______~______~
LOC 056
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -·00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 OOO()OOOOC
t f . . ., • • •
rli.;'tI.:tttPit:ttteMtrilte:ltttl...... tftwfl''fHbtdN
"'a
'.w ill. . . . t1' "1,,.,,,,1,$"""'• • '""
H
't.lt,tdH
"'_ill' ......t'
",I."
,t 'f"1"11"·'
1,1
t",.,
.. t,
',clO,,'UI"'td'!
"".
d,
t."t, ..
''''. H;,;,.p;e..,!.4·"
., "W"'_"" '" "I
),'
• nW"" '"
"'!lu,w'"n
iW"iw"u,',i
.. ",""'IiN"yt !I""" " jtlf"'IdI''''''1!! 11
.'H"Ii!'
B 'II'"
"!I'
Ii "'"!!"\!"'!I!'~U " ,T'"
,",",IL!'!,,«I''I'
."
''PI!!
!,It
II .. ' ,., 6 ' ,'1""
'rw , "'[""t ~liL,'jL '"!' "wdM'lfhr 'IL
""! d'Md' ,", ' ...... ' eI.'W'rI!'l
'If! lie'
....J. . ."'wIi..•
..,.'.! .. j.!.,WM...... '
II
, 'MM
**
"!ilzlw.'
1Iodt'
'·""'dd'. ··l+."In+!Li"ItNHudttLi±Mrl**'H 'd LtHftiriH"b"
H WIII'P,uW.,j,'1dI 'LIt! 't'PF
0.00000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 061
Power Supplies
,..
~
Hi nge
0
PS109/
Voltage Adjust
Not Used
DD 0
J1 J2 J3
J4
§.
~
0-
PS111
PS112
J5
J6
PS107/
Voltage Adjust
Voltage Adjust
J1 J2 J3
J4
DD 0 §
Voltage
Adjust
AMD 107
P~108 /0
0
OD 0
J1 J7 J3
J5
J
Jl
.-.\
I •
4.",
r
('''I.
o[JJ2
:-.:: J3
BJ5
J6
J6
rJ Jl
Voltage
Adjust
J5 J7
Mnn.rl
UUuu
J4 J6
AMD 105
J2 tjo
J3 !"'l
.. J
~f
[J
J3
PS104
Service Panel
PS105
TR102
r--------,
~D
I
I
~OD
I
J
CP1
I Vo!tage
Adjust \.
I
I
:
PS103°
(Located
Behind
~ 00
CP2
CP3
J10
CP4
..
J1
OK4CP2 CP3
g
~
J2
CPs
0 D
DO
Voltage
Adjust
J1
Primary
Control
Compartment
(PCC)
-'\
I
I.
•
J
r'"'"
J2~Jo
J3 [1
.....
AMD 102
~0
~r-
(
J8 J9
00
~~ o cH
Jl0
~~
g
EH
AFS102
'.... ro
r- J7
PS101
IDs
L ______
~=J3
100
PS102
~
OlJJ2
J3 J4
~QPKl ~~
J8 J9
PSl0l)
:
J600
K3
CP1
l.l Jl
J4
J3
OKS
00
/,1,
9Q 0 0
J5 c::::J
J6 J7
I
I
I
J5
Voltage
Adjust
PS106
J13
J120
-
AIS101
(If Present)
I-
Hinge
r-r- []
~7
.J
J14 J15
Left Side View
DO
Gate Ole Front View
4381 -3
B/M 2676380
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
LOC 062
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
risHhi , .... u· ..•••H'
'Ullin!, ••• '
e'"
" 1f !lW"!W+wi'I!"I!I!w.'a7
II
"tr"wuw,."nJ'U"B"·!fMW·"!!i,·IWffW"""$'m,W!tflJ' w'pgW""!fIl'lt.
1
"!11M"
i,I"
id"
Ii!
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOC 065
Transformers
TB4
TR102
TB3
TR104-C*
TR104-B*
Left Side View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
I
II
I
Front View
I
iVII
PN 6169588
EC A20558
EC A20560
L.:~~e~gI.-G:::.:A~0::.:6::.::;5:...-......-...;.1...;;o;.;..f=2_ _---,.. 01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85 .
«l Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
*TR104A, B, and C.
Only on all 50 Hz and 60 Hz Japan machines.
LOC 065
LOC 066
Primary Control Compartment (PCC)
Behind CBs
Behind CBs
o
r-. -,
0
C5
L1
C6
C7
Cover
p'
J·14
~@
I
cce
co
EJ
@) @)
CB·2
CB·1
,. "
I
, •
I
TBl
1 2
I
3 4
5 6 7 8 9
I
1 2
TB2" '"
3 4
5 6 7 B
o
I
9)
0
Mounted on rear of PCC
;
L1 C1 L2 C3 L3
II
,;
L1
II
L3
K02
I
:
T1
!
,
L1 L2 L3
L4 L5 L6~
~
K03
.10"
T1 T2 T3 ~
T4 T5 T6
~
T3
"
K04
T2
T1
T~.
....
!I
Primary
Control
Compartment
TR100
II
°0 o
0
~
Q'b
.
123456
0
@
@l
AMD 102
Interlock
a
---
cc
J2
,.....'
~----~~~~==~~~.~
~
0
.' ;: - I " ' .
trR 101
@
@
e
PI
Left Side View
I
i.-
0
+
J
I~----~--------
Cover
• Unefilter capacitors are not present
on Japan machines.
____________
--J
Primary. Control Compartment (P-CC)
~381-3
B/M 2676380
ttl Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
LOC 066
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
•
H
I
'I
!'
,,(
,
til
. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
000000
PCC K3
Top View
0
3
5
7
8
L3
0
Load
0
0
L2
L5
L3
L6
A
Lower Deck-. T4 T5 T6
Top Deck-. Tl T2 T3
B
Top Deck-. L1
Lower Deok-. L4
I
Line
B
A
Cl
N/O
Tl
T3
0
0
0
PCC K2
PCC Kl
(Pin Side)
C3
C1
C3
0
0 0 0
L1 L2 L3 L4
0 0 0 +-Load
N/C 0 L1 L2 L3
0
0
Tl T2 T3 T4
0 0 0 0
+- Line
PCC K4 (Four Pole)
PCC K4 (Three Pole)
4381 .
81M 2676380
I
iVII
I~N
6169589
II
L.;S:::.;e;.:=gL..-.:::.G:..:.AO:..7::..;:0~~.1~o:.;.f...:1_ _---I.
Ie Copyright IBM Corp. '984
.
EC A20558 I ~c A20559I
01 Oct 84 . 03 Dec 84 .
T 1-3
T 4-6
0
Load
I
L2j:_ -X=L1
I.
•
T2
C 0 Tl T2 T3
CoO 0 0
Side View
0
L1
4
0 0 0',
LOC 071
Relays and Circuit Protectors (CPs)
2
o 0000 o
Line
CP1
(Rear)
T1
R1
-t
L2+_ L.
L1
-L..
•
•• I
C1
R2
C2
CP2
(Front)
LOC 071
,
.
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00'0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0:
"MoW',,, 'e,
II
II
"
,",
"*!ft!tlt
j
u
•...
"
M,\·";,,,L1!t&M'II!W"'W'\IIiilllM""tw!!IJ!'
Tit
d'H" 'HH
WII
11
'ti'
M
WW'
'I
""
'oj
"'t*'
'",'N.4'
l!!""i!!!
"e' ,,'
'\i'M 'ltWtt*H'H'f't! 'UWN'
'~'cie'
we
•
rlft'*I!P '!w"+
"II/ohol'!!
HUdlW' " uy
'ifdir
Fl\t
"';:P TI'j'mpnilmgprr.muu
"l.l!id'('f . , ' (
'·U't'ttt
DOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO • • 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TOOLS 005
TOOLS
Maintenance Tools List
Contents
Use the following tools to maintain the 4381 Processor.
Maintenance Tools List
TOOLS 005
Tool Figures ..........•...•...••••.••••••••••••••.•
Actuation Tool (Part 2360092) ..............•..•.....•••..
Actuation Tool (Part 4134750) ........•....•.•.. ......... .
Conductive Parts Caddy (Part 6428141) ..•.•.•..............
Continuity Checker (Part 453587) ....•.....••......•.......
I/O Signal Cable Unlatch Tool (Part 2360349) ...•......•......
Lighted Magnifier (Part 452642) .•.......•.................
Module Pin Template (Part 5665902) •.......•.......•••....
Probe Mask (Part 9953923) ....•......................••.
Module Pin Aligner (Part 2360424) ..•.................•....
Probe Mask Probe Assembly (Part 401064) ....••.•... . ..•.•..
Tor-que Wrench (Part 5665903) ...............•...•..•..•.
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (Part 1805216) ....•••.•..•........
Modular Jack Test Adapter (Part 6339647) •.•••••...........•
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 012
TOOLS 012
TOOLS 012
, Tool DescriPtion
Actuation Tool (I/O Cables)
TOOLS 016
TOOLS 016
TOOLS 016
TOOLS 016
TOOLS 016
.......................... ... ...
TOOLS 021
Module Pin Aligner
"
'"-
Fiaure Paae
TOOLS 006
Actuation Tool (Boards 01A-A 1 to 01A-A4 and
01B-A 1)
4134750
TOOLS 006
Conductive Parts Caddy
6428141
TOOLS 006
Continuity Checker
Actuation Tools ••.•.•••••••••.••....••••••••••••••• TOOLS 015
Operation •.......................................... TOOLS 015
Continuity Checker ..••.•.•....•.•..•••..••.••••••.••
Operation ................................•..•.......
Maintenance ......................•......•..••....••.
Battery Replacement .....................•...........
Lamp Replacement ..............•.•••..•....... .....
Part Number
2360092
·
Continuity checker
453587
TOOLS 006/016
•
Adapter
453954
TOOLS 016
•
Battery 1.35V
453119
TOOLS 016
·
Battery 2.8V
453120
TOOLS 016
•
Extension
5500731
TOOLS 016
•
Lamp
5353889
TOOLS 016
1/0 Sianal Cable Unlatch Tool
Lighted Mcmnifier
Modular Jack Test Adapter
2360349
452642
6339647
TOOLS 006
TOOLS 011
Module Pin Aligner
Module Pin Alianment Template
2360424
5665902
TOOLS 011/021
TOOLS 011
MCM Probe Kit
9990129
TOOLS 011
Probe Mask
9953923
TOOLS 011
Probe Assembly
401064
TOOLS 011
5665903
1805216
TOOLS 012
TOOLS 012
MCM Probe Kit Assembly
·
·
·
TorCjue Wrench for Power Bus
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
Seg GB005
I
PN 6169613
_1 of2
II
.
TOOLS 012
ECA20558
EC A20560
I
L.~'OL1~O~c~t~8~4__~1~8~F~e~b~8~5~.L-________~________~________~
TOOLS 005
TOOLS 006
Tool Figures
Actuation Tool (Part 2360092)
Conductive Parts Caddy (Part 6428141)
1/0 Signal Cable Unlatch Tool (Part 2360349)
(I/O signal cables)
Actuation Tool (Part 4134750)
(Torque leaf springs)
Continuity Checker (Part 453587)
~.'
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
'I
PN 6169613
L..:S::.:::e:.:1.q....::G::.::::B:;:;:;OO~5~...J"~2~o.!...!f2!::--~
II.
I
EC A20558
ECA20560
01 Oct 84 ,1ft Feb 85
,
,
I
I
It Copyright IBM Corp, 1984
0000000000000000000000000
TOOLS 006
ooooooooc
,.,UHr!t 'hOl''''.IIH' I ••
':l'·',!'!:'Ml"·'W*'
.. ,"\W".,"""
'b
HF"'';!,
'til"",'
,',
. " : .. '*t"IIf, ..
',"MMW"",WM,,,.twH"tltilll .. ""?,'II"""1I1.'
'I
~'wWihjdl,.il+.LJ
.:'.!.l.LM.4W,V
H
[!
HLh
.!i.j.I.!W&j
bbrll, If
,
'.I!.
0000000000000000000000000 00.00.000
TOOLS 011
Module Pin Aligner (Part 2360424)
Lighted Magnifier (Part 452642)
Probe Mask (Part 9953923)
--
Probe Mask Probe Assembly (Part 401064)
Module Pin Template (Part 5665902)
00000000000000000000000000
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
'0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:'
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000
0
Signal
Probe
(Red)
000000000
OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOGOOOOOOO
00000000000000000000000 000
00000000000000000000000000
Ground
Probe
(Black)
OOOOOOOOOOOOOODOOOOOOOOOOO
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000
o
0
0
0
0
0
00
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000000000'000000000000
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 '0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000000000000000000000
THIS SIDE TOWARD PINS
4381-3
B/M 2676380
If)
I
MI
I
PN 6169614
II
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
EC A2055S1 EC A20560
. 18 Feb 85 .
L.,;S~e~g:l...!:G:.:;B~0:..!1..:::0~--L..1.=....;;o..;..f.;:;,2______.. ' 01 Oct 84
TOOLS 011
TOOLS 012
Torque Wrench (Part 5665903)
Modular Jack Test Adapter (Part 6339647)
Position 8
(Grev)
1~~~~L..Position 2
(Orange)
Eight·Pin Keyed Modular Data Plug
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (Part 1805216)
.
4381-3
B / M 2676380
rMl'
IpN 6169614
1,1:
"
EC,A20558I'ECA2056o'l
.
S::.:e:.::l.g...;:G=8:..::.0..:...;'0~--4.,;;.2;....;:o~f.=2______. . 01 Oct 84 '. 18 Feb 85
a...;1
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
TOOLS 012
0000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
TOOLS 015
Actuation Tools
This actuation tool (part 2360092) is used to remove
and replace I/O signal cables groupers. It is a
hand-operated tool with a preset torque setting when
turned in a clockwise direction. Torque control is needed
to prevent damage to the screw threads and inserts.
I
Note: The part number for the blade of the actuation
tool is 2360093.
This actuation tool (part 4134750) is used to torque the
horizontal cable retention bars and mounting screws for
the card cages on boards 01 A-A 1 through 01 A-A4 and
01 B-A 1. It is a hand-operated tool with a preset torque
setting when turned in a clockwise direction. Torque
control is needed to prevent damage to the screw
threads, inserts, and boards.
Note: The part number for the blade of the actuation
tool is 4138537.
Operation
Operation
Ensure the tip of the tool is seated in the socket head
screw to be removed or replaced. When tightening the
screw, turn the tool in a clockwise direction until you feel
the tool slip and hear a clicking sound. Screw is now fully
tightened. When removing a screw, ensure the tip is fully
seated in the socket head screw. The actuation tool has
a positive drive in a counterclockwise direction.
Ensure the tip of tool is seated in the socket head screw
to be removed or replaced. When tightening the screw,
turn the tool in a clockwise direction until you feel the tool
slip and hear a clicking sound. Screw is now fully
tightened. When removing a screw, ensure the tip is fully
seated in the socket head screw. The actuation tool has a
positive drive in a counterclockwise direction.
453912 Handle
1621706 Setscrew
2360093 Hex Rod
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~9 GB015
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
TOOLS 015
TOOLS 016
Continuity Checker
The continuity checker is a plastic housing with a clear
plastic lens that contains an indicator. A 6-32 threaded
rod extends from one end to a flexible lead with a 6-32
threaded stud extending from the other end. Various
probe tips can be adapted to the continuity checker.
Lamp
(Part 5353889)
Lockscrew
Part 453587
Operation
Assemble the necessary probe tip to the continuity
checker. Connect the probe tip on the flexible lead to a
convenient checkpoint. Probe with the threaded rod
(with probe tip) protruding from the other end of the
continuity checker.
Adapter
(Part 453954)
Warning: Do not use the CE ohmmeter on LSI logic.
Circuits could de damaged.
Maintenance
Maintenance consists of replacement of the following:
•
1.35V battery (part 453119)
•
2.8V battery (part 453120)
•
Indicator lamp (part 5353889)
Extension
(Part 5500731)
~~----------_o___~
Battery Replacement
Remove the lockscrew near the front of the continuity
checker. Hold the body, and pull the clear plastic end
until the two parts are separated. Replace the defective
batteries (observe the polarity). Reverse this procedure
for reassembly.
Lamp Replacement
Disassemble the tool as in the "Battery Replacement"
procedure. Loosen the locknut, and remove the circuit
card assembly from the plastic lens. Remove the
defective lamp. Remove the lens cap from the new lamp,
and insert in the circuit card assembly.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
[
2.8V Battery
(Part 453120)
~~g GB015
TOOLS 016
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GC010
REM 005
REM 006
Board/Retention Cover
Tool required:
Actuation Tool (part 4134750).
Note: This procedure enables you to probe the pins on
boards 01 A-A 1 through 01 A-A4 and 01 B-A 1 that are
covered by the board/retention cover.
Ii .
1.
Unlatch the cable retainers
2.
Remove the four mounting screws
3.
Remove the board/retention cover
board.
m
E1 from the
4. Reverse the procedure for board/retention cover
replacement.
Pin Side of Board
4381-3
INti
81 M 2616'3'86
L.,:S&::,:'
I
PN 6169558
EC A20558
:.::a9....;G=.:C~O:::.:1:.::0_...J....;;:4;...:of::.;.
.. . ;.:.4_ _~ ~O.!,;l~O~c!..t~84~,...J,.";'!'!::"':":~~-L.~-=a..::=--"'--------L------'
REM 006
tP Copyright 'IBM Corp. 1984
01
,~-y
0',,'-00 '0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ()
. 0 0 0
O() 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0
00000 0000
...
~.
t'
""!·~'lr:!ii·!H,·
,.."
'.rIt"#iFltil i.!M*: ' • . f±itI rlfllW",u+fflt= ."' ... " \It Wflll!tb!..
o
.... "',·rI!t¥f±.!dii§nl"r "-i-'fCY'''-*'!
tH"
.r", ;..,*"# 0- " "
"t",,,
t ..
r";*'*·'·""e' "t't!ttdblcW:=t"
.-,
W
triHt'
"
' ...... I
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0·0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
REM 015
LSI Cards
Warning: Damage results if cards are removed with
power on. Do not remove any FRU until you power down
the processor.
1.
2.
Power down the processor using the following
procedure unless you are instructed differently by a
repair procedure.
8.
Power liP the processor using the following
procedure unless you are instructed differently by a
repair procedure.
a.
If you exchanged cards on board 01 A-A 1, set
CB 1 and CB2 to the on position.
b.
Set the Power Off switch on the service panel to
Normal.
c.
Press Power On.
d.
When the Local Time Clock displays, enter the
date and time in the fields on the screen and
press ENTER.
a.
Ensure that you are in CE Mode.
b.
Ensure that the I/O Power Hold switch on the
service panel is set to I/O Power Hold.
c.
Set the Power Off switch on the service panel to
Power Off.
d.
Wait until the service panel displays 00000.
e.
When the Power Up/Down screen displays, key
in UC and press ENTER.
e.
If you exchange cards on board 01A-A 1, set
CB 1 and CB2 to the off position.
f.
Set the I/O Power Hold switch on the service
panel to Normal.
Open the frame covers.
Warning: A module or card can be destroyed by
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). See your ESD kit for
safety and maintenance instructions.
'3.
Remove the board card cover.
4.
Determine the card to be removed.
5.
To remove, unlock the extractor levers
same time until the card disengages.
6.
To replace, open both extractor levers fully. Insert
the card guide into the slotted guide grooves (card
components to the right). Apply firm finger pressure
to the card holder to ensure proper seating. After
reseating, lock both of the extractor levers at the
same time.
7.
Install the board card cover.
II at the
Typical LSI Card
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GC015
REM 015
I
I.
o
0 0----0--0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -0- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1
-.-"--_ .. _---
.-.. "
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"'M" ""·"W-.",··,rt·, ·'rl-'H·····i '... ,"
..
;r'
t,'
·*1
',., '••
'to> ....
"'P"t'fYw.wtt
t
,fdtt.lfd'm±frlif ,·"t
,r'
"',,reet'N,,Fjff 111M'" ;"¥+:!+fd'ild&Mr.iI .... -H·
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 021
Board 01A-B1
CAUTION
The weight of the board is approximately 36 kg
(80 Ib). Two persons are needed to remove and
installtne board.
4.
Open rear frame cover.
14. Open the front frame cover.
5.
Loosen one screw, and open B 1 plenum.
15. Open gate Ole.
6.
Ensure that the cable groupers are labeled for proper
repositioning before they are removed from the board
assembly.
16. Remove the three connectors (J 1, J2, and J3) from
PSll1.
7.
Remove all cable groupers starting with the bottom
positions and work toward the top.
8.
Remove the conductive mat from your ESD kit and
place it on the floor near the processor.
Tools Required:
Actuation Tool for Cable Grouper (part 2360092)
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
Removal
1.
Note: See your ESD kit for safety and maintenance
instructions.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
9.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
Open the new board shipping container.
10. Remove the new board from the shipping container
and place it on one-half of the conductive mat
(handles down).
11. Remove the module guard located at the bottom of
the board assembly
and install it on the board
that is to be removed.
m'
17. Remove the ground wire located at the top right
corner of the board.
18. Remove the eight board mounting screws, leaving the
top two screws for last.
Note: Before removing the board, ensure that you
have work space large enough for two boards.
19. As the last two screws are removed, pull out the
base of the board and set it on the lower support
ledge of the frame.
21. Remove the module guard from the old board
assembly.
22. Fasten the ESD wrist band to the wrist of the person
who will be transferring the modules from the old
board to the new board.
Note: See your ESD kit for safety and maintenance
instructions.
23. Transfer the modules at this time, and ensure that
they are properly plugged.
Note: For the correct module removal procedure,
see page REM 025.
24. Remove the wrist band and store it in the ESD kit.
20. Remove the board assembly by pulling the right side
away from the frame first. Then remove the board
assembly, and place it on the conductive mat
(handles down).
12. Remove the 12 commoning bus screws at the board
left and right side.
terminal blocks
a
13. Remove and label any additional wires connected to
the commoning bus.
01A-Sl
Module Side
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~9
«> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GC020
IPN
6169560
1 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 021
REM 022
Replacement
1.
Install the module guard on the new board assembly.
2.
To install the board, first lift and rest the board
assembly on the lower support ledge in front of the
opening with the bottom of the board assembly
against the lip of the support ledge.
12. Install the board ground wire.
3.
4.
S.
Slide the board assembly to the extreme left of the
frame, aligning the board bus terminal block tabs
with the commoning bus tabs.
With the board in this position, tilt the top of the
board assembly inward against the frame, aligning
the board bus terminal block tabs with the
commoning bus tabs.
In a continuous motion, lift the board assembly
against the' commoning bus until the bottom of the
board assembly clears the main support ledge.
Position the bottom edge of the board assembly
against the machine frame.
6.
Install the eight board mounting screws, finger tight
only.
7.
Remove the module guard from the new board
assembly, install it on the old board assembly, and
pack the old board in the shipping container.
8.
Remove the ESO cable and store it along with the
conductive mat in your ESO kit.
9.
Install all cable groupers starting at the top of the
board.
Note: Measure the ground integrity of the replaced
FRU using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
0.1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine frame
near the replaced FRU ensuring the painted surface is
penetrated. Place the other probe on any bare metal
area of the replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1
ohm or less, you have a good ground. If the
measurement is greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an
i'mproperly installed ground wire,·
o
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
13. Close and tighten B 1 plenum.
14. Close frame cover.
15. Go to the wire side;gf the board and torque the eight
board mounting screws to SR 12 :!:2 Newton meter
(9 :!: 1.S ft Ibs).
16. Reinstall connectors J 1, J2, and J3 into PS 111.
17. Place CB 1 and CB2 to the ON position. Press Power
On/IML on the OCP.
18. Run the MSS diagnostics and PU diagnostics Option
V test.
10. Install the 12 commoning bus screws. (Align board if
necessary by shifting the board to the right or to the
left to align the distribution bus to the commoning
bus.)
11. Tighten the 12 screws. All screws must be torqued
at SR 27 :!:4Newton meter (20:!:3 ft Ibs).
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp, 1984
o o
GC020
IPN
0
6169560
2 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
REM 022
0 '0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ,
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 023
Board 01A-B2
CAUTION
The weight of the board is approximately 36 kg
(80 Ib). Two persons are needed to remove and
install the board.
Tools Required:
6.
Ensure that the cable groupers are labeled for proper
repositioning before they are removed from the board
assembly.
7.
Remove all cable groupers starting with the bottom
positions and work toward the top.
15. Perform the following two steps if a two piece bus
bar is installed:
a.
iii .
8. Remove the conductive mat from your ESD kit and
Actuation Tool for Cable Grouper (part 2360092)
Using a quarter-inch drive socket set, remove the
three screws holding the commoning bus and
distribution bus terminal block
Note: There may be six screws on early level
boards.
place it on the floor near the processor.
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
Removal
1. Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
Note: See your ESD kit for safety and maintenance
instructions.
b.
Remove the terminal block; be careful not to
drop the block.
9. Open the new board shipping container.
16. Open the front frame cover.
10. Remove the new board from the shipping container
and piace it on one-half of the conductive mat
(handles down).
17. Open gate 01 C.
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear frame cover.
5.
Loosen one screw, and open B2 plenum.
11. Remove the module guard located at the bottom of
m'
the board assembly
that is to be removed.
and install it on the board
12. Remove the upper bus safety shield.
13. Remove the 12 commoning bus screws at the board
terminal blocks
left and right side.
Ii!
14. Remove and label any additional wires connected to
the commoning bus.
23. Remove the module guard from the old board
assembly.
24. Fasten the ESD wri.st band to the wrist of the person
who will be transferring the modules from the old
board to the new board.
Note: See your ESD kit for safety. and maintenance
instructions.
25. Transfer the modules at this time, and ensure that
they are properly plugged.
18. Remove the three connectors (J 1, J2, and J3) from
PS106.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)' and
22. Remove the board assembly by pulling the right side
away from the frame first. Then remove the board
assembly, and place it on the conductive mat
(handles down).
Note: For the correct module removal procedure,
see page REM 025.
19. Remove the ground wire located at the top right
corner of the board.
26. Remove the wrist band and store it in the ESD kit.
20. Remove the eight board mounting screws, leaving
the top two screws for last.
Note: Before removing the board, ensure that you
have work space large enough for two boards.
2 1 . As the last two screws are removed, pull out the
base of the board and set it on the lower support
ledge of the frame.,
01A-B2
Module Side
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~9
ID Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
GC020
IPN
6169560
3 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 023
REM 024
Replacement
1.
Install the module guard on the new board assembly.
12. Reattach the terminal block (if present) with three
2. To install the board, first lift and rest the board
screws.
assembly on the lower support ledge in front of the
opening with the bottom of the board assembly
against the lip of the support ledge.
3. Slide the board assembly to the extreme left of the
frame, aligning the board bus terminal block tabs
with the commoning bus tabs.
4. With the board in this position, tilt the top of the
board assembly inward against the frame, aligning
the board bus terminal block tabs with the
commoning bus tabs.
5.
6.
In a continuous motion, lift the board assembly
against the commoning bus until the bottom of the
board assembly clears the main support ledge.
Position the bottom edge of the board assembly
against the machine frame.
Install the eight board mounting screws, finger tight
only.
Note: Only three screws are needed if replacing an
early level board.
, 3. Install the board ground wire.
Note: Measure the ground integrity of the replaced
FRU using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
0.1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine frame
near the replaced FRU ensuring the painted surface is
penetrated. Place the other probe on any bare metal
area of the replaced FRU. If the measurement is O. ,
ohm or less, you have a good ground. If the
measurement is greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an
improperly installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
14. Install the safety shield.
7. Remove the module guard from the new board
assembly, install it on the old board assembly, and
pack the old board in the shipping container.
15. Close and tighten B2 plenum.
16. Close frame cover.
Remove the ESO cable and store it along with the
conductive mat in your ESO kit.
9. Install all cable groupers starting at the top of the
17. Go to the wire side of the board and torque the eight
board mounting screws to SR 12 ±2 Newton meter
(9 :t 1.5 ft Ibs).
board.
18. Reinstall connectors J 1, J2, and J3 into PS 106.
10. Install the 12 commoning bus screws. (Align board if
necessary by shifting the board to the right or to the
left to align the distribution bus to the commoning
bus.)
11. Tighten the 12 screws. All screws must be torqued
at SR 27 ±4 Newton meter (20 ±3 ft Ibs).
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~q
GC020
IpN
6169560
4 of 4
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
19. Place CB 1 and CB2 to the ON position. Press Power
On/IML on the OCP.
20. Run the MSS diagnostics and PU diagnostics Option
V tes.t.,
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
o 00000000000000 0000000000
REM 024
000000000;
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 025
64 MM Pluggable Module
Tools required:
11. Apply additional downward force on the actuator bail
to drive the module free of the spring connectors.
14. Carefully place the module in position, and hold in
position until the next step.
Module Pin Aligner (part 2360424)
Module Pin Alignment Template (part 5665902).
Note: The module must be held in position because
it is free to be removed.
Warning: Do not remove any screws from the spring
housing. Attempting to remove the spring housing results
in permanent damage to the 81 or 82 board.
12. Carefully remove the module away from the module
site. Remove the new module from the protective
container and place the old module in it.
1.
13. Ensure that the new module pins are aligned; use the
Module Pin Alignment Template (part 5665902).
Press Power Off on the operator control panel unless
instructed differently by a repair procedure.
2.
Open rear cover of the machine.
3.
Open 81 or B2 plenum by loosening one screw.
Warning: A module can be destroyed by touching
the pins because of Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
Never touch the pins of a module unless you are
wearing a wrist band.
4.
Note: Do not attempt to straighten any module pin
that is bent more than the distance to the next row,
or equivalent. Doing this can cause the pin to break
off during module insertion. Pins bent less than this
distance can be straightened using the pin aligner
(part 2360424).
6.
Fasten the ESD wrist band to the wrist of the person
who will be removing and installing the modules.
7.
Attach the ESD cable to the the protective container
of the new module.
8.
Determine which pluggable module is to be removed.
9.
Hold the two bail-retaining latches
on both sides
of the module assembly, located near the top.
17 . To ensure the module is properly seated, squeeze the
two bail-retaining latches toward each other and pull
the actuator bail with your finger until the actuator
bail is in a free state.
1.
Remove the module.
2.
Ensure that the actuator bail
position.
3.
Squeeze the actuator bail shown at
until the pivot
points are free from the spring housing.
4.
Remove the actuator bail from the spring housing.
5.
Reverse the procedure for actuator bail replacement.
m
is in the open
m
Note: When reinstalling the actuator bail. ensure
the bail-retaining latches
are on the inside of the
actuator bail.
IJ
18. Hold the module and try to move it. If the module is
tight, reactivate the actuator bail. If the module is
loose, go back to step 12.
Bail-Retaining Latches
20. Close the B 1 or B2 plenum, and tighten the screw.
Note: See your the ESD kit for safety and
maintenance instructions.
Plug the wrist band and the ESO cable into the B 1 or
B2 plenum latch bracket.
16. The two bail-retaining latches. located on both sides
of the module assembly near the top, should be in a
latched position.
19. Remove the wrist band and ESO cable and store in
the ESD kit.
Remove the wrist band and the ESO cable from the
ESD kit.
5.
15. While holding the module in position, slowly but
continuously push the actuator bail in until it hits the
stop.
Actuator Bail
Warning: Do not remove any screws from the spring
housing until instructed in this procedure. Attempting to
remove the spring housing results in permanent damage
to the 81 or B2 board.
1.
Remove the module.
2.
Remove the actuator bail.
3.
Remove the one mounting screw, lockwasher, and
washer
from the bail-retaining latches
4.
Remove the bail-retaining latches.
5.
Reverse the procedure for bail-retaining latches
replacement.
01A-Bl or 01A-B2
Board
B
E1
a
10. Squeeze both latches toward each other, and hold
them in that position while pulling the actuator bail
outward with your finger.
m
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copynght IBM Corp. 19B4
GC025
IPN
6169561
1 of 2
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 025
Pluggable Terminator Resistor
REM 026
m
Tool Required:
Scissor Clamp (part 9900233).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Open rear frame cover.
4.
Loosen one screw, and open 81 or 82 plenum.
5. Remove retention cover(s)
resistor section.
a
~
from terminator
6. Place scissor clamp (part 9900233)
B
m
in center of
terminator resistor (TR) and pull straight out.
B
•
Warning: The spring housing is not fastened to the
board. To prevent the spring housing from falling off
the board, do not remove more than one row of TRs
at a time.
7. Reverse procedure for terminator resistor
replacement.
Note: When replacing TRs, ensure that the replacement
resistor has the same colored part number as resistor that
was removed. The two resistors that can be used are
(part 4481673) black in color and (part 4481674) red in
color shown at
[;]
~
EJ
.~o
VA
~ BB
•
B
•
GJ
EJ
•
GJ
•
[;]
[;J
[;]
[;]
[;]
[;]
EJ
[;]
•
•
•
•
~
01A-B 1 or B2
Module Side
B .
Color Stripe
Part Number
Pluggable Terminator Resistor
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
IPN
6169561
2 of 2
GC025
REM 026-
CCl Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
,·) 0' 000,"10:' 0·: 0"
0
I
" I
~
, ,
I
/
',
,
!
,
,
o 00000
0·" 0,· 0·,·. O·
, 1 ,
"
I
0·,.'
O,!" O·.,
It',
,
'0·" (}",
.
II
0
"
000000000
, , ·""""' ..·,,t=ft,·tIlewll tt...." ...,j,....I,..&t!·,I!!.W'i .....r ! l " ...!l!: ..... M"+!!H*'Hlrl'
1M" N*dd6!l!!H'HI&+'H'€
'
'V
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 031
Sense Capacitors
1. Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC). and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear cover of frame.
5.
Open B 1 and B2 plenum by loosening one screw on
each.
6.
locate bus bars on top of board B2.
7.
Remove the upper safety shield by loosening three
mounting screws and remove the lower safety shield
by loosening two mounting screws.
8.
Unplug four wires
capacitor assembly.
9.
Remove the six screws and washers
that fasten
the sense capacitors assembly to bus bars A, B, and
Ii! that are fasten to the sense
m
C.
.
10. Remove the sense capacitors assembly.
1,. Reverse procedure for sense capacitors replacement.
-~====~-=-¥~)
Rear view of Sense Capacitors
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
I PN 6169562 II EC A20558I EC A20562
L.,S;::,8:,:9:a...,;;G:,;C:,;0..3..0:..---'.....;1,-:o:,;f....;2=--_ _.......I• • 01 Oct 84 . 30 Aug 85
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
REM 031
REM 032
Cables
I/O Signal Cables
Flat Cables
Tools Required:
Tool required if boards 01 A-A 1 through 01 A-A4 or
01 B-A 1 are affected:
Torque Tool for Cable Grouper (part 2360092)
14. Holding the tool with the tip resting on top of the
latch arm, push the tool straight in until the recessed
ledge of the tool comes in contact with the slot rib as
shown at I]J .
Cable Unlatch Tool (part 2360349).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear frame cover.
5.
Open B 1 or B2 plenum by loosening one screw.
6.
Determine which cable grouper assembly is to be
removed.
7.
Remove grouper assembly.
8.
Remove retainer arms at
9.
Determine which 18-PAC is defective.
Actuation Tool (part 4134750).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
15. While holding the tool in this position, press the
working end of the tool down slowly moving the
latch arm down below the latching shelf surface as
shown atm.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 .and CB2 in the OFF position.
16. Repeat this same procedure for the other end of the
18-PAC cable.
4.
Determine which cable assembly is to be removed.
5.
Remove enough cable retainers to permit tracing of
cables into the cable channel.
6.
Ensure that you have the correct cables and cut the
cables (in the channel) at both ends.
17. Hold all the trilead cables attached to the 18-PAC to
be removed, and gently pull on the cables to remove
the 18-PAC.
m
if present.
Note: Do not unlatch and remove-more than one
18-PAC cable assembly at a time.
. 7.
18. Remove enough cable retainers to permit tracing of
cables into the cable channel.
8.
Place replacement cable on top of pile in cable
raceway, and replace cable retainers.
Reconnect both ends of replacement cable into
position.
19. Ensure that you have the correct cables and cut the
cables (in the channel) at both ends.
10. Orient the grouper housing so that one end of the
housing is facing towards you.
20. Place replacement cable on top of pile in cable
raceway, and replace cable retainers.
11. Hold the cable unlatch tool (part 2360349), and
position it so that the narrow end of the tool is
parallel to the slot openings as shown at
m.
21. Reconnect both ends of replacement cable into
grouper.
12. The front end of the tool has a recessed ledge that
seats against the slot ribs.
22. Install retainer arms if present.
Note: With the 18-PAC cable positioned for either
end, rotate the tool 180 degrees so that the recessed
ledge of the tool is away from the side wall of the
housing and the straight side of the tool is against
the side wall.
23. Install grouper assembly.
24. Close B 1 or B2 plenum by tightening one screw.
25. Close the rear frame cover.
13. Place the tip of the tool on top of the latch arm
protruding out of the housing.
26. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the ON position.
Warning: To prevent damage to the slot ribs, do
not use excessive force when moving the latch arm.
27. Close left side cover of frame.
28. Press Power On/IML on the operator control panel.
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
MI
I
PN 6169562
II
EC A2,0558
L..S;;;.;e;;.;9.....G;;.;C_0_3_0;.....--I.. ..;;2;...;o;;.;f-=2~_ _--I• • 01 Oct 84
I
EC A20562
. 30Au9 85 '
I
I
REM 032
10 CopyrIght IBM Corp. 19B4
OOOOO()OiOOOOOOO O· 0'1 0' 0',' 0"",: 0' O,'"i 0 0', 0"" 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I
"
I
' ;
-
1,1
,
\
I
' .
I ' "
/
'
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 035
Power Supplies
Power Supply 101
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (Pce)' and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover, and locate PS 10 1.
5. Remove the front safety shield.
6.
Disconnect P071J .
7.
Disconnect cables at
m
8. Disconnect ground wire
II
9. Remove the four mounting screws and washers
m
10. Carefully pull PS 10 1 from frame.
,
11. Reverse procedure for PS 10 1 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
~~~~~--c-~)~)'m
PS101
,
4381-3
81M 2676380
C Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
REM 035
REM 036
Power Supply 102
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover, and locate PS102.
5.
Disconnect cables at
6.
IJ and m
Disconnect ground wire B .
7.
Remove the four mounting screws and washers
8.
Carefully pull PS102 from frame.
9.
Reverse procedure for PS102 replacement.
m
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
Jess, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
REM 036
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
OO()OOOOOOO
000 0000 000000
1
o
00000000
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 041
Power Supply 103
1. Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2. Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCe), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover of frame.
5. Open gate 01 C, and locate PS 103 on rear of gate.
6.
Disconnect cables at
E1 .
7. Disconnect cable P 10
8.
III .
Disconnect ground wire
m
9. Remove the four mounting screws and washers
m
10. Carefully pull PS103 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for PS 103 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame riear the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
I
PN 6169564
II
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
EC A20558
EC A20562
Oct 84 • 30 Aug 85
&..S:.e:.;g:l....,.;G::;.;C::;.;0;;..4,;.;;O~--'•..;1...;o::;.;f:..:2=--_ _....... 01
REM 041
REM 042
Power Supply 104
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2. Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear cover of frame, and locate rear of PS 104.
5. Disconnect cables at
m
EI .
Ground
iii at the rear of PCC box.
6.
Disconnect cable P 14
7.
Locate front of PS 104 on left side of frame.
8. Disconnect ground wire,B .
9. Remove the four mounting bolts, washers, and
lock washers
iii .
10. Carefully pull PS104 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for PS 104 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
I
m
J7 J6
J3
cD
J5 J4
IIII
Front View
Rear View
4381-3
81M 2676380
REM 042
C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
000000000
7"''''
,,'oW
nT",
,'"I ...
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
REM 045
Power Supply 105
Tools Required:
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
14. Perform the following.
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (Pce), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear cover of frame.
a.
See Volume A03. page PR 1015 for the correct
current settings of the new power supply.
b.
Reverse procedure for PS 1OS replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire.
measure the ground integrity of the replaced FRU
using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
O. 1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine
frame near the replaced FRU ensuring the
painted surface is penetrated. Place the other
probe on any bare metal area of the replaced
FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or less.
you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm. check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
S. Open 82 plenum to gain access to the rear of
PS105.
6. Remove the safety shield covering the voltage bus
bars.
7. Disconnect cables at
8.
a
9, Locate front of PS 105 on left side of frame.
c.
B.
11. Remove the two mounting bolts, washers, and
lockwashers
m.
12. Remove bolt, washer, lockwasher, and nut
o
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1
ohm. invoke your support structure.
Remove two voltage bus bars fastened atm
10. Remove ground wire
o
iii
Torque the voltage bus bar screws shown at
to 27 :t4 Newton meter (20 :t3 ft Ibs) using the
torque wrench and 1/4 to 3/8 adapter.
Rear View
Warning: Ensure that the voltage bus bars and
terminals are not touching the machine frame.
m
13. Carefully pull PS105 from frame.
m
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
GC045
IPN
6169565
1 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
Front View
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 045
REM 046
Power Supply 106
Tools Required:
16. Perform the following.
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903),
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)' and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover.
a.
See Volume A03, page PR 1015 for the correct
current settings of the new power supply.
b.
Reverse procedure for PS 106 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire,
measure the ground integrity of the replaced FRU
using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
O. 1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine
frame near the replaced FRU ensuring the
painted surface is penetrated. Place the other
probe on any bare metal area of the replaced
FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or less,
you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
5. Open gate 01 C, and locate rear of PS 106.
6. Remove cables at
a.
7.
Open rear cover of frame.
8.
Open B2 plenum to gain access to the rear of
PS106.
9.
c.
m
11. Locate front of 'PS 106 on left side of frame.
12. Remove ground wire
o
o
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1
ohm. invoke your support structure.
Remove the safety shield covering the voltage bus
bars.
10. Remove two voltage bus bars fastened at
o
m
Torque the voltage bus bar screws shown at
to 27 ±4 Newton meter (20 ±3 ft Ibs) using the
torque wrench and 1/4 to 3/8 adapter.
Rear View
Warning: Ensure that the voltage bus bars and
terminals are not touching the machine frame.
B.
13. Remove the two mounting bolts, washers, and
lockwashers
m.
14. Remove bolt, washer, lockwasher, and nut
Ii
I
15. Carefully pull PS 106 from frame.
m
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
IC>
M~'~~~
____~__~________~
GC045___L2P~N.2f~6~1_6_9_5_6_5~·1
.
. L..~E~C~A~2~0~5~5~8~~~~~-J~~~~~~
01 Oct 84
l_Seg
Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
00000:0000
o
0'," 0.,' 0 0
I
/1
I
..
,I
I:
~
OOO()o!ooooo
REM 046
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
REM 051
Power Supply 107
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)' and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover of frame, and locate the front of
PS107.
5.
Disconnect ground wire
6.
Disconnect cables at !]I
B
m
7. Open gate 01C.
Ground
8. Open gate 01B, and locate rear of PS107
9.
Remove the four mounting screws and washers
m
10. Carefully pull PS 107 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for PS 107 replacement.
Not~: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
I
II
MI
PN 6169566
EC A20558I EC A20562
&",;:;,S,;:;,8g;:a....;G;;;.C;;;.0;;;.5;;;.O............_1_o...,f....2_____........ 01 Oct 84 . 30 Aug 85
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
REM 051
REM 052
Power Supply 108
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)' and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover of frame, and locate front of
PS108.
5.
Disconnect ground wirerJ
6.
Disconnect cables at I]
7.
Open gate 01C.
8.
Open gate 01B, and locate rear of PS108.
9.
Remove the four mounting screws and washers
m
10. Carefully pull PS 108 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for PS 108 replacement.
Note: Afterreconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement ;s 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than O. 1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm,
invoke your support structure.
Front View
Front View
m
4381-3
81M 2676380
~ Copyright 16M Corp. 1964
REM 052
o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o 00 o o 0 0 0 0 0
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 055
Power Supply 109
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover of frame, and locate front of
PS109.
5.
Disconnect ground wire
6.
Disconnect cables at
fl
m
7. Open gate 01C.
8. Open gate 01 B, and locate rear of PS 109.
9. Remove the four mounting screws and washers
m.
10. Carefully pull PS 109 from frame.
Ground
11. Reverse procedure for PS 109 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
. the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multi meter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
m
\...
'~
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
Front View
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
ID Copvright IBM Corp. 1984
GC055
IPN
6169567
1 of 2
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
REM 055
I
.1
REM 056
13. Perform the following.
Power Supply 111
a.
See Volume A03, page PR 1015 for the correct
current settings of the new power supply.
b.
Reverse procedure for PS 1 11 replacement.
Tools Required:
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover and locate the rear of PS 111.
5. Remove cables Jl, J2, and J3 shown at
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire.
measure the ground integrity of the replaced FRU
using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
O. 1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine
frame near the replaced FR U ensuring the
painted surface is penetrated. Place the other
probe on any bare metal area of the replaced
FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or less.
you have a good ground .. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm. check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
Il .
6. Remove the safety shield covering the voltage bus
8.
m
Locate front of PS 111 on left side of frame.
9. Remove ground wire
II .
10. Remove the two mounting bolts, washers, and
lockwashers
m.
.
11. Remove bolt, washer, lock washer, and
n~t
o
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1
ohm. invoke your support structure.
bars.
7. Remove two voltage bus bars fastened at
o
c.
m
Torque the voltage bus bar screws shown at
to 27 :!:4 Newton meter (20 :!:3 ft Ibs) using the
torque wrench and 1/4 to 3/8 adapter.
Warning: Ensure that the voltage bus bars and
terminals are not touching the machine frame.
Rear View
m
12. Carefully pull PS 111 from frame.
I
m
4381-3
81M 2676380
PN 6169567
2 of 2
ECA20560
18 Feb 85
Left Sido
Front View
REM 056
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
o
000000000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000000000000
"'" ti """~'
.
M' 'r '
df
+ '"
Wr'rW t' ".' ., ' • *"
' , ' ;,. . . ,.- ....
0000000000000000000000000
000000000
REM 061
13. Perform the following.
power Supply 112
a.
See Volume A03, page PR 1015 for the correct
current settings of the new power supply.
b.
Reverse procedure for PS 112 replacement.
Tools Required:
1/4 to 3/8 Drive Adapter (part 1805216)
Torque Tool for Commoning Bus (part 5665903).
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire,
measure the ground integrity of the replaced FRU
using a digital multimeter (part 8496278) for
O. 1 ohm or less before any connectors are
reconnected. Place one probe on the machine
frame near the replaced FRU ensuring the
painted surface is penetrated. Place the other
probe on any bare metal area of the replaced
FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohin or less,
you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover and locate the rear of PS 112.
5. Remove cables J 1, J2, and J3 shown at
EI .
6. Remove the safety shield covering the voltage bus
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1
ohm. invoke your support structure.
bars.
7. Remove two voltage bus bars fastened at
m
c.
8. locate front of PS 112 on left side of frame.
9. Remove ground wire
m.
Warning: Ensure that the voltage bus bars and
terminals are not touching the machine frame.
10. Remove the two mounting bolts, washers, and
lockwashers
m.
11. Remove bolt, washer, lockwasher, and nut
I!I
Torque the voltage bus bar screws shown at
to 27 ±4 Newton meter (20 ±3 ft Ibs) using the
torque wrench and 1/4 to 3/8 adapter.
Rear View
II
12. Carefully pull PS 112 from frame.
I
m
4381-3
81M 2676380
ill Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
PN 6169568
1 of 1
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
Front View
REM 061
0000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 065
Transformers
Transformer 100
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCe), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open PCC door, and locate TR 100.
5.
Remove ground wire.
6.
Remove input wires on TB 1.
7.
Remove four mounting nuts
8.
Carefully pull TR 100 from frame.
9.
Reverse procedure for TR 100 replacement.
TI
iii
To
T2
n
r
Conv
Outlet
TR 100
o
~ °0
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
o B
0
@l
€}1
@J
@
Primary Control Compartment
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
I
II
MI
PN 6169569
ECA20558\ EC A20562 \
~S~e~g~G~C~0~6~5~~.~1~o~f~2~____~. ~c~t~8~4~~.~3~0~A~u.9~8~5~.~________~________~________~
=Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
REM 065
REM 066
Transformer 101
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CS 1 and CS2 in the OFF position.
4. Open
pce door,
and locate TR 101.
5. Remove ground wire.
6. Remove input wires on TS 1 .
7. Disconnect plug J02.
8.
Remove the four mounting nuts
TI
E1
9. Carefully pull TR 101 from frame.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
n
00TO~
Cony
Outae'
o
0
~
10. Reverse procedure for TR 101 replacement.
T2
~
TRIOO
.
4
o·
0
Primary Control Compartment
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
,. ... __
-Lt~)
-f••
TR10l
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
GC065
REM 066
ID Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0.·)
I.
o
000000 0000
o o
()
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
REM 071
Transformer 102
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (peC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4. Open front cover of frame.
5. Open gate 01C, and locate TR 102 on rear of gate.
6. Disconnect P011J .
7. Disconnect cables PO 1 and P02 at JO 1 and J02 of
PS102.
8. Cut tie wrap.
9. Remove the four mounting bolts and washers
m
TR102
10. Carefully pull TR 102 from frame.
11. Reverse procedure for TR 102 replacement.
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
!II Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
REM 071
REM 072
Transformer 103
1. Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover of frame.
5.
Open gate 01C, and locate TR 103 on rear of gate.
6.
Disconnect POl at
7.
Disconnect Pl0 at Jl0 of PS103.
8.
Remove the four mounting nuts
9.
Carefully pull TR 103 from frame.
m
\
g.
m
I
I
!~D
,:':
f'
10. Reverse procedure for TR 103 replacement.
TR103
...
-
I
0
I
-_
•I
I
... "
I
I
Front View
4381-3
81M 2676380
REM 072
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
0 0 - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O,OO()OOOOOO
o
OO()OO 0 0 0
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
REM 075
Transformer 104
All 50 Hz and Japan 60 Hz only.
CAUTION
TR 104-A, S, and C each weigh 25 kg (55 Ib).
Obtain aid before removing or replacing.
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2.
Open left side cover.
3. Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC), and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open front cover.
5. Open gate 01C, and locate TR104-A, Bf or C on rear
of gate.
6.
TB4
Determine the transformer to be removed (A, B, or
C).
TR104-A *
Note: Label all wires before removing TB screws.
TR102
TB3
7. Disconnect TB-1 wires 1, 3, and 5 of the transformer
to be removed. For the correct line voltage wiring
. sequence, refer to Volume C01, page VAOS1.
8.
Locate and disconnect TB-4 wires running from the
transformer to TB-4.
9.
Cut the nylon cable tie wraps, and route the two
wires back to the transformer area.
10. Remove the four mounting nuts
TR104-C*
rJ .
11. Carefully pull the transformer away from the frame.
12. Reverse procedure for TR104-A, B, or C replacement.
a,
*TR104A,
andC.
Only on all 50 Hz and 60 Hz Japan machines.
Left Side View
4381-3
81M 2676380
If)
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
TB-l
Front View
REM 075
HEW OlE
0000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
REM 081
Air Moving Devices
Air Moving Device 10 1·
1.
Press Power Off on the operator control panel.
2. Open left side cover of frame.
3.
Locate the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)' and
place CB 1 and CB2 in the OFF position.
4.
Open rear cover of frame, and locate AMD 101.
5. Loosen the four cover mounting screws, and remove
the cover.
fJ .
6.
Disconnect cable
7.
Disconnect ground wire
AFS107
m
B1
and
Plenum Gate
8. Pull AMD 101 from frame.
9.
Reverse procedure for AMD 101 replacement.
Note: After reconnecting the ground wire, measure
the ground integrity of the replaced FRU using a
digital multimeter (part 8496278) for 0.1 ohm or
less before any connectors are reconnected. Place
one probe on the machine frame near the replaced
'FRU ensuring the painted surface is penetrated.
Place the other probe on any bare metal area of the
replaced FRU. If the measurement is 0.1 ohm or
less, you have a good ground. If. the measurement is
greater than 0.1 ohm, check for an improperly
installed ground wire.
CAUTION
If the measurement is still greater than 0.1 ohm.
invoke your support structure.
PS
105
AFS106
82
and
Plenum Gate
AMD
103
AMD 101
l
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~q
cache error
SP branching error
The SP bus is tested using the DCA card. If a failure is
detected, the failing data is written to the bus repeatedly.
Reads track 2 loader from side 0, track O. Loads records'
1 and 2 into SP storage address 0638.
MSS Code
81801
81802
Error Description
Adapter check on seek
AdaPter detected error on read 10
81803
8180A
Not at track 0 after seek
Dropped readv after seek
No interrupt after read 10 frol1:\ track 0
8180C
8180F
No interrupt after read record
00 read data
Error DescriPtion
SP bus error (data = (2020000)
81811
81812
81820
Data eRC error on read
Drive' error after read data
SP bus error (data = 0206 B6B6)
81F12
Data CRC error
81F20
81F2l
81F29
Seek error
No interruPt seek or read record
Wrong status after seek
= 0204 A55A)
SP bus error (data
SP bus error (data = 0204 FFFF)
SP bus error (data = 0200 0000)
80016
SP bus error (data
C Copyright IBM Corp. '984
Drive dropped ready
Timeout when DDA addressed; SP enters two step loop
Parity error when DDA addressed' SP enters two step loop
Record not found
80013
I~~g
8150A
81513
81523
Drive not ready in 20 seconds
Basic status wrong after reset
81810
80014
80015
4381
BIM 2676380
Error Description
AdaPter check on read basic status
Diskette Test 2
1/0 Bus Test
MSS Code
80011
80()12
MSS Code
81502
81504
81505
GE020
'No interrupt on seek
= FFFF FFFF)
DIAG 030
OOOOOO()()OOOOOOO OOOOOOO()OO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o
0000000000000000000000000 00000.000
DIAG 035
Additional SP Storage Test
Loads tests from tracks 3 and 4 into the first 32K and tests for storage parity errors.
, MSSCode
MSS Code
83501
Error Descriotion
88101
88102
Timeout waiting for diskette
88103
83502
SP storage MC/PC while loading
88201
Error Description
Me/PC errol" on reset
Basic status bits not reset
Basic status bits not reset
Read cycle steal control byte error
83503
External MC/PC error
88202
Cxcle steal control byte not all ones after load
8350A
Diskette drive dropped ready
88203
Cycle steal control byte not aU ones after load
8350C
83512
Wrong status after diskette operation
88301
Reset basic status did not reset correct bits
CRC error on read
88302
Read basic status error
83520
Seek error
88303
88304
Read basic status error
Set basic status did not set correct bits
88305
88306
Read basic status error
DCA interrupt received
DCA and Console Display Tests
Test 81
Test 82
Test 83
Test 84
Test 85
Test 86
Test 87
Test 88
Test 89
Test 8A
Test 88
Test 8C
Test 80
Test 8E
Test 8F
Test 90
Test 91
Test 92
Test 93
Test 94
Test 95
Test 96
Tests adapter reset command
Tests load and read cycle steal byte.
Tests set and read basic status.
Tests reset adapter.
. Tests invalid command.
Tests set/reset basic status.
Tests set/reset extended status.
Tests write/read control latches.
Tests start cycle steal.
Tests that start cycle steal not started with enable Off.
Tests read to port O.
Tests restart DCA.
Tests load, read, and reset byte counter.
Tests address register and controls.
Tests poll counter stepping.
Tests timer stepping.
Tests write to port O. If no terminal is attached and powered up, DCA testing is terminated.
Tests block poll.
Tests clear command to terminal.
Tests setting/resetting over 63 counter.
Tests byte counter.
Exit routine for DCA diagnostics.
Reset adapter did not reset status bits
88402
Reset
88501
MC/PC register wronq at test .start
88502
88503
Invalid command did not set MC/PC inSP
Invalid command did not set MC/PC in adapter
ad~Qter
did not reset interrupt from DCA
88601
All basic status bits off after reset except DCA active
88602
All basic status bits off after reset except stop poll
88603
DCA active not on after read/reset
88604
88701
DCA active was reset on read/reset
Extended status not set correctiv
88702
Extended status not reset correctly
88703
Extended status not correct
88801
88802
Write did not set status bits
88803
Control latches not reset bv reset adapter
88901
Incorrect status after start cvcle steal command
Read command not all zeros
88902
Incorrect command queue start cycle steal command
88A01
Incorrect basic status after start cvcle steal command
Cycle steal control byte wrong
88A02
88A03
Command ~ueue wrong
88B01
Basic status wrong
88B02
Basic status not reset
88COl
Cycle steal control byte wrong
88C02
Basic status wrong
88001
BXte cou'nter not set to ones
88002
Keyboardgueue 2 wr:ong
88E01
88E02
Basic and extended status wrong
88E03
CD Copyright IBM Corp, , 984
No
88401
Device address wronq
Error queue wrong
DIAG 035
DIAG 040
MSS Code
Error Description
88F01
Diagnostic data wrong
88F02
Poll counter bits not set
88F03
Poll counter bits not reset
Extended MSS Diagnostics by UU Codes
uu
89001
Basic status bit not reset
89101
Sto~~oll
89102
No power on response from port 0 display
89103
Status wron~ on write command
or DCA active not on
89104
No power on reset in status
89105
Cvcle steal pointer wrong for keyboard Queue
89201
Extended status
89202
Poll timeout data wrong
Test
10
Routine
10
FO
F1
FD
F2
Support Processor
Support Processor Storage
Support Bus Adapter
Local Channel Adapter
0
1
2
3
F6
Power Controller Adapter
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
to 6
to 6
to 7
to F
to 5
and 2
wron~
Example of Reference Code from MSS Extended Diagnostics
89203
Error Queue pointer not updated
Basic status wrOng
89302
Wrong data in status Queue.
89401
Basic status wrong after looping 63 times
89402
Basic status wron~ after 10cmi1'!9. 64 times
89403
Basic status wrong after rea(ureset
89404
89405
Status change after loading cycle steal control b-.Y1es
Test and routine 10 (SP storage test routine 2)
Reference code (UU RRRR IS)
UU code from table above
12
I
F112xx F8
.-J
Error information
J
Read/reset basic status failed to reset all bits
~cle
89501
Basic status wrong after start
89502
Received status wrong
89503
Received data wrong (one ~yte)
89504.
More than 'two data bytes received
89505
Data Queue pointer not updated
89506
Received data wrong (six !:>rtes)
89507
More than six bytes received
89508
Data Queue pointer not upda.ted
89601
MC/PCset from DCA
B/M 2676380
Area
Tested
4
89301
4381
Code
I~~g
<0 Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE025
steal
F8 indicates HSS diagnostics
DIAG 040
000000000000000000000 0000 00000000·0
M
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 •
'*
'lI,i,",
.lN5.h
"'''Wi'M!
P""!'m(+hcJrtlM'
II,
me,,,.,,,,,,,.,
0 0 0 0" 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 • • 00
DIAG 045
Extended MSS Diagnostics by Test ID
Test
Test 0 Routine
1
Test 0 Routine
Descrilttion
Tests level switching of the support processor. Reference codes are:
FO 0101 F8
Control write to common mask failure
FO 0102 Fa
Faited switching to level 1
Failed switching to level 2
FO 0103 Fa
Failed switching to level 3
FO 0104 Fa
F00105 Fa
Failed switching to level 4
FO 0106 F8
Failed switching to 'evel5
Failed switching to level 6
FO 0107 F8
Failed switching to level 7
FO 0108 F8
Failed switching to level 0
FO 0109 F8
Control read/write PSC failed.
FO 010A F8
FO 0108 F8
PSC bits wrong
FO 010C F8
Write next level failed
.
F0010E F8
PIRR or common mask wrong
Invalid instruction recOgnition. Reference codes are:
Test
Description
Test 0 Routine
5
Tests register space. Reference codes are:
Test 0 Routine
6
Test 1 Routine
1
No MC with invalid instruction
FO 0201 Fa
F00202 F8
No MC with invalid I/O address'
FO 0203 F8
MC/PC bits do not setlreset correctly
FO 0204 F8
Low byte Daritv check failed
Test parity recognition.
Test 1 Routine
2
3
Test 0 Routine
4
FO 0301 Fa
Wrona Daritv
Tests storage from X'OO400' to X'OFFFF' for parity and data comp.e. To
determine the failing location if an error occurs:
Key in G and press ENTER. A reference code of FO 04xx
2.
Key in G and press ENTER. A reference code of FO 04VVF8 is displayed.
Where xx is the high-orcler stOrage address and yy is the ,'ow-order storage
address. Reference codes are:
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
<0 Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE030
Test 1 Routine
3
1.
Keyin G and press ENTER. A reference ,code of FO 11 xx F8 is displayed.
2.
Key in G and press ENTER. A reference code of FO 11 vv Fa is displayed.
Test 1 Routine
4
vv is the low-order storage
Fl1101 F8
Data miscompare
Fl 1102 F8
Stor.aae Daritv check
Tests addressing in second 64K card. Reference codes are:
F1 1201 F8
Data miscompare
F1 1202 Fa
Storaae Daritv error
Stores and executes instructions in X'1 0000' to X'1 FFFF' • Reference codes are:
F1 1301 F8
F1 1302 F8
Fe is displayed.
1.
FO 0401 F8
F00402 F8
FO 0403 Fa
FO 0601 Fa
Data miscompare
MClPC while, reading
FO 0602 F8
Writes into and reads out of the second 64K storage card. To determine location
if an error occurs:
Where xx is the high-order storage address and
address. Reference codes are:
2
Test 0 Routine
FO 0501 F8
Data miscompare
Storaoe parity check
FO 0502 F8
Tests storage addreSsing (OEOOO to OFOOO). Reference codes are:
Sum incorrect
Machine check
Tests SP storage in virtual mode. Reference codes are:
F1 1401 F8
F1 1402 F8
Data miscompare
Storage parity check
Data miscompare
Parity check (OEOOO to OFFFF)
Parity check: (00400 to OFFFF)
I
PN 6169399 'II EC A20558I
.1 of3
.~.~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.___________~________~________~__________
DIAG 045'
DIAG 050
Test
DescriPtion
Test
Description
Test 1 Routine
Tests level 0 OLAT and translation tables in virtual mode. Reference codes are:
Test 2
Routine 3
and
Routine B
Tests shift data and read data commands to the SBAs. Reference codes are:
5
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
Test 1 Routine
1501 F8
1502 F8
1509 F8
150E F8
1515 F8
1518 F8
MC/PC error on routine entry
MC/PC error during routine
Error before address X'09xxx'
Error before address X'OExxx'
Error before address X'15xxx'
Error before address X'18xxx'
Tests instruction OLAT during level switching in virtual. Reference codes are:
6
F1 16xO F8
F116yz F8
Test 2
Routine 1
and
Routine 9
Wrong OLAT for level x.
Wrong level switch. y is present
level· z is the desired level.
Tests SBA reset and checks basic status. Reference codes are:
FD
FD
FD
FO
FO
2x01
2x21
2x22
2x71
2x72
F8
Fa
Fa
Fa
Fa
Basic status not reset
MC/PC timeout on reset
MC/PC parity error on reset
MC/PC timeout on read status
MC/PC parity error on read status
Test 2
Routine 4
and
Routine C
x eQuals 1 for SBA 1 and x eQuals 9 for SBA 2.
Test 2
Routine 2
and
Routine A
Tests commands to SBA of reset adapter, reset status,and set status. Reference
codes are:
FD 2x01
FO 2x02
FD 2x03
F02x04
FO 2x05
FO 2x41
FD 2x42
FD 2x61
FD 2x62
F8
F8
Fa
Fa
F8
Fa
Fa
F8
F8
x eauals 2
Set status failed (even bits)
Reset status failed (even bits)
Set status failed (odd bits)
. Reset status failed (odd bits)
Reset adapter failed (all bits)
MC/PC timeout on reset status
MC/PC parity error on reset status
MC/PC time()utori set status
.
Parity error on set status
for SBA 1 and x eQuals A for SBA
2.
Test 2
Routine 5
and
Routine 0
Test 2
Routine 6
and
Routine E
FO
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
2x01 F8
2x02 Fa
2x03 Fa
2x04 F8
2x05 F8
2x06 F8
2xly F8
FD
FD
FD
FD
2x81
2x82
2x91
2)(92
F8
F8
F8
F8
Data error on shift 5
C'Ontrol error on shift 5
Failed PIRR to level 1 on data delay
MCIPC on data delay
False IORR
PIRR to level 0 on data delay fails
y"'shift count (1-8). shift register
error
MC/PC timeout error
MC/PC parity error
MC/PC parity error
MC/PC timeout error
x eauals 3 for SBA 1 and x eauals B for SBA 2.
Tests shift data with inverted parity to. the SBAs. Reference codes are:
FD
FD
FD
FD
2x01
2x02
2xCl
2xC2
F8
F8
F8
F8
Shift data bad
Control register data bad
MC/PC timeout error
MC/PC timeout error
x eauals 4 for SBA 1 and x eQuals C for SBA 2.
Tests shift data without parity command to the SBAs. Reference codes are:
FD
FD
FD
FD
2x01 F8
2x02 F8
2xAl Fa
2xA2 Fa
Shift data error
Control register data bad
MC/PC timeout error
MC/PC parity error
x eauals 5 for SBA ·1 and x eQuals 0 for SBA 2.
Tests write control to the SBAs.
Note: Reference codes FD 2802 F8 and FD 2E02 F8 are normal if routine is
looped. Other reference codes are:
FD
FD
FD
FD
FD
2x01
2x02
2x03
2xEl
2xE2
F8
F8
Fa
F8
F8
Control error on data write
Control register data error
Status error after two control commands
MC/PC timeout error
MC/PC parity error
x eauals 6 for SBA 1 and x eQuals E fofSBA 2:
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE030
DIAG 050
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OOOOO()OO·()O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
,
"H;"'·""Mt wie", , 1 Hw,,,J"riH,W#1
"''/''"j,lj''·.Ir'IIiJ'"}'f',·I!'·/'''fIWfi'!i''·
,L+'.
, ""ljw"/Mc""'npItM'!L!{I**"'''.
I " .. t
b"*'LJ4w!i,.W,lhIpl It"",',,\,
.WI.', II
. "
,'MiI. 'J.e4.IWJ '4'11;"
11 Wi«!fW"MlrtG! 'C"I!m/lllm"""';' b1U'U&"U'.'· "' ft·
•••• ,. 'M'"""
·'C r tMt.'Mi"
.
"'~'..wHh.ddo!!t
'M,;,,'
n .. ,,,',.' , "., " .. "f,t
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
DIAG 051
Test
Test 2 Routine
7 and Routine
Description
Tests SBA timer interrupt (level 1). Reference codes are:
F
Failed to set basic status bit 7 (SBA 1)
FD 2701 Fa
FD 2702 F8
Failed to set IORR bit 1
FD 2703 F8
Failed to reset IORR bit 1
Interrupt in 250 msec after reset
FO 2704 Fa
SBA interrupt with enable bit reset
FD 2705 Fa
x equals IORR; interrupt not at level 1
FD 27xO Fa
Failed to set basic status bit 7 (SBA 21
FD 2F01 F8
Test LCA over the support processor bus.
Test 3
Routines 1 to
F and Test 4
Routines 1 to
5
Note: Reference code F2 3144 F8 can occur if the PU is powered up or the
LeA was enabled before. Reference codes are:
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
F2
3144 F8
3155 Fa
3180 F8
4F11 F8
4F15 Fa
RRRR F8
S/370 interface not disabled
S/370 interface bit disabled
A burst mode operation ~aused the LCA to hang
LCA hang in level 0
LeA hang in level 0
See below for RRRR values •.
Error Codes for Tests 3 and 4
F2 RRRR Fa
~
Error code (see below)
Routine number
Test number C3 or 4)
yy
Description
01
No I/O interrupt
Unexpected I/O interrupt
Set interrupt pending failed
No I/O interrupt
No expected. machine· check
Me/PC when not expected
SP write timeout
SP read timeout
SP read buffer overflow
Command rejected (10 retries)
Status not as expected
Command reject on I/O interrupt
I/O interrupt did not occur
LCA is disabled
08
09
10 to 1F
20 to 2C
30 to 33
40
55
Diskette
Loader Tracks
5 and 6
DescriPtion
Tests basic peA communication. Reference codes are:
F6 81xx F8
F6 82xx F8
Sense card 1 failure
F6 828x Fa
Sense card 1 failure
F6829xF8
Sense card 2 failure
F6 82Ax F8
Sense card 2 failure
F6 82Bx F8
Timeout on read sense
F6 82Fl F8
Support processor parity check
F6 82F2 F8
Load optional diagnostics, parity check upper 32K of storage.
Reference codes are:
Diskette Drive 1
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
F1
F1
Fl
F5
F5
F5
F5
F5
lB01 Fa
1B03 F8
1BOA F8
l80e F8
1B12 F8
1815 Fa
1B20 F8
lC01 Fa
lC02 Fa
lC15 F8
1001 F8
100A F8
1DOC F8
1012 F8
1015 Fa
Diskette drive 1 timeout
Support processor check
Diskette drive 1 not ready·
Bad status
Data read error
No error bypass
Seek error
Storage error
Storage error on cycle steal
.No error bypass
Timeout diskette drive 1
Diskette drive 1 not ready
Wrong status .
CRC errors
No error bypass
Diskette Drive 2
Error codes:
02
03
04
05
06
07
Test
Test 8
Routines 1
and 2
:~::2676380 I~~g GE030
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
F5 1881 Fa
FS·1B83 F8
F5 lB8A F8
F5 1B8e F8
F5 1B92 F8
FS 1B95 F8
F5 1BAO F8
F5 1015 F8
FS 1D81F8
F5 lD8A F8
FS lD8C F8
FS 1092 Fa
Diskette drive 2 timeout
Support processor check
Diskette drive 2 not ready
Bad status
Data read error
No error bypass
Seek error
No error bypass
Timeout diskette drive 2
Diskette drive 2 not ready
Wrong status
CRC errors
DIAG 051
I,
il':
I
i:
I"
I
o
0 0 0 () 0 0 () 0 0 () 0 (~) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OO'!:
II'
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 055
MSS Repair Action Screens
When an error is detected during the MSS Extended or
Optional diagnostics, a Repair Action screen is displayed
as a guide for the repair. The Repair Action screen lists
suspected FRUs and gives a Repair Procedure reference
to be used if the repair is not successful. The Repair
Action screens are:
Reference
Code
FOxxxxF8
Option
Repair Action
FF
Reseat or exchange the following:
FlxxxxF8
FF
Support Processor
01AA2 H2
Reseat or exchange the following:
CE
Support processor storage
OlM2 J2
Suooort orocessor
01M2 H2
Reseat or exchange the following:
F8xxxxF8
01M202
01M2 R2
F5xxOAF8
F5xxxxF8
FOxxxxF8
AO
AO
FF
F2xxxxF8
F6xxxxF8
FExxxxF8
Check diskette cover
S8A 1
SBA2
Converter
FF
Note: FD2301F8 is a normal reference code if
you did not power off before running MSS
diagnostics.
Reseat·or exchange the following:
FF
LCA
01M2 V2
01M2 W2 LCA
LCA
01AA2 X2
Reseat or exchange the following:
DO
PCA
01AA202
peA
01M2 E2
PCA
01AA2 F2
Reseat or I!txchange the following:
01AA2P2
01M204
Cable goes to ports 0
through 3 on 01 F gate
DCA
DCA
Note: F8Cx03F8is a normal reference code if no
device is attached to port x.
Go to "MSS Repair" onpa~e MSS 001
Go to "MSSReoair" on page MSS 001
Reseat or exchange the following:
01M2T2
01M2 S2
01M2 U2
Notes
Verify jumpers on 02 and
E2
RSF
RSF
1~~f~169400 ILI~~~~~~~!~~~:~!~8-L________~________~________~________~
\0 Copyright IBM Corp, 1984
DIAG055
DIAG 060
Running the Power Controller Adapter
(PCA) Tests Manually
The diagnostics for the peA are on the FUNC 1 diskette
and are run after the MSSdiagnostics when the processor
is IMLed. If a failure occurs, a reference code is displayed.
To run the PCA tests manually:
1.
Set the I/O Power Hold switch to Normal.
2.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
3.' Set the Power Off switch to Power Off.
4.' Install FUNC 1 in diskette drive 1.
5.
Reset the Power'Off switch to Normal, and press
Power On.
6.
When the Partial Power screen appears; move the
cursor to the COMMAND fie1d, key in QWP, and
press ENTER. The peA tests run.
Note: After running thePCA routines, the MSS must be
powered off and powered on again before any MSS
.
diagnostics are run because of the special reset used for
the peA.
4381
B/M 2676380
II Copyright IBM
CorP.
I~~g
1984
PCA Diagnostic Reference Codes
Reference Code
F6 0101 FA to F6
0103 FA
F6 0201 FA to F6
0204 FA
F6 0301 FA to F6
0313 FA
F6 0401 FA to F6
0410 FA
F6 0501 FA to F6
0504 FA
F6060l FA
F6 0701 FA to F6
0704 FA
F6 0801 FA to F6
0808 FA
F6 0901 FA to F6
0908 FA
F61l01 FAtoF6
1106 FA
F6 1301 FA to F6
1305 FA
F6 1401 FA
F6 1601 FA to F6
1607 FA
F6 1801 FA
FRUs
01A A2F2
DescriDtion
Latch modules cannot be reset.
01A A2F2,D2
Sense card 2 latch modules cannot be reset.
01A A2D2,E2,F2
Latch module, byte address. or data bits bad.
01A A2D2.F2
Sense card 2 address bad.
01A A2E2
Data bits for sense card 1 cannot be set.
01A A2F2
01A A2F2,E2,D2
Sense card 2 latch module data bits bad.
Test sense bytes.
01A A2F2,E2,D2
Read digital sense bytes.
01A A2F2,E2,02
Sense bytes not equal to FF.
01A A2D2,E2
DAC not within 25% of MSS reference voltage.
01A A2D2,E2
DAC do not compare equal.
01A A2D2 E2 F2
01AA202,E2
Interrupt byte is bad.
Timeout circuit does not reset the control latches.
01AA2F4
Serial number is wrong.
GE035
DIAG 060
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ()OOOO()OOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
, r, H
",'
'fi"'#III'
'r I', II,II'!'
W""dIHN'
". ,,"',' ,,, ,,,
II!
'H'"
,
I
,
,
h" iLNt" Hi •. r
'L,L!
"r
lit tUn ,.,,,
r
If' ' ' ' ' ' " . "
I
""t!, II ,,' '"'' n
,'"111
"I'
'"~I ,,'
,. fN ',,"1
d
,r,
I I
,
,,,, ""
.,' ,I
, ",
'''''",'
'"
,II", ' , ' , ,,', ,'II
'H
'!'''''/
,dl/,"'" II
.,"
"!!12" 'i!,
,,"'*"11"':'
M,L.,
"Wie\hWp ,
'L
" ••
"*,,*,,,'W" ,I'IYI .. " .. ,
ie.,;,....,·." , 'f"
'9'"' ,eUN"""!! Nfl'''''' "11'm; I/I"!I
,I'. ",""""'"
"' ",,'
"
";,
JIIM"'Ult?i',,,,,
"tit·'WN'.. """
I, ,.11'
'1''''''''",'''''\' t h' t ,
"rio! !M!!'''It,.
'ttll, " "
,
0000000000000000000000000000000000
DIAG 069
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
CD Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE035
DIAG 069
DIAG 070
Optional MSS Diagnostics
Running Optional MSS Diagnostics
Optional MSS diagnostics are on the DIAG 1 diskette and
give additional testing for:
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to Normal.
2.
Set the I/O Power Hold switch to I/O Power Hold.
3.
Set the Power Off switch to Power Off.
4.
Install DIAG 1 in diskette drive 1.
5.
Reset the Power Off switch to Normal, and press
Power On. Basic and Extended MSS diagnostics run
after power up.
•
Service panel
•
Diskette drives
•
Optional MSS Diagnostics Selection Screen
************************* BASIC MSS DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETED *********************
*********************************************************************************
*********************** EXTENDED MSS DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETED ********************
MAKE SELECTION, ENTER DESIRED OPTION:
Device Cluster Adapter (DCA)
•
Optional printers and displays
•
RSF.
6.
While the Optional MSS diagnostics are running, any
errors detected are indicated by Repair Action screens
that guide you in the repair·of the problem.
Key in the selected option from the MSS Optional
Diagnostic Selection screen, and press ENTER.
For additional information on running the MSS Optional
diagnostics, refer to the flowchart and notes on page
DIAG 075.
OPTIONS
(FF)
(90)
(AO)
(CE)
(DO)
(EO)
LOOP MSS BASIC AND EXTENDED DIAGNOSTICS
RUN OPTIONAL SERVICE PANEL DIAGNOSTICS
RUN OPTIONAL DDA/DRIVE TESTS
TEST ALL CONSOLE/PRT PORTS
RUN RSF ADAPTER DIAGNOSTICS
RUN RSF CABLE WRAP TEST
(EIA INTERFACE
NOTE: CABLE WRAP PLUG MUST BE INSTALLED
(9F=LOOP)
(AF=LOOP)
(CF=LOOP)
(DF=LOOP)
ONLY. EF=LOOP)
THEN PRESS ENTER:
TO TERMINATE LOOPING, PRESS IMLBUTTON.
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
GE035
.PN 6169400
.40f4
I
1·1 EC A2055&' I
_________~________~________~~______~
.~.~0_'~O~~~·_8~4~~
DIAG 070
e Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
(~.);
I
OOOOOOOO()OOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o o
0 0 00 0 ().
1M
" ••
.s'
t"'·
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 075
See "Running Optional MSS Diagnostics".
Notes:
<,-_S_TA_RT_.....I>
1 . When the service panel displays 80000,. press and
release Logic Reset. The service panel then displays
the following:
I
Hake a selection from
~----------------------~the MSS Optional
Diagnostic Selection
screen.
80000
81111
82222
83333
84444
85555
86666
MSS extended
diagnostics run one
time as follows:
SP tests
UU=FO
SP storage
(upper 72K) UU=Fl
SBA
UU=FD
LeA
peA
IML
terminates
·loop
UU=F2
UU=F6
FF option
selected?
2.
90
Option 90 see
prompting
screen.
:~::2676380 I~~g
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
OOA and drive
AF loops test
UU = F5
AO
Select
diskette
drive 1 or 2.
FOt23
F4567
F89AB
FCDEF
Place the orAG 1 diskette in the diskette drive to be
tested.
3. .Options CO - C3 loop the tests to the selected
console (ports 0 - 3). Option CF loops all consoles.
Option CE tests each console one time.
Yes
Basic MSS diagnostics
>--.... in SP ROS and on the
DIAG1 diskette run.
4. The reference codeF8 Cx03 F8 is a normal stop if no
device is attached to port ID=x or the device on port
ID=xis not ready. To bypass this stop, key in G and
press ENTER.
(Notes
3, 4)
Console/print
ports
CE runs each
port one time
CF loops all
ports.
Cx loops the
selected port
FE EOEE F8 - Send or receive data
(TO or RD) failure.
FE EOFF F8 - CCA card failure.
FE EOxx F8
~.~
Out
o-
OTR
1 - RTS
2 - SSB
3 - DRS
In
45 -
DSR
eTS
6 - oeD
7 - RI
CTS
DCD
DRS
DSR
DTR
RI
RTS
SSB
Clear to send
Data carrier detect
Data rate select
Data set ready
Data terminal ready
Ring indicator
Request to send
Select standby
For a wiring diagram of the EIA interface cable, see
Volume A06, Service Aids, "EIA Adapter Configuration."
5. The DO and OF options are for all RSF adapters. The
Track 5 6 loader and
upper 64K SP storage
are tested (UU = F5).
9x_ _ _ _....1
or _
Ex_ _--,
.-_--.;._
Ax
Cx
1......_ _Dx
__
Service panel
tests.
9F loops test
AAAAA
BBBBB
CCCCC
DDDDD
EEEEE
FFFFF
Failures sensed by the EIA cable wrap test (Ex) are
indicated by a reference code FE EOxx Fa, where xx
is the failing line as shown below:
t
I No
(Note 2)
87777
88888
99999
The time between displays is two to four seconds.
The test is complete when FCDEF is displayed. After
displaying FCOEF the service panel continues to
display the current SP storage address.
1
(Note 1)
6.
(Notes 5,
6)
EO and EF options are only for the EIA interface and
allow testing the cable to the external modem in
wrap mode. Disconnect the EIA interface cable at the
modem end, and install the wrap plug before
selecting the Ex options.
Remote Support
Faci I ity (RSF)
DF or EF loops
UU = FE
DO or EO
(0-3).
UU = F8
GE040
DIAG 075
DIAG 080
Optional MSS Diagnostics by UU Codes
UU
MSS Optional Diagnostics by Test ID
Code
Area
Tested
Test
10
Routine
10
F5
Diskette Drive Adapter
A
8
F8
FE
Display Console Adapter
Remote Support Facility
C
1 and 2
1,6,8 to E
1 to 3
1 to E
1 to 5
D
E
Diskette Tests (Option AO)
Tests A and B run on the diskette drive you select. For the error code (xx) values, see "Test A and B Error Codes" on page
,DIAG 085.
Example of Reference Code from MSS Optional Diagnostics
A4
Test and routine 10 (Diskette speed check)
. Reference code (UU RRRR
IS)
F5
4381
81M 2676380
OescriDtion
UU RRRR
Verifies diskette adapter interrupts.
F5 B1xx
Test A Routine
2
Tests pointers and access lines.
F5 A2xx
Test A Routine
Verifies that CCA can detect wrong commands.
F5 A3xx
Test A Routine
4
Checks diskette speed.
F5 A4xx
Test A Routine
Checks that diskette head engages/disengages.
F5 A5xx
3
I
A!xx
UU code from tabl e above __________1
Test
Test A/B
Routine 1
F8
5
Error information - - - - - - - - - - -.....
Test A/B
Routine 6
Routine A selects head 0; routine B selects head 1. Checks cylinders 0-75
can be read. Verifies with read 10.
F5 A/B6xx
Test A/B
Routine B
Routine A selects head 0; routine B selects head 1. Writes 256 bytes of
X'FF' on cylinder 75 record 4.
F5 A/BBxx
F8 indicates ~SS diagnostics
Test A/B
Routine C
Routine A selects head 0; routine 8 selects head 1. Writes 256 bytes of
X'A50F' on cvlinder 74 record 4.
F5A/BCxx
Test A/8
Routine D
Routine A selects head 0; routine 8 selects head 1. Writes 256 bytes of
data on cylinder 8, record 1 and on cylinder 74, record 1 - then compares
the data.
F5 A/8Dxx
Test A/B
Routine E
Routine A selects head 0; routine 8 selects head 1. Verifies busy and no
record found can be detected.
F5 A/BExx
I~~q
GE040
I
PN 6169401
.2M2
II
ECA20558 . ,
.~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~•.______~________~________~~__.....__~
DIAG 080
C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
00000 0000000000 000000000:
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 085
85
86
87
88
Ox
Test A and 8 Error Codes
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
OC
OF
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
25
27
28
29
38
39
3A
43
44
47
51
53
54
55
56
57
59
58
5C
50
5E
60
61
62
66
67
80
81
82
83
84
Diskette adapter hang
MC/PC during cycle steal
MC/PC from storage
MC/PC from DDA
Write A buffer odd parity failed
Read A buffer odd parity failed
Read A buffer even parity failed
Write B buffer odd parity failed
Read B buffer odd parity failed
Read B buffer even parity failed
Diskette error check
Not valid command was not detected
Head not engaged
CRC error
Command reject
Hardware failed
Read control record failed
Busy
Busy not detected
Timeout
Record not found
Drive not ready
Wrong status
Error bypass not permitted
Head lifted too soon
Head lifted too late
Wrong head selected
MC/PC from I/O operation
Wrong level interrupt
More than 1 interrupt: level
Record format wrong
Format data wrong
Head not engaged
Cylinder 0 10 or CRC error
Write format error
Record 3 not found
Wrong status on read
Diskette too fast
Diskette too slow
Write/read miscompare
Cylinder 74 or 75 not found
Cylinder 75 not found
Cylinder 8 not found.
Flagged track
Wrong cylinder
Record not found failed to set
Interrupted with interrupt disabled
SP bus error
Level 5 interrupt from level 7 failed
Status register not reset
Status register not set
Channel pointer not reset
Read/write channel pointer failed
Extended status not reset
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE045
I
Load record count failed
Diagnostic request did not reset
Set control register failed
Read/write access failed
No interrupt received (x=diagnostic sense)
DCA Adapter Tests (Options CO-C3. CEo or CF)
For the values of the error codes (xx) in the diagnostic
reference codes, see "Test C Error Codes." Test CE runs
tests CO-C3 one time. Test CF loops tests CO-C3.
Test
Test C Routine
Tests console on port O.
UU RRRR
Fa COxx
Tests console or printer on port 1.
Fa Clxx
Tests console or printer on port 2.
Fa C2xx
Tests console or printer on port 3.
Fa C3xx
Descr~tion
0
Test C Routine
1
Test C Routine
2
Test C Routine
3
Test C Error Codes
01
02
03
04 to 1C
DCA port failed
DCA port failed
No power on response
Device or DCA failure
Note: F8 Cx03 F8 is a normal stop if no device is
attached to port x.
II
PN 6169402
.1 m2
.
EC A20558
I
L.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.________~________~________~________~
DIAG085
DIAG 090
CCA Tests (Options DO and EO)
Test
Test 0
Routine 1
Test 0
Routine 2
Test 0
Routine 3
Test 0
Routine 4
Test 0
Routine 5
DescriPtion
Verifies CCA (RSF) commands. Reference codes are:
FE 0101 F8
Timeout
FE 0102 F8
Parity error
FE 0103 F8
Modem bits wrono
Verifies not valid CCA commands set errors.
FE 0201 F8
Timeout
MC/PC not set by invalid command
FE 0202 F8
FE 0203 F8
Cannot reset MC/PC bits
Verifies CCA control register reset and read.
Control register wrong after reset
FE 0301 F8
Wrong data pattern in control register
FE 0302 F8
Wrong data pattern in control register
FE 0303 F8
Wrong control register reset
FE 0304 F8
Wrong control reoister reset
FE.0305 F8
Verifies modem control register reset and read commands.
FE 0401 F8
Wrong modem control register reset/read
FE 0402 F8
Wrong modem control register write/read
Write/read test data failure
.FE 0403 F8
load/test control register failure
FE 0404 F8
Verifies modem status register (bits 2, 3, and 6 are not tested).
FE
Fe
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
4381
8/M 2676380
0501 F8
0502 F8
0503 F8
0504 Fa
0505 F8
0506 F8
0607 F8
0608 F8
0609 F8
050A Fa
0608 F8
UU RRRR
FE 01xx
Test
Test 0
Routine 6
FE 02xx
Test 0
Routine 7
FE 03xx
Test 0
Routine S
FE D4xx
Test 0
Routine 9
Description
Verifies correct interval and reset of TI in basic status.
UU RRRR
FE 06xx
Early timer interrupt, high byte
FE 0601 FS
No timer interrupt, high byte
FE 0602 FS
Failed to reset timer interrupt
FE 0603 FS
Early timer interrupt, low byte
FE 0604 F8
No timer interrupt, low byte
FE 0605 FS
Failed to reset timer interrupt
FE 0606 FS
Verifies operation of timer controls.
FE 07xx
No timer interrupt, set to X'FF01'
FE 0701 F8
Wrong timer interrupt, set to X'0100'
FE 0702 FS
No interrupt, high byte set to X'SO'
FE 0703 F8
Check set/reset of enable/disable bit.
FE OSxx
Failed to set enable
FE 0801 F8
Failed to reset enable
FE OS02 F8
Check set/reset of output request, input request, and adapter in. sync bits.
FE 09xx
Adapter not in sync after transmit
Adapter control register wrong
Input request on after transmit
Adapter not in sync after transmit
(x equals 1 through 5) Timeout waiting for output
request
Adapter not in sync after transmit
FE 09F6 F8
Unexpected status in transmit
FE 09F7 FS
Check that input request is stopped if receive mode is off.
FE oAxx
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE D5xx
Failed to set modem interrupt
No oSR transition interrupt
Failed to reset modem interrupt
No modem interrupt on CTS transition
Wrong modem status on CTS transition
Failed to reset transition indicators
No modem interrupt on CTS transition
Failed to set CTS transition indicator
Failed to reset modem interrupt
Failed to set OSR transition
Wrong status after set send command
Test 0
Routine A
0901 F8
0902 FS
0903 F8
0904 F8
09Fx F8
FE oAOl F8
FEOA02 Fa
FE OA03 Fa
FE oAFx F8
FE OAF6 F8
Adapter in sync not on
Adapter control register wrong
Input request not on
(x equals 1 through 6) Timeout on output request
AdaPter notin sync after transmit
1:
9 GE046
DIAG 090
"Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
OOOOOOOOOOOO()OO
o o
0 0 -0 0 0 0 0 0
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 00'-·
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 095
Test
DescriPtion
UURRRR
Test 0
Routine B
Check that SOLC frame bit sets and resets
FE OBxx
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
Test 0
Routine C
Test 0
Routine 0
DBO 1 Fa
DB02 Fa
OB03 Fa
OB04 Fa
DB05 Fa
DB06 Fa
OBFx Fa
DBF6 Fa
OBF7 F8
Failed to set underrun bit
FE DCBOl Fa
Failed to reset underrun bit
FE OCB02 Fa
Unexpected status during transmit
FE DCBF7 Fa
Check that test overrun bits set and reset.
Test E Routine
o
OE01 F8
OE02 F8
OE03 F8
OE04 Fa
DEFx F8
OEF6 F8
Out
o - OTR
1 - RTS
2 - SSB
3 - DRS
Test
Test E Routine
1
FE OOxx
Test E Routine
Failed to set overrun bit
Failed to reset overrun bit
(x equals 1 through 5) Timeout waiting for output
request
Adapter' not in svncafter transmit
oeD
In
4 - DSR
5 - eTS
6 - oeD
7 - RI
Invalid sequence with no exception bit
SOlC frame bit not on
SOlC invalid sequence not set
SOlC invalid sequence not reset
(x equals 1 through 5) Timeout on output request
Adaoter not in sync after transmit
Description
UU RRRR
FE E 1xx
I~~g
tD Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE050
SOle invalid sequence bit not on
SOle invalid sequence bit not reset
Unexpected statu$.during test
Check. repeated frame insertion.
FE OExx
Test E
Routines 3
and 4
FE E2xx
No transmit or receive data connection
CCA card failure
Wrap in/out does not match. For x and y values, see "Test
E Routine 0 Error Codes."
Timeout waiting for output request reset
No adapter in sync or frame bits
Unexpected status error dUfing test
Check DOA and modem data paths in wrap mode. Routine 3 is CCA wrap,
routine 4 is modem wrap. (x equals 3 or 4 in the following.)
FE ExOl Fa
Timer interrupt before CTS
Timer interrupt after CTS
FE Ex02 Fa
FE Ex03 Fa
All data transmitted; stop receiving
FE Ex04 F8
Modem status error
FE Ex05 Fa
Overrun/underrun
FE Ex06 F8
Output request with transmit off
FE Ex07 F8
Input request; no data transmitted
FE Exoa Fa
Input request; last data already received
FE Ex09 F8
Received data does not equal expected data
FE ExOA Fa
Input request before flag in SOLC
FE ExOB F8
Basic status invalid
FE ExOC Fa
Invalid exception
FE ExOO F8
SOLe frame on; adapter not in SOLC
FE ExOE F8
Data decoded as SOlC flag
FE ExOF F8
Adapter status error
FE ExFF Fa
Timeout on adapter interrupt
FE E3FE Fa
Wrong level interrupt in SP lORA
FE E4FA F8
Modem wrap with DSR off
Check if SP check is on from any preceding RSF test.
FE E5xx Fa
B/M 2676380
SSB
Check 15 ones recognition using SOLe.
FE E201 Fa
FE E202 F8
FE E2F1 F8
Test E Routine
5
4381
DRS
DSR
OTR
RI
RTS
Clear to send
Data carrier detect
Data rate select
Data set ready
Data terminal ready
Ring indicator
Request to send
Select standby
2
Check external cable wrap (for EIA interface only).
FE EOEE F8
FE EOFF Fa
FE EOxy Fa
eTS
FEE101Fa
FE El02 Fa
FE E1F7 Fa
..
FE ODF6 F8 .
Check that SOlC invalid sequence bits set and reset.
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
FE
F~~
FE OCBx
Check that test underrun bits set and reset.
FE 0001 F8
FE 0002 F8
FE OOFx F8
Test 0
Routine E
More than exception bit in status
Adapter in sync and SOLC frame not on
Control register wrong after pad transmit
Except interrupt pending not set
SOLC frame bit not set
SOLC frame bit not reset
(x equals 1 through 5) Timeout during output request
Adapter not in sync after transmit
Unexpected status during transmit
Test E Routine 0 Error Codes
FE ExFx
FE E5xx
SP check Ixx equals SP check register).
DIAG 095
DIAG 100
Diskette Analysis
The Diskette Analysis test is on the FUNC1 diskette. It
can be used to check any of the functional or diagnostic
diskettes for unreadable records.
To run the test:
1.
With the FUNC1 diskette in diskette drive 1, key in
QED and press ENTER.
2.
Note that a starting cylinder number (00), starting
record number (01), and drive number (2) are given.
Either use these default values or specify your own
values for cylinder, record, and drive number.
3.
4.
Diskette Drive Status Bits
Bits
Values
Meaning
0-1:
00
01
10
11
Good ending
CRC Error
Command Error
Hardware Error
000
001
0,11
100
101
110
111
Operation Complete
Control Complete
Busy
Overrun/Underrun
Timeout
Record not found
Diskette not ready
2-4:
Insert the diskette to be analyzed (into the diskette
drive selected above).
Press ENTER to start the diskette analysis.
To continue the analysis if error information fills the
screen, press ENTER. To cancel the analysis, press CNCL.
5:
SP Check
6:
Adapter enable
7:
Interrupt pending
Diskette Analysis Test Selection and Error Display Screens
*ERROR DISPLAYS*
TO START:
*DISKETTE ANALYSIS*
SELECT STARTING CYLINDER AND RECORD ~UMBER
(DEFAULT IS RECORD 1 ON CYLINDER 0).
2) SELECT DISK DRIVE FOR ANALYSIS (DEFAULT IS DRIVE 2).
3) INSERT DISK TO BE ANALYZED INTO SELECTED DRIVE.
4) PRESS THE ENTER KEY.
1}
00 STARTING CYLINDER NUMBER (00 - 4C)
01 STARTING RECORD NUMBER (01 - lA BACK-HEAD)
(81 - 9A FRONT-HEAD)
2 TARGET DRIVE FOR ANALYSIS (1 - 2)
TO EXIT:
1) MAKE SURE ORIGINAL DISKETTES ARE INSTALLED.
2) SELECT ANY SCREEN.
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG ~YS
COMMAND: QED
NOTE: ALL NUMBERS IN HEX
==>
For an example of diskette errors, see "Diskette Analysis
Test Error Display Screen." If there are more errors than
one screen can display, press ENTER to display the
additional error screens. For a definit10n of the diskette
drive status bits, see "Diskette Drive Status Bits."
*ERROR DISPLAYS*
*DtSKETTE ANALYSIS*
LINE CYLINDER HEAD
NUMB NUMBER
o
09
FRONT
1
23
BACK
RECORD MODULE DEVICE
NUMBER
10
'STATUS
83
4351
42
01
FFFF
42
PARAMETERS ARE
GIVEN IN HEX
IF SCREEN IS FULL AND ANALYSIS IS NOT COMPLETE: PRESS ENTER
TO CANCEL ANALYSIS: INSTALL ORIGINAL DISKETTES, PRESS CNCL KEY
IF ANALYSIS IS COMPLETE: INSTALL ORIGINAL DISKETTES, SELECT ANY SCREEN
COMMAND: QED
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
GE050
PN 6169403 1'.1 ECA20658. .1
.2m2
I
.~._0_1~O~c_t_8_4~_.
==>
,I
________~____~__~.___________~_________~
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DIAG 100
()OOOO()OOO
'ttl I 1
,I'U "
'""""",
"iii",,,, ',,"II I,".' ,a,+WbH"'
,1'141 t
1,
"
'I'
If
III' ,_nil
·!",wr'~ilOiMII!!'MLnmll'W!I!'Il!-jp.r
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 105
PROCESSING UNIT DIAGNOSTICS
The two types of processing unit diagnostics available for
isolation of errors and verification of repairs are:
Test Case Monitor (TCM)
MSMD Monitor
•
Basics
The MSMD Monitor is on the FUNC2 diskette and is
loaded by the TeM into processing unit control storage
when MSMDs are to be run.
•
Machine Speed Microdiagnostics (MSMDs).
The TCM is on the FUNC1 diskette. It is loaded into SP
storage when any of the processing unit diagnostics are
requested.
The TCM loads either Basic diagnostics into SP control
storage or MSMDs into processing unit control storage.
The TCM controls the execution of the Basic diagnostics.
When MSMDs are running, communication to the system
console is: diagnostic to MSMD Monitor to TCM to the
console.
For a description of processing unit Basic diagnostics, see
page DIAG 110. For a description of Machine Speed
Microdiagnostics (MSMDs), see page DIAG 115.
During the processing unit Basic diagnostics and the
MSMDs, the TCM controls communication between the
diagnostics and the system console.
4381
B/M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
GE055
I
II
PN 6169404
.10f2
.
EC A20568I
~.~0~1~O~c~~~8~4~~.
Diagnostic Mode Test Case Monitor
Screen
In Field Support Center mode, the Diagnostic Mode Test
Case Monitor screen is displayed whenever PU
diagnostics are running. It displays prompting and error
information. For an explanation of the error and
prompting messages given on the Test Case Monitor
screen, see "Test Case Monitor Messages" on page
DIAG 200.
While PU basic diagnostics are running, the test 10 is
displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the Diagnostic
Mode Test Case Monitor screen. For a description of
processing unit basic test IDs, see "Basic Diagnostic
Organization" on page DIAG 110.
__________~________~________~________~
DIAG 105
DIAG 110
Basic Diagnostics
Basic Diagnostic Test IDs
Basic Diagnostic Organization
The Basic diagnostics are located on the FUNC2 and the
DIAG 1 diskettes. They run in SP control storage under
control of the Test Case Monitor.
Basic diagnostic IDs are six characters long starting with
a 0 and ending in M3.
Diskette
Test IDs
Example:
FUNC2
0001 to
D050 to
0100 to
0200 to
0300 to
0400 to
0500 to
0600 to
0049
0099
0199
0299
0399
0499
0599
07FF
Scan Rings
Clock maintenance commands
Clock basics
PU, control storage maintenance commands
PU
Control storage
Channels
Storage controller, dual processor controls
0lAG1
0801 to 0849
0850 to 0899
0900 to 0999
Scan Rings
Clock maintenance commands
Clock Basics
PU, Control storage maintenance commands
PU
Control storage
Channels
Storage controller
The Basic diagnostics test the processing unit through the
support bus adapter. If errors are detected by the
diagnostics, a reference code, a FRU list, and Repair
Procedure references are displayed. For a description of
reference codes, see "MSS, Power, and Reference
Codes" on page DIAG 015.
DOlO
M3
-r-
~ Always M3
~'Test
identifier
(range 000 to FFF)
Some of the Basic diagnostics are used to ensure that the
processing unit is capable of running MSMos. These
diagnostics are on FUNC2. The other Basic diagnostics
test areas that the MSMDs cannot test. These
diagnostics are on the DtAG 1 diskette.
Basic diagnostic
Area Tested
OAOO to OA99
OBoo to OB99
OCooto OC99
0000 to 0099
OEoo to OEFF
For information on running processing unit Basic
diagnostics, see "How to Run Processing Unit
Diagnostics" on page DIAG 120.
Basic diagnostic IDs are displayed in the lower left corner
of the Test Case Monitor screen while the corresponding
diagnostic is running and appear in the RRRR field of a
diagnostic reference code when an error is detected by
the Basic diagnostics.
Example of a Basic Diagnostic Test 10 and Reference
Code
Test 10
Reference Cede
50
59
60
70
50
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE055
PN 6169404
,20f2
I
1.1
EC A20558
I
,~,~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~,~
Unit Code
eTl STG
46
PU
47
65
= CHNL
75
= STG
FD
= elKS
180
0
UU
= 8SM
J
I
8SM
CHNL
= dual STG
SBA
M3
x
8 8
~
Status
= FRU
identified
Basic diagnostic
Error number within test
______~L-________~________~__~____~
DIAG 110
0000000000000000000000000 000000000"
.... 1
"."11'"'
""
Ij
I
I.,
'
I,
11'11 111 ' "
H'
'1"
'%"" :
'n
'''' ..
tltlll ,
,,''''''b'.UP ,,,,,,,,,..
',=.
""t'!'W...,..#iMtlllI.!ld
,".,e/'....""'f"'''1!ilUM''MII!hH..
'!lI'... ,IH..I_*~M.iy!i.!l;y •• :!/!'"'Y·#$'Tj"""'4i'!,:I"i,t·"''hNW-tfr1r!'IL#';J!I'.!i~*'''''"fJ
",ltr" ,l,l
!!{I!!'W'!IYfI',
11!(!h.!~M",g''jjl!!nl!,...m', ......... " 1
b
'
*
t±+
rl
0000000000000000000000000
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0·0
DIAG 115
Machine Speed Microdiagnostics
(MSMDs)
MSMD Test Organization
The first six MSMD storage loads are on the FUNC2
diskette and storage load seven is on the DIAG 1 diskette.
Each storage load contains one or more sections and each
section contains several tests.
MSMDs are the main tool for isolating hardware failures
and verifying repairs in the processing units. They run in
processing unit control storage at machine speed. If an
error is detected by the MSMDs, a reference code, FRU
list, and Repair Procedure page reference are displayed.
Storage
Load
For MSMD storage loads 1 through 5, the TCM loads a
single storage load from FUNC2 into PUO and PU 1
control storage. The storage loads are run first in PUO
then in PU 1.
Section
A
B
C
o
E
F
For MSMD storage load 6, the TCM loads the storage
load from FUNC2 into PUO and PU 1 control storage.
The storage load is then started in both processing units
to test dual processor controls. In control storage, the
MSMDs run under the control of the MSMD Monitor.
Console messages are passed from the MSMO Monitor to
the TCM.
G
2
H
I
J
3
K
L
M
N
See "How to Run Processing Unit Diagnostics" on page
DIAG 120.
4
MSMD Test IDs
o
P
Q
R
S
MSMD test IDs are eight characters long starting with a Z
and include the MSMD section 10 and the UU and RRRR
fields of the reference code that is displayed if a failure is
detected.
- 5
T
U
V
First Test
Section
Name
Areas Tested
ZADATAOO
ZBOATAOO
ZCBRANOO
ZDSHFTOO
ZESHFTOO
ZFINTMOO
ZGIPUAOO
PU data flow 1
PU data flow 2
Branching
Shifter
Spare
Interrupt/timers
Special arithmetic/multiplier
ZA590101
ZHSTGCOO
ZISTGCOO
ZJSTGCOO
SARs, retry I cache, and keys
ACB Traps, OLAT
Address facilities
ZH590801
ZKBSMTOO
ZLBSMTOO
2MBSMTOO
ZNPAGEOO
Main storage
Main storage
Spare
Swap buffer in page/out page
ZK401101
ZOCHANOO
ZPCHANOO
ZQCHANOO
ZRCHANOO
ZSCHANOO
Externals, sequence counts, traps
Channel SARs
Data buffer, store,
For an explanation of setting the system control
options, see Volume AOa, "Console Functions."
2.
81M 2676380
Note: Do not interrupt a diagnostic run if the
message VERIFY HAS CLEANUP DO NOT
INTERRUPT is displayed.
V - RUN DIAGNOSTICS TO VERIFY REPAIR AFTER EXCHANGING FRUS
Compare (OA Screen)
Operation Rate (00 Screen)
Install FUNC1 in diskette drive 1 and FUNC2 in
diskette drive 2.
4381
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION SCREEN
EC xxxxxx
- RUN DIAGNOSTICS TO ISOLATE FAILURE BEFORE EXCHANGING FRUS
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
1.
Both PUs are required for diagnostics. You cannot
run diagnostics on one of the PUs while customer
jobs run on the other PU.
Ensure the FUNC1 diskette is installed in diskette
drive 1.
2.
4.
1.
EC A20558I
L.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.
__________~________~________~________~
tI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -0 0 0
DIAG 120
()ooo·ooooo
bs#
'
rid'
r1'
lf'l
WI!
, '"
!
"1' '7
,'"
"
(:II
g!'.
xe'WiW't'Y
.,t
• rsm"WW:!if:IUW .'"e ( ," .. hgA'ffllffWI/if·u'®nMf'ff
,. , .,'
'to
W·dJ.!iW\l6H'
I
"""'¥'!l!w,
.11.1.,,",
J."'pm'ttf··wU...III"..'W'''P!l''.'.''9N'!lMW••..,;.,.'NUH!II!N.y.iT::77":#
'od!J",'.'IH" " . , .. 'f! '''~'druJ ',,' /: " ,. ',"
""M'!' '''"'
('Ii!:".'" I ""'"f.!IwW....I.,e....IIl.,!tI!e't ..'· .............2lf1!'."u ....,..",.... . . . . . .·,"'" ",
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
DIAG 125
Option I - Isolation Mode
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTICS ISOLATE FAILURE OPTION
EC xxx xxx
When you select this option, you are prompted to enter
the reference code of the failure you are working on. The
system error logs are checked for the reference code you
entered. You have the option of changing your entry if it
is not found; then you are asked if the processor is
available for testing. Answer by keying in Y or'N and
pressing ENTER. If the processor is not available at this
time, the FRU list generated by ELA at the time of failure
is displayed. If the processor is available for testing, the
failing PU is determined from the reference code you
entered and a group of diagnostics is selected and run to
isolate the failure. The following sequence is used to run
the tests until an error occurs:
•
Basic diagnostics 0001 to 07FF (FUNC2 diskette)
•
MSMO storage loads 1 through 6.
•
Basic diagnostics OBOO to DFFF (DIAG 1 diskette)
KEY IN THE
SYSTEM REFERENCE CODE
AND PRESS ENTER
I F NONE IS AVA ILABLE, ENTER IINONE".
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT:
====>
Note: Not all the diagnostics are run every time~ Tests
are selected based on the reference code you entered.
If the diagnostics do not detect an error, the FR U list that
was generated by ELA at the time of failure is displayed.
If an error is detected, you are given a combined FRU list
for the reference code you entered and the the diagnostic
reference code. The priority of the FRUs on the FRU list
is:
1.
FRUs on both ELA and diagnostic FRU lists
2.
FRUs on the diagnostic FRU list only
3.
FRUs on the ELA FRU list only.
4381
81M 2676380
Ie
I~~q
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 61 69406
GE065
.1of2
II
.
EC A20558
I
~.~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~.
______~__~________~________~________~
DIAG 125
DIAG 130
Verify Repair Option Screens
Notes:
Option V - Verification Mode
1.
When you select this option, a group of diagnostics is
selected and run to verify the repair of a processing unit
failure.
After you select Option V, you are requested to enter
either the Problem Analysis number (PAxx) or the
reference code for the failure you are working on. If
neither is available, enter NONE.
2.
Example: If this option is used to test an engineering
change, enter NONE.
After your PA number or reference code is correctly
entered, the Diagnostic Mode PU Diagnostics Verify
Repair Option screen is displayed and you are then
requested to place an x next to the FRU(s) you
exchanged. If no FRUs were exchanged, press ENTER.
Example: If a card was swapped or a cable reseated,
press ENTER.
Do not interrupt a verification run if the message:
VERIFY HAS CLEANUP DO NOT INTERRUPT is
displayed. Interrupting the test can leave the wrong
processor reconfiguration data and cause degraded
performance.
If the test is accidentally interrupted:
•
Reselect the verification mode option.
•
Enter the reference code you were working with
or NONE.
•
Enter the FRUs exchanged when prompted.
•
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Failing test (if original symptom was a PU basic
failure)
•
Basic diagnostics 0001 to D7FF (FUNC2 diskette)
•
MSMD storage loads 1 to 6
•
Basic diagnostics 0800 to DFFF (DIAG1 diskette).
KEY IN THE PROBLEM ANAL YS IS CODE (PAxx) AND PRE'SS ENTER
IF NONE IS AVAILABLE, ENTER IINONE".
COMMAND: .
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: V
The reconfiguration data is then reset to primary hardware
for the FRU you replaced (if the FRU has backup
hardware) and diagnostics start running in the following
sequence:
•
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTICS VERIFY REPAIR OPTION
EC xxx xxx
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTICS VERIFY REPAIR OPTION
. EC xxxxxx
OlB-A1 BOARD (C 1)
E FGttJK
P Q R STU
RA
2
VE
RE
-----4-----RJ
VN - RN
- RS
A2 BOARD
A3 BOARD
S T V WX
E F G H J K L N P Q R STU
24 - - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - -- X
4
RA
VE
RE
A4 BOARD
RJ
ABC 0 E F G H J K L M N P Q R STU V W
VN
RN
2
RS
4 ---------------------
If errors occur during the verification test, you are directed
back to the Repair Procedures. If no errors occur, you are
directed to the End Repair Procedure.
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT:
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE065
I
II
PN 6169406
.2of2
.
EC A20558
====>
==>
B1 BOARD
MA
HA
- ME - HE
- MJ - HJ
- MN - HN
- MS - HS
DA
DE
OJ
ON
OS
B2 BOARD
MA
HA
- ME - HE
- MJ - HJ
- MN - HN
MS - HS
DA
DE
OJ
ON
OS
TYPE "X" IN INPUT FIELD(S) ASSOCIATED WITH
FRU(S) JUST EXCHANGED, THEN PRESS ENTER
I
L.~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~___________~________~__~----~----~--~
DIAG 130
000000000000000 000000000·0 000000000
16
'
Et6riTlt
" 'i_,...L.I.1!z'J,.:..6=
J
,
J
1'1,
,I,
'W'jb!' I
.If'
in'
'ff ,'".
,It. H ,wln'wmtwu
"',f.'Mt'fm.'oo'Wll!l!,,,1
OGOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DIAG 135
Mark In Test
Option C - Channel Interface
Diagnostics
The channel interface diagnostics are in storage load 7.
They include:
Checks for a failure to reset an active (up) level of the
Mark In interface line by wrapping Mark Out to Mark In.
[For tailgate pin locations, see "Bus Wrap Terminator
(Part 8483772) Wiring."]
•
Mark In Test-Detects a reset failure of the Mark In
bit on the channel interface.
Notes:
•
Channel Microcoded Device Exerciser (CMDE)-Used
to diagnose channel or I/O device problems. (See
page DIAG 140.)
•
Cable Wrap Test (CWT)-Used to isolate channel
interface adapter driver and receiver and channel
cable problems. (See page DIAG150.)
The Mark In test runs automatically after the Channel
Wrap test.
2.
The wrap terminators must be installed on the
channel being tested when running the Mark In test.
3.
An open condition of the Mark In line is reported as
ground.
For details on selecting CWT and the Mark In test, see
"How to Run Channel Interface Tests." After the tests
are selected, detailed run instructions are displayed on the
screen.
How to Run Chsnneiinterfsce Tests
1• Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
2.
Ensure FUNC 1 is installed in diskette drive 1.
3.
Install DIAG 1 in diskette drive 2.
4.
Key in QG, and press ENTER. The Diagnostic Mode
PU Diagnostic Selection screen displays.
5.
Key in C, and press ENTER. The first Channel
Interface Diagnostic Option screen displays.
6.
Key in one of the following:
o
1.
Example of Mark In Test Error Screen
MARK-IN TEST
ERROR DETECTED
CHANNEL 04
MARK IN IS STUCK AT GROUND
to test a channel attached to PUO.
to test a channel attached to PU 1.
7.
Press ENTER, the second Channel Interface
Diagnostic Option screen displays.
8.
Make one of the following selections:
01
Selects CMDE
02
Selects CWT and the Mark In test
E
Ends the channel interface tests.
==>
PRESS ENTER TO RTN TO OPTION SCREEN <.=
When you select one of the tests, detailed run
instructions and test options are displayed to aid you in
running the test.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
e Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE070
I
II
I
PN 6169407
EC A20558
. 1 of2
..~0~1~O~c~tw8~4~~.____________~~_______________L-______________~______________..J
DIAG 135
DIAG 140
<
Channel Microcoded Device Exerciser
(CMDE) - Normal Mode
Start
>
'----~
Use the CMDE to diagnose channel or I/O device
problems. If this test does not detect any errors, run
System Test/4381 or System Test/4381XA to isolate
the problem.
Enter
channe I 10
(00 to 08)
For details on how to select CMDE, see "How to Run
Channel Interface Tests" on page DIAG 135. After
CM DE is selected, detailed run instructions are displayed
on the screen.
TIO/SIO and sense
commands issued
...----1.. 1 to the next
device on the
channe 1.
Normally, you will run the CMDE only under the direction
of the Repair Procedures. For the operation of CMDE in
this mode, see the flowchart on this page. To use CMDE
this-way, key in the channel address (00 to 08) when
prompted by the screen. CMDE sends a Test I/O, Start
I/O, and Sense sequence to each device address on the
channel until a response is received. When a device
responds, CMDE requests that you ready the device you
want to test and enter the address of that device (for
example, OE). CMDE then sends the Test I/O, Start I/O,
and Sense sequence to that device and shows if a good
response is received.
Channe l i s okay.
Enter the address
of the device to
be tested.
TIO/SIO and sense
commands issued
to the selected
device.
Note: CMDE tests the address range of 00 through EF
for PUO and the address range of 00 through FF for PU 1.
The address range Fa through FF is reserved for LCA on
PUO.
No
If no response is received from any device on the channel
in the first Test I/O, Start I/O, and Sense sequence, you
are then prompted to ready a device on the channel and
enter its address. CMDE then sends the Test I/O, Start
I/O, and Sense sequence to that device and shows if a
good response is received.
The screen
displays good
completion.
Ensure that at
least one device
is made ready on
this channel.
Enter its
address.
Error results
are displayed.
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
GE070
I
II
PN 6169407
.20f2
.
EC A20558I
'I
~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.__~______~__~____~________~.________~
«I copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O· 0 0 0 0 ·00 0·0
DIAG 140
ooooooooc'
"r"
·"M''''''-'''li:
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
DIAG 145
Channel Microcoded Device Exerciser
(CMDE) - Support Mode
Status and Sense Bit Meanings
<:~
Device (unit) Status
A second method for using CMDE is intended for support
personnel. For the operation of CMDE in this mode, see
the flowchart on this page. To use CMDE this way, key in
the channel address followed by an x (for example 02x).
CMDE then displays an option screen. The options on this
screen let you run additional channel command sequences
to devices on the channel.
Notes:
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
1.
Channel Status
CMDE runs to the end for an I/O device even though
the device does not have an entry in the UCW table.
2. For I/O device sense and status bit values, see
"Status and Sense Bit Meanings."
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
Attention
Status Modifier
Control Unit End
Busy
Channel End
Device End
Unit Check
Unit Exception
____
S_t_a_r_t__
~:>
Enter channe I 10
(00-08) and x.
Example: 02x
The extended
option screen for
CMOE displays.
Program Controlled Interrupt
Wrong Length
Program Check
Protection Check
Channel Data Check
Channel Control Check
Interface Control Check
Chaining Check
Select an option
from the screen.
The selected
option.is run.
Sense Byte 0
80
40
20
10
08
04
Command Reject
Intervention Required
Bus-Out Check
Equipment Check
Data Check
Overrun
Yes
Note: The sense information listed is not valid for all
devices; it is a general guide only.
4381-3
81M 2676380
Ie Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
DIAG 145
DIAG 150
Channel Wrap Test
Notes:
The Channel Wrap Test (CWT) can be used to isolate the
following channel problems:
1.
•
Channel interface adapter receiver and driver failures.
2.
•
Channel interface cable and connector failures.
•
When each bus-out or tag-out line is activated, the
corresponding tag-in or bus-in line is at an active
level. See "CWT Error Example 1 (Dropped Bits)."
All tag and bus lines can be reset. See "CWT Error
Example 2 (Unable to Reset Bits)."
For details on how to select CWT, see "How to Run
Special Channel Tests." Before running CWT, run storage
loads 1 through 6 to verify the operation of the processor
up to the channel interface adapter receivers and drivers.
Two wrap terminators (bus wrap and tag wrap) must be
installed before running CWT. For terminator part
numbers and wiring, see "Bus Wrap Terminator (Part
8483772) Wiring" and "Tag Wrap Terminator (Part
8483773) Wiring."
The wrap terminators can be installed:
At the I/O tailgate (01 E) instead of the I/O interface
cables to test the channel interface adapter card.
•
At an I/O device instead of the interface terminators
or on the channel out interface cables to test the
interface cables and connections on the channel.
After you have completed CVVT, remove the wrap
terminators and reinstall the channel terminators and the
interface cables.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
\D Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
A short between DATA IN and SRV IN cannot be
detected by this test.
3.
METERING OUT is not tested here; see "Metering
Test Repair Procedure" in Volume A01, page
CHNL 061.
4.
If the CWT runs successfully, the Mark In test is run
automatically.
The CWT verifies that:
•
Interrupts from I/O devices attached to the channel
that you are testing can cause CWT to fail.
5.
6.
If your system has shared control units attached,
ensure that the shared control units have the
interface you are testing disabled.
If you have an IBM 3044 Fiber Optic Channel
Extender Link attached to the channel you want to
test, do not run CWT to the remote (Model 001) end
of the link. To run CWT to the local (Model C01) end
of the 3044 link, ensure that the Link Disable switch
is in Disable.
Channel FRU Locations
PU
Channel
Adapter Card
Bus Out / Tag Out
Bus In/Tag In
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
01A-A3 K2
01A-A3 E2
01A-A3 F2
01A-A3 G2
01A-A3 H2
01A-A3 J2
01A-A3 P2
01A-A302
01A-A3 R2
018-A 1 K2
018-A 1 E2
018-A 1 F2
01B-A 1 G2
01B-A 1 H2
01B-A 1 J2
01B-A 1 P2
01B-A 1 02
018-A 1 R2
01 A-A2 ZG to 01 E-A 1
01A-A3 B3 to 01E-A3
01A-A3 B2 to OlE-AS
01A-A3 YJ to 01E-A7
01A-A3 YK to 01E-A9
01A-A3 YL to 01E-B2
01A-A3 YN to 01E-B4
01A-A3 YP to 01E-B6
01A-A3 YO to 01E-BS
01 B-A 1 ZG to 01 E-C 1
01B-A1 B3 to 01E-C3
01 B-A 1 B2 to 01E-CS
01B-Al YJto01E-C7
01 B-A 1 YK to 01E-C9
01B-A 1 YL to 01E-D2
01 B-A 1 YN to 01 E-D4
01 B-A 1 YP to 01 E-D6
01 B-A 1 YO to 01E-DS
01A-A2 ZH to 01E-A2
01A-A3 B4 to 01E-A4
01A-A3 BS to 01E-A6
01A-A3 ZA to 01E-A8
01 A-A3 ZB to 0 1E-B 1
01A-A3 ZC to 01E-B3
01A-A3 ZE to 01E-BS
01A-A3 ZF to 01E-B7
01A-A3 ZG to 01E-89
01 B-A 1 ZH to 01 E-C2
01 B-A 1 B4 to 01 E-C4
01 B-A 1 85 to 01E-C6
01 B-A 1 ZA to 01 E-C8
01 B-A 1 ZB to 01 E-O 1
01 8-A 1 ZC to 01 E-03
01 B-A 1 ZE to 01 E-DS
01 B-A 1 ZF to 01 E-07
01 8-A 1 ZG to 0 1E-D9
1
2
3
4
S
6
7
S
1
1
o
1
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
4
S
1
6
7
1
S
Note: For channel 0 on PUO, the cables from 01AA3 to
01AA2 are:
Bus out/tag out
Bus in/tag in
01A-A3 YM to 01A-A2 YO
01A-A3 ZD to 01A-A2 YR
For additional information, see Volume A06, Service Aids,
"Channel Failure Isolation."
Bus Wrap Terminator (Part 8483772) Wiring
Bus Bit
Bus Out
Bus In
Tag Wrap Terminator (Part 8483773) Wiring
Tag Bit
Tag Out
Pin
Tag In
Pin
SUPR
OP
HOLD
ADR
SEL
CMD
DATA
SRV
B12
J13
G12
810
009
011
Gl0
013
REO
OP
DISC
ADR
SEL
STAT
DATA
SRV
J06
B03
Jl1
B05
B08
D04
G08
006
MTR
j04
MTR
GOS
(hex)
P
O(SO)
1(40)
2(20)
3(10)
4(08)
5(04)
6(02)
7(01)
MARK
B03
004
BOS
006
BOS
009
Bl0
011
812
013
G03
J04
GOS
J06
GOS
J09
Gl0
Jl1
G12
J13
O(SO)
1(40)
2(20)
3(10)
4(08)
5(04)
6(02)
7(01)
DIAG 150 .".
000000 0000000000000000000 000000000
"+II'! ,,/,,'
*+tdft'
b
!.! '''t'M
"J
r
•
"Jt'pll'd,I' I*,'J
• 'tl"[I1"
@f!it' !It
W 1,1,,:1
"r!!!/
Ill" ",I,
'l1rrl'"II/!!TtrMh"IoII1
{"'r
I'!,'"."('
",+","
'i1IT'dHWlhll/l!!"!!IK,n'lIiNKlN IIf'fIIWhblI!NVKlWW!ffIWj'!!!Il"'""H"H'I!I*"ie'''gtyQ,''''',"mPllFI''IN''''1!fImos'=
0000000000000000000000000
o
I
"'H¥
"'!L:
4&" "" H ""
j
'*H±d,'", !tL"bt '+4='" "'+ "\&H '"t't\1" "8'+++ '''.'It
Notes:
CWT Error Example 1 shows one instance of dropped bits
and one instance of shorted lines on channel 4.
1.
Dropped bus bit 1. Bits 1, 3, 5, and 7 (X'55') were
sent on bus-out and bits 3, 5, and 7 (X'15') were
returned on bus-in.
1.
2.
CWT Error Example 2 (Unable to Reset Bits)
CWT TAG ABBREVIATIONS
Interrupts from 1/0 devices attached to the channel
that you are testing can cause CWT to fail.
CWT Error Example 2 shows a failure to reset a tag and
bus line on channel 04.
2.
Suspect a bus parity bit failure if the screen shows
that a failure was detected but the ACTUAL and
EXPECTED bit patterns are the same.
1.
TAGS 10. The Address out tag (X'10') cannot be
reset.
2.
BUS 40. Bus bit 1 (X' 40') cannot be reset.
Also bit 1 (X'40') was sent on bus-out and no bits
(X'OO') were returned on bus-in.
3.
For the meanings of the tag abbreviations that appear
on the screen, see "CWT Tag Abbreviations."
Command Out (CD) or Status In (ST) is shorted to
either Hold Out (HD) or Disconnect In (DC). Hold Out
(X'20') was sent on tag-out; Disconnect In and
Status In (X'24') were returned on tag-in.
4.
For the hex values assigned to the tag lines, see "Tag
Bit Values."
OP
AD
HD
DC
SE
SP
RE
SR
CD
ST
DA
5.
The hardware sets tag bit 7 (Service Out) on
whenever tag bit 5 (Command Out) andlor tag bit 6
(Data Out) are set on.
Tag Bit Values
6.
For bus and tag pin locations, see Volume A06,
Service Aids, "Bus and Tag Lines."
o
Also Command Out, Data Out, and Service Out
(X'OT) were sent on tag-out and Disconnect In,
Status In, Data In, and Service In (X'2T) were
returned on tag-in.
Note: The hardware sets tag bit 7 (Service Out) on
whenever tag bits 5 (Command Out) or tag bit 6 (Data
Out) are set on. Ignore tag bit 7 if tag bits 5 or 6 are on.
Bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CABLE WRAP TEST
BUS (BIT PATTERN):
EXPECTED
55 AA
ACTUAL
15* AA
TAGS (OUT I IN) :
EXPECTED
ACTUAL
==>
4381
BIM 2676380
I~~g
o Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
OP/oP
40
40
80
80
AD/AD
10
10
40
00*
20
20
SE/SE
08
08
HDIDC
20
24*
ERROR DETECTED
10
10
08
08
SPIRE
80
80
04
04
SR/SR
03
03
02
02
**************
01
01
CD/ST
07
27*
UNABLE TO CLEAR
TAG AND BUS LINES
DA/DA
03
03
PRESS ENTER KEY TO RETURN TO CWT OPTION SCREEN
GE080
I
II
PN 6169409
.10f2
.
Operational
Address
Hold
Disconnect
Select
Suppress
Request
Service
Command
Status
Data
Hex
80
40
20
10
08
04
02
01
Tag-Out
Suppress
Operational
Hold
Address
Select
Command
Data
Service
Tag-In
Request
Operational
Disconnect
Address
Select
Status
Data
Service
CABLE WRAP TEST
CHANNEL: 04
CHANNEL: 04
ERROR DETECTED
EC A20558
TAGS:
BUS:
10
40
* SPECIAL WRAP TERMINATORS *
BITS
IN(TAGS)
OUT
SUPR
0
REQ.
1
OP
OP
2
HOLD
DISC
ADR
ADR
3
4
SEL
SEL
.. STA
CMD
5
6 SRV/DATA
SRV/DATA
7 CMD/SRV/DATAOUT (*)
OUT
0
i
2
3
4
5
6
7
IN (BUS)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
== PRESS ENTER KEY TO RETURN TO CWT OPTION SCREEN
(*) FOR MORE INFORMATION ON TAG BIT (7) SEE THE "MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
MANUAL" UNDER DIAGNOSTICS: SPECIAL CHANNEL TESTS
I
~._0_1~O~c~t_8~4~~.
,'U,r
0 0 000 0 0 0
DIAG 155
CWT Error Example 1 (Dropped Bits)
"t
________~________~________~________~
DIAG 155
1
DIAG 160
Option T - Installation Mode
This option is to be run only at installation time to verify
that all primary and backup hardware is error free.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
PU DIAGNOSTIC INSTALLATION TEST OPTION
EC xxxxxx
If you select the Installation Mode option at installation
time, all Basic and MSMO diagnostics are run against
both primary and backup processor hardware. If the
Installation Mode option is selected after installation time
and primary hardware has been reconfigured, the
reconfigured hardware is not tested. The following
sequence is used to run the tests:
•
Basic diagnostics 0001 to D7FF (FUNC2 diskette)
•
MSMD storage loads 1 through 6 (2 passes)
•
Basic diagnostics 0800 to DFFF (DIAG 1 diskette).
***WARNING***
THE FOLLOWING TEST IS FOR USE DURING
PROCESSOR INSTALLATION ONLY
IS THIS AN INSTALLATION DIAGNOSTIC RUN?
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: T
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM COfp. 1984
GE080
I
PN 6169409
.2of2
II
EC A20558
====>
ENTER RESPONSE-(Y/N)
I
•.________~~________~________~______~
.~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~
DIAG 160
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000,
W"DIlt'fI!IK J!!!"HMIII!.w'r!! HI'IWfl'M!fWW"
!!Wf"
'WlSW"'!" ""IH'Mt'le-",=" .,N"'21J'ZrtrI'WW" 'r"?,,,ic'tT,'nr'M"rU'" "t:JW~'d.!!Wtd
'HHw'
j,jJ'
'd6!8t'MY* jlr4JM1
I.t .. j.*!etl¥thw
±
HLlt
nd!
I,{,~I."
Jr'!
'
YfM.!:..f"u . . . . . . ,.,'.j.'W'u!e.WW•.!!.!.I.!pJ¥f';.W' J''''''''WWMywW'''',nI
!tlll!
111'.
.........
I!,
II J !dIN "M "I,," "r'" ''''''. 'il
"'!K'!
I!
NUt
,'"
&
1/"1
i,,'W,...", . , " ,', "".it d!I""
'U"IfI!W''',!1il''!i I',
".',,."'rlt"·"
, ,!
""'W""IHdi'IN'
, II
rl
'bm"
rl'
..
..~
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
DIAG 165
Option F - Field Support Center Mode
PRINT
Select this option only under the direction of the Field
Support Center or Engineering. When you select Option F
for the first time, a warning message is displayed. If you
can run diagnostics on the processor at this time, press
ENTER. The Field Support Center screen is displayed.
PO
P2
To run diagnostics from the Field Support Center screen:
P3
1.
P4
Key in a selection from each of the following option
fields: DISPLAY, PRINT, TERMINATION, and TEST
SELECTION.
Press ENTER.
3.
If you selected an option other than the default
(intensified) options, press ENTER again to start
running the selected tests.
DISPLAY
DO
01
02
03
04
TEST 10 ONLY
PRINT
ALL RESULTS ON ERROR
TEST 10 AND ERROR RESULTS
ALL RESULTS ALWAYS
SUPPRESS DISPLAY
TEST SELECTION
Testing stops on the first error.
Testing continues when errors are detected.
RESTART
SO
Sl
S2
S3
If you select options other than those offered on the
screen or select conflicting options, a message prompts
you to change your selections.
If option T 1 is selected, testing continues only when
actual and expected results do not agree. Testing is
stopped if a machine check is detected.
SO
S1
S2
S3
The selected processing unit Basics are run.
The selected MSMDs are run.
All MSMDs are run (except storage load 7).
All processing unit Basics on FUNC2 and all
MSMDs except storage load 7 are run.
After the option selections are entered, one of four test
input screens is displayed. The test input screen displayed
depends on which test selection option (SO to S3) was
entered. The test input screens are:
DISPLAY
Test IDs are displayed as the tests are run.
Results of a failing test are displayed.
All test IDs and results of failing tests are
displayed.
Results of all tests are displayed.
No test IDs or test results are displayed.
TEST 10 ONLY
ALL RESULTS ON ERROR
TEST 10 AND ERROR RESULTS
ALL ~ESULTS ALWAYS
p4 SUPPRESS PRINT
TARGET PU:
R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: CD1P3TOSl
TO TERMINATE ON ERROR
T1 CONTINUE ON ERROR
UO PUO ONLY
Ul PUl ONLY
U2 BOTH PUG AND PUl
VERIFY S~LECTED OPTIONS AND
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE
TEST SELECTION
For selections DO, 02, PO, and P2, failing tests are
identified by a • next to the test 10.
The options available are:
PO
Pl
P2
P3
BASIC TEST(S)
TERMINATION
MSMD TEST(S)
ALL MSMDS
ALL BASICS AND MSMDS
Note:
When a selection other than the default selection is keyed
in, the new selection is intensified on the screen as the
default selection.
D3
04
P1
TERMINATION
If no entry is made for any of the option fields, the default
(intensified) value is used. The options may be entered in
any order, but you must have two digits for each
selection and only one selection for any option.
DO
01
02
Test IDs are printed on the console printer as the
test runs.
Test results are printed on the console printer only
for failing tests.
AI! test IDs and the results of failing tests are
printed on the console printer.
Test results are printed on the console printer for
all tests.
No test IDs or results are printed.
TO
T1
2.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
FIELD SUPPORT CENTER SCREEN
EC xxxxx
Basic Test(s) Input screen. Displayed when Option
SO is selected (page DIAG 170).
MSMD Test(s) Input screen. Displ~yed when Option
S 1 is selected (page DIAG 170).
TARGET PU
UO
U1
U2
Run diagnostics on processor 0 only.
Run diagnostics on processor 1 only.
Run diagnostics on both processor 0 and
processor 1.
If both processors are selected (option U2) with basic
diagnostics, each basic diagnostic is run first on PUO,
then on PU1.
If both processors are selected (option U2) with MSMDs,
each core load (0-5, and 7) is first loaded in PUO and
PU 1, run in PUO, then run in PU 1. Core load 6 is loaded
in PUO and PU 1 and each test case is run first in PUO,
then run in PU 1 before running the next test case.
Runall MSMOs Input screen. Displayed when Option
S2 is selected (page DIAG 175).
Runall Tests Input screen. Displayed when Option S3
is selected (page DIAG 175).
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE085
I~N
6169410
.10f2
II
EC
A20558I __________
.~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.
~
________~________~________~
DIAG 165
DIAG 170
Basic Tests Input Screen
MSMD Tests Input Screen
Enter the start and ending test identifiers for the tests you
want to run in the START TEST 10 and END TEST 10
fields. (For the Basic test IDs, see "Basic Diagnostic
Organization" on page DIAG 110.) If you want to run
only one Basic test, enter that test in the START TEST 10
field and !eave the END TEST 10 field blank. Enter the
number of times you want the test or group of tests to
run in the TEST RANGE LOOP COU NT field. If you want
the tests to keep looping, enter four blanks in the TEST
RANGE LOOP COUNT field.
Enter the start and ending MSMO test identifiers or
section names of the MSM Os you want to run in the
START TEST ID and END TEST ID fields. (For MSMD
section names and a description of MSMO test IDs, see
"MSMO Test Organization" and "MSMO Test IDs" on
page DrAG 115.) If you want to run only one MSMO
test or section, enter the test 10 or section name in the
START TEST 10 field and leave the END TEST 10 field
blank. If you want to run only one MSMO storage load,
enter the storage load as Mx (x= 1 through 6) in the
START TEST 10 field and leave the END TEST 10 field
blank. If you want to continue running after an error, enter
Y in the DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS field. If N is
entered, the diagnostics stop when an error is detected
with the error information displayed. To loop a test or
group of tests, enter the number of times you want the
loop to run in the TEST RANGE LOOP COUNT field, or
enter four blanks to keep the tests looping until you press
the ALT and MODE SEL keys. If you selected a group of
tests, enter the number of times you want each test in
the group to run in the TEST LOOP COUNT field.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
BAS I C TEST(-S) I NPUT SCREEN
EC xxxxx
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
MSMD TEST(S) INPUT SCREEN
EC xxxxx
ENTER:
START TEST 10
ENTER:
START TEST 10
END TEST 10 =
(FOR A SINGLE TEST IGNORE END TEST 10)
END TEST 10
=
(FOR A SINGLE TEST IGNORE END TEST ID)
TEST RANGE LOOP COUNT = 0001
(FOR INDEFINITE LOOP ENTER 4 BLANKS ABOVE)
DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS (YIN)
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: C01P4S0Tl
4381
I~~g
GE085
I
=
TEST LOOP COUNT = 0001
RESTART: R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
==>
PN 6169410
.20f2
=Y
TEST RANGE LOOP COUNT
0001
(FOR INFINITE LOOP ENTER 4 BLANKS ABOVE
RESTART: R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
81M 2676380
=
COMMAND:
I'\r"'\'" I n.LIt'"
U I'" I I U I' ;)
,I
I..
1 I'
1""r-r-l""rT ~
I:.
rr
I:. \, I ;
rnl)nl.T
\, II L
r .,
==>
1 ~ 1
I I J
I
II ~CA205581
•.________~________~________~~______~
.~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~
DIAG 170
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
~ooooooooooooooo
o
0 OO() 0 0 0 0-0
O(~)OOOOOOC
r' "
11111
t"
000 00000'00 000
o o
•
o
o o o o
00
All MSMDs Input Screen
Runs all Basic PU diagnostics on FUNC2 and MSMD
storage loads 1 through 6. If you want the MSMDs to run
more than one time, enter the number of times you want
the MSMDs to run in the TEST LOOP COUNT field. If you
want the tests to continue running when an error occurs,
enter Y in the DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS field. If N is
entered, the diagnostics stop when an error is detected
and the error information is displayed.
Enter the number of times you want the MSMDs to run in
the TEST LOOP COU NT field. If you want the tests to
continue running when an error occurs, enter Y in the
DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS field. If N is entered, the
diGtgnostics stop when an error is detected and the error
information is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RUNALL INPUT SCREEN
EC xxxxx
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
ALL MSMDS INPUT SCREEN
EC xxxxx
ENTER:
TEST LOOP COUNTER (RELIABILITY COUNT)
=
Y
02
ENTER:
TEST LOOP COUNTER (RELIABILITY COUNT)
DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS (YIN)
RESTART: R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RESTART: R RESTART DIAGNOSTIC MODE
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: CD1P4S3Tl
COMMAND:
OPTIONS IN EFFECT: CD2P4T1S3
==>
o
DIAG 175
Runall Input Screen
DISABLE MACHINE CHECKS (YIN)
000 00
=
02
Y
==>
4381
81M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
1984
DIAG 175
o
•
DIAG 200
Test Case Monitor Messages
Messaae
BOTH IDS MUST BE SECTION IDS
OR TEST IDS
REENTER TEST ID(S}
Reason
A MSMD range consisting of one test 10 and
one section 10 was entered. When selecting a
MSMD range, both IDs must be section IDs or
both must be test IDs.
User Action Reauired
Enter a valid range of MSMD
test or section IDs.
CONSOLE PRINTER NOT
AVAILABLE.
SUPPRESS PRINT OPTION
ASSUMED.
An error occurred while attempting to
configure a selected printer for TCM use. The
print option defaults to suppress print.
Press ENTER to continue.
CONTINUING WILL DESTROY
PROCESSING UNIT DATA.
PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE.
If PU diagnostic option F is selected, IML and
IPL are required before starting customer
programs again.
Press ENTER to go to the
Field Support Center screen
or key in a new selection and
press ENTER.
CONTROL STORE LOAD COMPLETE MSMDS RUNNING
A MSMD storage load is complete and the
tests have started.
DIAGNOSTICS ENDED
An R option was encountered.
DISPLAY ERROR
A TCM command to the console display failed
probably because of a microcode error.
The start and end test IDs of a range were
identical.
A MSMD run has completed.
DUPLICATE IDS NOT ALLOWED REENTER
TEST ID(S)
END OF MSMD TEST(S).
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM
ENTER Y TO BYPASS CONTROL STORE
LOAD
The requested MSMD storage load is the same
as the storage load just completed.
INVALID LOOP COUNT
REENTER LOOP COUNT
A not valid hex character was entered.
INVALID INPUTCHECK YOUR ENTRY
INVALID TEST 10: xxxxxxxx REENTER TEST
ID(S)
PU diagnostic option V was selected and a not
valid character was entered.
A wrong test or section ID was entered. (The
not valid 10 remains in the input area.)
INVALID OPTION: x REENTER OPTION
INVALID RESPONSE - REENTER
An invalid ~tion was entered.
An invalid option was entered after PU
diajlnostic o.Q.tion was selected.
Power group on QFS screen is not defined.
POWER GROUP NOT DEFINED
CHECK OFS SCREEN
Messaae
PRINT ERROR
Reason
A TCM command to the console printer failed.
This is probably a orinter problem.
User Action Required .
Press ENTER to return to the
General Selection screen.
PROCESSING UNIT POWER DOWN
PRESS ENTER.
USE PWR SCREENS.
Processing unit power is off.
RANGE ENTERED NOT ON ONE
DISKETTE
REENTER TEST ID(S)
RANGE ENTERED NOT ON ONE
SECTION
REENTER TEST ID(S}
The range of tests selected are contained on
more than one diskette.
Press ENTER to return to the
General Selection screen.
Power up the processing unit
b~ the Rower screens (OW).
Enter a range of test IDs that
are contained on one diskette
only.
None.
RECORD ALL INFORMATION ON
THIS SCREEN.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM.
None. The General Selection
screen is displayed.
Press ENTER to return to the
General Selection screen.
Reenter a valid test range.
RDID ERROR MOD 10: xxxx
RC: xx
A machine check occurred during a MSMD run.
x = the MSMD CS load number (1 to 7l. but
the TCM .cannot be certain of which test was
runninQ when the check occurred.
A diskette error occurred. Some common
return codes are:
Diskette not ready
Module not found
Diskette read error.
81
A wrong response was entered to a request for
information.
Enter a range of MSMD test
IDs that are contained in one
section.
Exchange the listed FRUs,
and run the selected tests
again.
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Diagnostic Selection screen.
OF
41
Press ENTER to continue the
TCM.
Enter Y to request a different
CS load. Press ENTER (with
no V) to run the same CS
load.
Enter a valid hex character;
RE-ENTER MESSAGES
RUN HALTED DUE TO
TERMINATE ON ERROR OPTION.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM.
An error was detected while running under the
stop on error option.
Follow the displayed
instructions, and enter the
r~uested information.
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Dia_gnostic Selection screen.
Enter a valid character.
Reenter test or section ID(s).
Enter a valid option.
Enter 0 or 1.
Change the power group on
QFS to a valid one.
MOUNT DIAG 1 ON DRIVE 2.
ENTER WHEN READY.
MSMD CONTROL STORE LOAD: CSLOAD n
The requested test is not on the diskette that
is now installed.
Install the requested diskette,
and press ENTER.
Informs the operator that the next MSMD
storage load is loading. n = the load number
None.
MSMO MONITOR ERROR.
INVALID TEST !D.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TeM.
The MSMD monitor detected a wrong MSMD
section or test !D.
PR~SS
The MSMD range selected is not contained in
only one section.
(1.-7).
MSMO RESET IN PROCESS
MULTIPLE TESTS MUST BE OF
THE SAME TYPE
REENTER TEST 10(S)
NO PU REQUEST
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM
4381
81M 2676380
e Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Dia~mostic Selection screen.
Run status information.
None.
A range of tests was selected that included
both Basic and MSMDs.
Enter a range of test IDs that
includes only Basics or only
MSMDs.
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Diagnostic Selection screen.
Run Problem Analysis to
analyze the error.
A stop command was given to the TCM
without a request from the console. This can
be either a a hardware failure or a diagnostic
error.
I
GE090
DI,AG 200
1984
o o o o 000000 o 0 o o o
0
"
•
0 0 0 0 0 0
---- ---------------
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
----....,...---=-"'-~,-"".-
- ... -..
------.-------'-~-----
,
"11'111
I
•• 0
o
0000 00 00
0 0 00
Messaae
SECTION ZxxxxxOO ENDED (STARTED)
Reason
"Run status information.
User Action Reauired
SELECTED TEST(S) xxxx TO xxxx
PROCESSED.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM.
The selected Basic tests have run to
completion.
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Diaonostic Selection screen.
SELECTED TEST(S) NOT FOUND
OR BYPASSED.
PRESS ENTER TO RESTART TCM.
SELECT PU SIDE BY ENTERING "0" OR
Either no test exists in the selected range or
not all tests in the selected range can be
executed.
Press ENTER to return to the
Diagnostic Mode PU
Diaonostic Selection screen.
PU diagnostic C was selected and a character
other than 0 or 1 was entered for the selected
PU.
Selected test IDs were not entered in
increasina order.
Enter 0 or 1.
TEST IDS MUST BE IN SEQUENCE
REENTER TEST ID(S)
000
o o o
00000
o
,
"
None.
Enter test IDs in increasing
orde"r.
UNEXPECTED ERROR.
GO TO START 001.
USE REFERENCE CODE BELOW.
The support processor has detected an error.
Press ENTER to return to the
General Selection Screen.
VERIFY SELECTED OPTIONS AND PRESS
ENTER TO CONTINUE.
The selected options are highlighted. The user
is given a chance to either change selections or
leave it the wav it is.
Press ENTER to go to the
next screen.
4381
B/M 2676380
o
o
DIAG 205
",:'
e
o
0"'
I~~g
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GE090
DIAG 205
I
01
000000000000000000.000000000000000
it
1:',,".11; "'1', 1'·'1"" !term
b II IIWUI'M.llftWM,n'ItM"",I.',W:ii"
in ...·.41'*4*
!e,,,,,,••,,,,w.!!I¥!tlM¥t'llijl"dl!'"
'"I,
"WHN"rt'fl
W'
'W'tt',,,,-""
If
hi
't!t
.I.i..
I
T',I
jt
"',
",tIL
'&8r'Wt'1r' ' , 'nt'
'j
'Wt
1M
rt.· ,.It!mutt!.uttWII'fslr . . .
RL
"'9,ld 't
tH'AA!..
I':
M' /. ,WI"!!
b
z+
d,W+Wt¥M " W+lJ' d"
hMIMj,"
. H"NU'M,":..",
",r'
n";'"'",'*H\'£!ftIU=41"" '/.!,WI+'4'*'4Wf".fWiftUWWu'Yl:'i'WfIIPffilM.....,."ic*W1'l"ffiltWUK..m
'~l
0000000000000000000000000 0000000 ••
LOGS
LOG 001
Contents
Introduction .....•....••...•.•...•.••. lOG 001
How to Display Processor Logs ....••.•..•. LOG 010
Summary of log Screens
••••••••••.•••••
Reference Code History Log
••••••••••. ' . ••
LOG 010
lOG 015
Maintenance and Support Subsystem Logs •••
SP Logout Summary ......•.....•••.•.••
SP Detail Log ........•••......••.•..•.
SP Event Counters .....•....•.•.•••..•.
RSF Line Error Statistics ..•........•••..•.
LOG 025
LOG 025
LOG 030
LOG 040
LOG 045
Processing Unit Logs •••••••••••••••••••
Processing Unit Logout Directory ...•.••••.•
Processing Unit Microword Directory ••••••.•
Processing Unit Logout Summary ..•.•••....
PU Reconfiguration Data .••.•......••.•..
LOG 050
LOG 050
LOG 055
LOG 060
LOG 065
Channel Interface Control Check (lFCC) logs
LOG 075
Channel Interface Logout Summary ....••.•.. LOG 075
Channel Interface Logout Detail •......•...• lOG 080
Power Logs •••••••.••••••••••••••.••• LOG 085
Power Error Logout Directory ••.•......•••• LOG 085
Power Error Logout Detail ..••.•....•.••.• LOG 090
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~g
Cl Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GF005
LOG 001
LOG 010
Introduction
When a hardware failure or a microcode error is detected
in the processor, status information is collected,
formatted, and recorded in the logout area of the diskette.
For the MSS, support processor status and device
adapter latches are recorded. For the processing unit, the
scan ring latches are recorded.
Error Log Analysis (ELA) routines use the logged data to
isolate the failure by developing a reference code,
reference code extension, and FRU list. These are used
with the repair procedures to guide the service
representative in a repair action. See "Diagnostics" in
this volume for more information on reference codes.
Time-of-day Clock (TODC) 'Equiva/ent: The TODC
Equivalent is recorded with each log to show the time the
error occurred. The TODC Equivalent is stored in the
support processor with a format of: yy/mm/dd hh mm
ss.
Summary of Log Screens
SP Event Counters
Running totals of SP information.
RSF Line
aEl
RSF line operations and errors.
SP Summary
aESD
Summary of last 16 SP logs.
SP Detail
aESDxx
aEWD
To display a log:
Power Log
Directory
Detailed information on SP
loa xx.
Summary of last 16 power logs.
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
Power Log Detail
aEWDxx
Detailed information on power
power log xx.
2.
Press MODE SEL. The General Selection screen is
displayed.
PU Logout
Directory
aEPD
Last eight PU logs and last
irrecoverable PU log.
3.
Refer to "Summary of Log Screens." Select the log
you want to display, and key in the digits shown in
the To Display, Enter column. Then press ENTER.
PU Summary
aEPS
PU error counters.
Microword
Directory
aEPM
PU control storage registers
at the time of failure.
PU Reconfiguration
Data
IFCC
Summary
aEPR
Areas of the processor
reconfiaured because of an error.
aEI
Summary of last 16 interface
control checks.
IFCC
Detail
QEIDxx
Detailed information on
interface control check xx.
When the processor is powered up, the TODC Equivalent
is set by the customer during support processor IML. The
TODC Equivalent is updated periodically during normal
machine operation from the system time-of-day clock.
Screen Name
Support
Processor
(SP)
How to Display Processor Logs
Power
The error logs are:
•
Reference Code History
•
Support Processor (SP)
•
SP Event Counters
•
Processing Unit (PU)
•
Channel Interface Control Check (lFCC)
•
Power.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
Processing
Unit (PU)
Channel
I~~g
fCl Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
Summary
To display,
Enter:
aESE
Log Type
GF005
LOG 010
: 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
M
·NHn.Hl
.* -
o
lit"'
- ',%frb·-!·.''''r;-*'ft&l!l8f·U'U]''IJ~'!l2''r;Wf,.,nfWnr I2 T"m1n m'u"UfTlIIW!!f{f,J=thth"
"'"
" zLAA!!J' 'Wit!"
II',
,',
"''''''IMM¥'g.·tt''"",ti:I,e.;U'wd+.. i
!-'Il'!!·'ft!":-·I,;.I·II/"'V,tilW,,'"bS"W".
'tt'·wl.t
.,"
•
,r
.,'1
',d1d'"1dttt
0 0 0 0 0 .0 0'·'··0-·····0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • •
LOG 015
REFERENCE CODE HISTORY LOG SCREEN
The Reference Code History Log screen is a record of the
last 3 1 different power, support processor, and
processing unit reference codes with the time of failure
and number of times each one occurred.
To display the Reference Code History Log screen:
. Label Identification
RN: Record number. Record number 00 is the latest
entry.
1. Press MODE SEL.
CT: Count. The number of consecutive times the same
reference code was logged. If CT is greater than 1, the
TOOC Equivalent gives the time of the first failure.
2. Key in aERO and press ENTER.
rODC EaUIV: The time of the failure.
To clear the Reference Code History Log $creen:
REF COOE:The reference code defining the failure. Fora
detailed description of reference codes, see "MSS,
1. Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
Power, and Reference Codes" in the "Diagnostics"
section.
2. Press MODE SEL.
RC EXTN: The reference code extension,
3. Key in aERDP and press ENTER.
4.
i)!
any, for the
failure.
When prompted, key in P and pre$s ENTER again.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GF010
I
PN 6169380
.1m4
II
**REFERENCE CODE LOGOUT FILE**
CURRENT TODC EQUIVALENT: yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
================================================================================
RN CT ---TODC EQUIV-- REF CODE RC EXTN. RN CT ---TODe EQUIV-- REF CODE RC EXTN.
o 01 mm/dd hh:mm:ss EC517464 00000000 16 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
01 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
9 OOmm/dd hh:mm:ss
10 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
11 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
12 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
13 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
14 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
15 00 mm/dd hh:mm:ss
COMMAND: QERD
EC517A64
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
17 00 mm/dd
18 00 mm/dd
19 00 mm/dd
20 00 mm/dd
21 00 mm/dd
22 00 mm/dd
23 00 mm/dd
24 00 mm/dd
25 00 mm/dd
26 00 mm/dd
27 00 mm/dd
28 00 mm/dd
29 00 mm/dd
30 00 mm/dd
TIME OF LAST
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
hh:mm:ss 00000000 00000000
PURGE: yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
==>
EC A20668I
.~.~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~_________~________~________~______~
LOG 015
LOG 020
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
68...L.1_ _·. . &I_.___""'--___---a..----'1
:~~2676380 I~~q GF010 1~~f~169380 .111...:~:.:..·~~=!~O:4...
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
LOG 020
0000000000000000000000000000000000
I
'b' .,
"
!
I,t 'UtIWt'ffi'IK I
t"'wdeu1'W!','.f"M.'';I!!I'.'
'WiLlI"
,*"!,,,, " I I "'1'#"11''''
,'"rid
J
",\,
whWUII 'Ul'UutIlUHNM';
, .
e
f Hi""f'ri" 'hH&H4H' t"#K'##« . ·*'W·IJtWW'
....
'(u,±'rt #Hi'
..
"'d
Kt
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
.LOG 025
MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT SUBSYSTEM LOGS
Maintenance and Support Subsystem (MSS) hardware
failures and microcode errors are logged if enough qf the
MSS is operational.
SP Logout Summary Screen
The SP Logout Summary contains a record of the last 16
SP error logs.
The MSS log screens are:
•
SP Logout Summary
•
SP Detail Log
•
SP Event Counters
•
To display the SP Logout Summary screen:
1. Press MODE SEL.
2. Key in aESD and press ENTER.
'fa clear the SP Logout Summary screen:
Remote Support Facility (RSF) Line error Statistics.
1. Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
2. Press MODE SEL.
3~
Key in QESDPand press ENTER.
***sp LOGOUT SUMMARY***
CURRENT TODe EQUIVALENT: yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
================================================================================
LN EVNT CT TODe EQUIVALENT
LVL MM MC --MSW--- C-IC INST ADPT 51C- LMR- REF.CODE
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
07
07
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0003
0002
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
01
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
mm/dd
mm/dd
mrn/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
mm/dd
COMMAND: QESD
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
12
12
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
63402F2E
63402F2E
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
Ooooooon
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
6340 EE050000
6340 EE05 0000
00000000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
0000 00000000
0000 00000000
0000 0000 0000
0000 3900
1856 96C8
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
00000000
0000 0000
EC517464
EC517A64
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
==>
4. When prompted, key in Pand press ENTER again.
Label Identification
LN:
Log number. Log number 00 is the latest entry.
EVENT:
IML.
The total number of SP errors since the last
C-IC:
CT: The number of consecutive times the same failure
occurred.
TODC Equivalent:
Time of the log.
L VL: The level the SP microcode was running in at the
time of failure.
MM:
MSW.·
The master mask value.
Microcode status word value.
Corrected instruction counter value.
INST: The SP microcode instruction executing at the
tinie of failure.
A DPT: Adapter address the microcode was working
with at the time of failure.
SIC:
LMR:
Address of the last microcode instruction.
Last module read from the diskette.
MC: SP check register contents. For bit values, see
SPCK under "Label Identification" on page LOG 030.
:~~ 2676380 I~~a GF010
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 6169380
.30f4
II EC
A20558 r
.~_~0~1~O~~~8~4~_~
______~________~________~________~
LOG 025
LOG 030
SP Detail Log Screen
Label Identification
The SP Detail Log screen contains detailed error
information recorded at the time of a failure on the
support processor.
LEVEL:
SP Detail Log for Levels 2 through 5
Level of the SP microcode at the time of failure.
Master mask setting.
MMASK:
SP LOG:OO
TOOC EQUIV:yy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss 10:0000000000
EC:866898
EVENT:002D
===============================================================================
To display the SP Detail Log screen:
CMASK:
1.
Press MODE SEL.
SPCK:
2.
Key· in QESDxx and press ENTER. Where xx is a log
number (00-15) selected from the SP Logout
Summary screen (QESD).
o
Two different formats are used for the SP Detail Log
screen depending on the interrupt .level of the SP
microcode at the time of failure. The two formats are for:
Microcode levels 2 through 5 (see "S? Detail Log for
Levels 2 through 5").
Microcode levels 1,6, and 7 (see "SP Detail Log for
Levels 1, 6, and 7").
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LEVEL 03 10lRR 48 IC
7FOO CNFG:ABOOOOOOOOOOA201EDOO
RC:FE400324 00000000
MMASK 01 MIRR 13 C-IC 7FOO
DLAT
LVL
MSW.
LVL
MSW
CMASK OF 10ADT 00 LMR 9309
DATA 85
0 3010 2120
1 60DE 2322
SPCK 12 10CMO 00 LMRB 9309
INST 80
2 0800 2524
3 7F04 2726
LOMe 00
INST EE05 4010 CHAN 85
4 9404 A928
5 208E AB2A
------BURST MODE-----STAT 00
6 60DE AD2C
7 89A4 AF2E
LCA 850000 DISK 811000 --------1/0 STATUS---------- -----------PLDA----------DCA 85FA52 85FB80
DISKl 02
LCA 002000
Cl 0000 C2 0000 C3 8000
DCA 85FC80 85F080
DISK2 38
CCA 0000000000 OP 0000 CK 0000 BF 0000
DCA 85EB80 85FCOO
PWR
01
DCA 0493
c4 00· OS 40 1M 90 PG 80
DCA 85F002 85FEOO
SBA
03
PU
00000000
TM 04 TP 8000 CB QLM
REGISTERS:
SBA2
02
PUl
00000000
PP:26 0111 4200 2334 0000 8080 9978 0020 3AFO
SP:27 2000 1170 2020 3030 8400 8420 8440 8460
----------------------------DEVICE CONTROL BLOCK------------------------------2080 0000 0000 0000 0080 OOF8 0000 0000 0000 0400 0000 0000 0200 0000 0000 0000
0000 A900 0000 0000 408c 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
COMMAND: QESOOO
==>
Common mask setting.
SP check register con.tents. Bit values are:
I/O parity error
I/O timeout
SP storage parity error
SP microcode check
Burst mode change
Always zero
Instruction Counter change
Always zero
LOMe: SP check register contents after log (bits are the
same as SPCK).
IOIRR: I/O interrupt request register contents at the time
of failure.
MIRR: Microcode interrupt request register contents at
the time of failure.
IOADPT: I/O adapter address (if error occurred during an
I/O operation).
IOCMD: I/O·command to a device attached directly to
the SP bus.
IC:
Instruction counter value.
C-IC:
Corrected instruction counter value.
LMR: Last module 10 read from the diskette.
LMRB: Last module 10 base program read.
INST:
Instruction at time of failure.
CNFG: Configuration data for devices attached to the SP
bus.
DLA T:
REFCODE:
Reference code defining the failure.
RC EXTN:
Reference code extension.
MSWs:
:~~ 2676380 I~~g GF010
e Copyright IBM Corp.
1984
I
PN 6169380
.4m4
II ~c
A20668·1·
Directory lookaside tables.
BURST MODE: Burst mode registers for each SP
attached device.
I/O STATUS: Status of I/O devices attached to the SP.
(See "'/0 Status Fields"on page LOG 035.)
Note: A letter can be displayed before the value in the
I/O status fields (except PU). The letters define the error
condition. The error conditions are:
C
P
T
Machine check
Parity error
Timeout
PLDA: Program link data area values. (See "PLOA
Fields" on page LOG 031.)
REGS:
PP:
Primary page active at the time of error.
SP:
Secondary page active at the time of failure.
SPIL CURRENT INSTRUCTION: Address and data of the
current SP microcode instruction at the time of failure.
SPIL LAST INSTRUCTION: Address and data of the last
SP microcode instruction at the time of failure.
. SPIL BRN TABLE:
branch addresses.
Last 13 SP microcode instruction
DEVICE CONTROL BLOCK:
.dependent information.
Sixty-four.bytes of device
Data values in the active register pages.
Microcode status words.
I"
.~.~0~1~O~~~8~4~~.________~__- -____~.~______~__________~
LOG 030
10 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
11hllL'".'I
I,
IllIf1hlll!I:Wwlf'
'., . . . . ." 1 ' ,
•• "
···"',,'N'·"b'F'
".t"'hII!.'I'm6""IiH01N'.'''S'''r.,rr.. zlff¥''
000000.000000000000000000 000000000
LOG 031
PLDA Fields
SP Detail Log for Levels 1. 6. and 7
C1
C2
C3
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Soft stop
Hard stop
Not used
PU degraded
Machine check
Check stop
Off-line
Wait state
Async stop occurred
Address compare
Mode or swap key
Console function request
Start key disabled
Not used
Mode key disabled
Swap key disabled
CE switch on
Operation rate not normal
Check control not normal
Address control not normal
Diagnostic test active
Not used
Not used
Not used
Byte 1
No bits used
No bits used
No bits used
CK
OP
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bits 3-7
Instruction step
Word step
Clock cycle step
Clock pulse step
Repeat microword
Not used
Not used
Not used
Machine check channel detect
Not used
Not used
Not used
. Machine check no retry
log machine check no retry
Disable
Stop after log
Block active
Block invoked
Block processing start
Address compare command
Erase in progress
Save request
Verify block
Deactivate
TODC EQUIV:yy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss 10:0000000000 EC:86689B
EVENT:0002
LEVEL 07 10lRR 00 IC 6344 CNFG:ABOOOOOOOOOOA201EDOO RC:EC517464 00000000
MMASK 00 MIRR 01 C-IC 6344
DLAT
LVL
MSW
LVL
MSW
CMASK OF 10ADT 00 LMR 9000
DATA 81
0 3010 2120
1 60DE 2322
SPCK 12 10CMO 00 LMRB 9000
INST 84
2 0800 2524
3 B068 2726
LOMC 00
INST EE05 BC60
CHAN 85
4 9304 A928
5 20SE AB2A
------BURST MODE-----STAT 00
6 60DE AD2C
7 6348 2F2E
LCA 850000 DISK 810800 --------1/0 STATUS---------- -----------PLDA----------DCA B5FABE 85FB70
0lSK1 02 LeA 000000
C1 0000 C2 OBOO C3 BOOO
DCA 85FC70 85FD70
0lSK2 00 CCA 0000008000 OP 0000 CK 0000 BF 0000
DCA 85FE7C 85FBFO
PWR C 02 DCA 0002
C4 00 OS 40 1M 90 PG 80
DCA 85FCFO 85FDFO
SBA
02 PUO 300068EO
TM c4 TP 8000 . CB Q,LIM
REGISTERS:
SBA2
10 PU1
3Cl00000
PP:2E C901 5201 FOOA 62EO 8262 90F6 10EE 8493
SP:2F OODC 00D6 8000 8Boc 3EOO 0008 0000 663C
-------SPIL CURRENT INSTRUCTION-------------SPIL LAST INSTRUCTION-------ADDR:OOOC
DATA:OOEE 04FO 01A2 04FO
AODR:0006
DATA:5201 0000 0494 OOEE
SPIL BRN TABLE 0722 0000 007A 002e oooe 260C 268E 266C 2646 2628 260C OA66 OA54
COMMAND: Q,ESD01
==>
No bits used
No bits used
aDD patch, special block
Not used
Deactivate
Not used
DS
C4
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
BF
SP LOG:Ol
-=========••=••••=-====-=====-==-==============================================
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Start key
Stop key
External interrupt
4381
B/M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
GF015
1M
Not used
Configured
Not used
Not used
Ch~nnel to channel
Not used
Not used
Not used
I
PN 6169381
.1 of1
PG
Cold IML
Not used
Not used
Interval timer
Not used
Not used
IPL failed
IML failed
II
EC A20558
3270 mode
Printer/keyboard mode
RCS code
Not used
Not used
RSAM code
Not used
ROCF monitor
I
._._0_1~O~c_t_8_4~.~______~________~________~________~
LOG 031
0000000000000000000000000000000000
"-'"'-"-"
... _-
--------------_._.-
,,-
---
_.... '---' -
--
..... _.... --
.. "
'"
- -_.
----_._.
nlHlJilbtrl
±br "
, ''''I!'
I
I
10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o
'!
It
l,j1","
t i l ' "WIt ":dtl tttltH1
t
"W'
t/.t l '
KJ'
H'"
......
8 ' hM "W.,'"
'."W'tH'Hft
H'
f
lot "
'0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LOG 035
I/O StBtus Fields
Bits
0-1:
2-4:
00
01
10
11
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
5:
6:
7:
4381
BIM 2676380
DISK 11 DISK2
Bits
PWR
SBA
Good ending
CRC error
Command error
Hardware error
Operation complete
Control complete
Drive error
Interrupt request
Ove"un/unde"un
Timeout
Record not found
Disk not ready
SP check
.Adapter enable
Interrupt pending
0
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Command check
SP machine check
Inte"upt enable
Interrupt request
Control parity check
Data parity check
Command parity check
Address parity check
Shift register busy
SP machine check
Timer interrupt enable
Timer interrupt request
I~~g
CI Copyright IBM COrp. 1984
GF020
I
PN 6169382
.1 m2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
II
Byte 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 2
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 3
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Byte 4
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
'''f'
LCA
CCA
DCA
PUO and PU1
Command received
Status received
Chaining
Stop transfer
Chaining cancel
Count '= 0
Interface disconnect
Outstanding status
Input request
Output request
DCE interrupt
Timer interrupt
Exception
SP .machine check
Interrupt enable
Interrupt request
Counter overflow
Read timeout
line error
Read error
Stop poll
Timer
Error queue
Not used
Operate
Stop word
370 mode
EC/BC mode
OAT
Wait
Channel sequence match
CS address match
SP Interface error
370 interface error
Interface disable
Status pending
Adapter busy
SP machine check
Interrupt enable
Interrupt request
Overrun
Unde"un
Receive clock
SOLC invalid
SOLC frame
Wrong character
Break byte
Adapter in sync
Extended status
Command complete
DCA active
Key status
Not used
SP machine check
Interrupt enable
Interrupt request
Store address match
LS address match
Not used
System state
PU clock run
.Channel clock run
Storage clock run
Instruction step
System reset
Stack status
Enable/disable chaining
Select reset
CU end error
Data cancel
Not used
Not used
Receive
Transmit
Inhibit 0 insertion
Auto, EBCDIC
ASCII,SOLC
Code length
Code length
NRZI
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
Microword step
Clock step
Pulse step
Disable error
Control store error
Disable error
Channel error
Instruction step
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
OS ready
CTS
RLSo
Ring indicator
OSR transmit
Not used
RLSO transmit
CTS transmit
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Terminal ready
RTS
Wrap
Test
Standby
Half speed
New sync
OCE interface disable
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
used
EC.A20558·1
_________~________~________~________~
.L_~0~1~O~c~t~8~4~~
LOG 035
LOG 040
SP Event Counter Screen
The SP Event Counter screen keeps a count of various
events in the support processor.
To display the SP Event Counter screen:
,.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in aESE and press ENTER.
More than one screen is needed to display the SP
counters. If you want to move between screens, press
and hold the ALT key and press the PAGE UP or PAGE
DOWN key.
The TOTAL columns record the number of times the
event occurre~ since the machine was installed. The
TOTAL columns are not reset when you clear the
counters. The DELTA columns record the number of
times the event has occurred since the last time the SP
Event Counters were cleared.
If a TOTAL or DELTA field reaches its maximum value, it
is reset and starts counting from zero. This can result in
the DELTA field at a higher value than the TOTAL field.
If you want to clear the DELTA columns on the SP Event
Counter screens:
, • Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
2.
Key in OESER and press ENTER.
3.
When prompted, key in R and press ENTER again.
*SP EVENT COUNTERS*
*ERROR LOG DISPLAY*
CURRENT TODC EQUIV: yy/mm/dd hh mm 55
o TOTAL POWER ON HOURS
LAST RESET TODC EQUIV:
o DELTA POWER ON HOURS
TOTAL DELTA
TOTAL DELTA
o
o TIMES POWERED OFF
o
o TIMES POWERED ON
o
0 HOURS IN CE MODE
o
o POWER FAULTS
o
o HOURS IN DIAGNOSTIC MODE
o
o SP PARITY ERR HARD UNREC
o
o SP PARITY ERR HARD RECOV
o SP PARITY ERR SOFT UNREC
o SP PARITY ERR SOFT RECOV
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o SP REIML
o SP RESETS
o SUCCESSFUL LCA RETRY
o LeA CYCLE STEAL ERROR
o SUCCESSFUL DCA RETRY
o DCA CYCLE STEAL ERROR
o UNSUCCESSFUL DCA RETRY
LOG DISPLAY*
*SP EVENT COUNTERS*
CURRENT TODe EQUIV: yy/mm/dd hh mm
TOTAL POWER ON HOURS
DELTA POWER ON HOURS
LAST RESET TODC EQUIV: yy/mm/dd hh mm
DELTA
TOTAL DELTA
o
0 UNSUCCESSFUL CCA RETRY
0 SUCCESSFUL CCA RETRY
o
0 UNSUCCESSFUL DDA RETRY
0 SUCCESSFUL DDA RETRY
0 DDA CYCLE STEAL ERROR
o SUCCESSFUL PCA RETRY
o SUCCESSFUL SBA RETRY
0
0
0
0
0
o
o
o
o
on
0
PU-IML XA MODE
PU-IPL
PU SUCCESSFUL RETRY
PU UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
PU
STOP
,.,.1. CHECK
r-".
v rv 1:.1\1 UE:.f'I I nl"\\.."''''r. CHECK
o PU CHANNEL RESET
COMMAND: QESE
Ie)
o
o UNSUCCESSFUL LCA RETRY
==>
0
0
vn
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o AUTO SP-REIML
o AUTO SP-RESET
COMMAND: Q,ESE
*ERROR
o
o
TOTAL
o
o
o
:~~ 2676380 I~~g GF020
o
o
o
"'r-u'"r'
aJiA ,.. ••• ... r-
0
0
o UNSUCCESSFUL PCA RETRY
o UNSUCCESSFUL SBA RETRY
0
0
0
o PUl SUCCESSFUL RETRY
o PUl UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
o PUl CHECK STOP
o t'UI EXiGENT MACHiNE CHECK
o PUl CHANNEL RESET
0
0
0
0
PU-IML S370
==>
LOG 040
0 () 0 00 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
'tlltlttiW%Y"H'wWu!'
""
t"
..,.'I·
id .. "'IJ....
HlM •
"I't""'!!.'"
!.!lln'I·..'"+Y"·"'''N'........y,'i
"rl t,'Tt'"" ''',! "
·1"*"'1'#
rltf'M",,,
*
"w'tftt
-10
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOG 045
RSF Line Error Statistics Screen
*CNFG/REMOTE*
The RSF Error Statistics screen keeps a count of the
number of Remote Support Facility operations and the line
errors encountered.
NUMBER OF OPERATIONS
NUMBER OF ERRORS
To display the RSF Error Statistics screen:
NUMBER OF UNDERRUNS/OVERRUNS
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in aEL and press ENTER.
I:~g
o Copyright IBM Corp. '984
GF026
SEND
0000
RECEIVE
0000
0000
0000
0000
Q GENERAL SELECTION
Z RETURN TO PROG SYS
COMMAND: QEL
4381
B/M 2676380
*RSF LINE ERROR STATISTICS*
I
PN 616.9383
.1m6
II
EC A20668
==>
I
•.________~______~~______~______~
.~.~O~1~O~~~84~
LOG 045
LOG 050
PROCESSING UNIT LOGS
The Processing Unit Log screens are:
Processing Unit Logout Directory Screen
•
Processing Unit Logout Directory
•
ProceSSing Unit Microword Directory
The Processing Unit Logout Directory screen contains
information on the last nine processing unit logs if at least
one of them was caused by an irrecoverable error. If none
of the last nine PU logs were caused by an irrecoverable
error, the screen contains the last eight PU logs and the
last log caused by an irrecoverable error.
.•
•
Processing Unit Logout Summary
Processing Unit Reconfiguration Data.
To display the Processing Unit Logout Directory screen:
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in aEPD and press ENTER.
PROCESSING UNIT LOGOUT DIRECTORY
10 PU TODC EQIVALENT REF CODE ERR
00C9 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 5DD218AE
00C8 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
KEY
00C7 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 5DD218AE
00C6 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00C5 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 7093CBAE
00c4 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
FSS
00C3 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 5DD218AE DBE
00C2 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
00C1 0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 5DD218AE
OOCO 1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
MODEL: 4381
SERIAL NUMBER: 012345
STG ADRS MACH STATUS
CHANNEL RST
UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
-----------xxxxxxxx UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
-----------EXIGENT MACH CHK
-----------EXIGENT MACH CHK
-----------CHANNEL ERRQR
--2--------xxxxxxxx CHECK STOP
-----------xxxxxxxx UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
-----------UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY
-----------CHANNEL ERROR
-----5-----SUCCESSFUL RETRY
------------
To clear the Processing Unit Logout Directory screen:
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
2.
Press MODE SEL.
3.
Key in aEPDP and press ENTER.
COMMAND:
QEPD
==>
>
Label Identification
10:
PU:
Log. identifier number from 0001 to FFFF.
The failing processing unit (0 or 1).
TODe:
Time of the failure.
REFERENCE CODE: The reference code that resulted
from the error, or blank if the reference code· was not
available.
.
~RR:
DBE
FSS
KEY
Storage error that occurred as follows:
Double-bit error
A soft-soft double-bit error was forced by retry.
Key error
STG ADDR: The location of a storage failure if a storage
error occurred or the message AD N I A if the address is
not available.
4381
B/M 2676380
1:9
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
MACH STA TUS: The machine status after the failure is
logged and analyzed as follows:
CHAN NEL ERROR
A channel error occurred. If the channel .
error cannot be corrected, the channel is
removed from use and the failing. channel
10 is displayed next to the CHANNEL RST .
field.
CHECK STOP
An error occurred that cannot be retried.
LOGOUT NOT EXIST
. No logout data is available for the error.
LOGOUT PURGE
The date and time the log was cleared.
SUCCESSFUL RETRY
The error condition was retried without
another error.
CHECK STOP (RESET)
An error occurred during system reset.
UNSUCCESSFUL RTY
The error condition was retried and
another error occurred.
EXIGENT MACHINE CHECK
An error occurred with processor damage
or system damage.
CHANNEL RST
An X indicates that the channel(s) (00
through 08) were reset because of the
failure. A channel 10 of 00 through 08
shows the 10 of a channel that was
removed from use because of an error.
GF025
LOG 050
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0- 0 0 0 0 () 0 00-- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOG 055
Processing Unit Microword Directory·
Screen
Two Processing Unit Microword Directory screens contain
a record of the information stored in the PU control
storage registers at the time of a failure.
To display the Processing Unit Microword Directory
screens:
Examples of PU Microword Directory Screens
Label Identification
Note: A· next to one of the fields shows the field
contains microinstruction address or data existing at the
time of failure.
10: The same 10 as the Processing Unit Logout
Directory screen.
1.
Press MODE SEL.
CREG: The microinstruction performed at the time of
failure.
2.
Key in aEPM and press ENTER. The first Processing
Unit Microword Directory screen is displayed.
CREGSAVEA, CREGSAVEB, and CREGSAVEC:
three microinstructions performed.
3.
Press ENTER to display the second screen.
CSARBU: Address of the microinstruction performed at
the time of failure.
While either of the screens is displayed, pressing ENTER
will display the other screen.
The last
PROCESSING UNIT MiCROWO LOGOUT DIRECTORY
MODEL:4381 SERIAL NUMBER:012345
10
PU CREG
CREGSVA CREGSVB CREGSVC
CSARBU SAVERG CK STOP RTY FLAG
0185 1 020057Fl *00800000 00000000 00000000 008004 000004 00400000 85428810
0184 0
7FF97FFB *00800000 00000000 00000000 008004 000004 00400000 C4008800
01B3 0
020057Fl *D0800000 00000000 00000000 008004 000004 00400000 84200000
01B2 1 020057Fl *00800000 00000000 00000000 008004 000004 00400000 84010000
01Bl 0 *B8B06A30 F2001FOO FFFFFFFF B8B06A30 *01702C 01702e 00400000 84000000
01BO 1 020057Fl *D0800000 00000000 00000000 008000 000004 00400000 84000000
OlAF 0
020057Fl *00800000 00000000 00000000 008000 000004 00400000 84010000
alAE 1 02105079 *02105079 91423878 1C005B11 017678 011618 00400000 84200000
OlAD 1 02105079 *02105079 91423878 1C005871 017678 Ot7678 00400000 84010000
SA VERG:· Address of the next-to-Iast microinstruction.
CK STOP, RTY FLAG, GHERO.ARO, GHEROASP,
GHERDACC, and COMMUNICATION: Contain additional
error information intended for engineering use only.
COMMAND: QEPM
==> PRESS ENTER
>
PROCESSING UNIT MICROWD LOGOUT DIRECTORY
MODEL:4381 SERIAL NUHBER:012345
GHEROASP
. GHERDACC COMMUNICATION
PU GHERDARD
050200CO 00000014 c4008000 00000000 00000000 12019281 00000000
0185 1
41000040 00008200 00000000 00056000 00000000 92870000 00000000
0184 0
60000080 00005306 1440000c 680000AO 00000000 92870000 00000000
01B3 0
0182 1
020080CO 00080000 00000000 00000000 00000000 12019281 00000000
60000000 0000E87E 04000000 00000000 00000000 12019281 00000000
0181 0
01BO 1
020057FO 00080000 00000000 00000000 00800000 92879880 00000000
OlAF 0
020057FO 00080000 00000000 00000000 00800000 ,92879880 00000000
OlAE 1 60000000 04000000 008000co 00000000 00000000 911201EO 00000000
01AO 1 600000CO 00005030 04000000 00000000 00000000 12019281 00000000
10
COMMAND: QEPM
==>
PRESS ENTER
>
:~~ 2676380 I~~q GF026
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I~N
II
6169383
EC A20668I
.3m6
._._0~1_0~c_t_8_4__. ________~________~________________~
LOG 055
LOG 060
Processing Unit Logout Summary
Label Identification
A Processing Unit Logout Summary screen is provided for
each processing unit. The Processing Unit Logout
Summary screens contain error statistics for sections of
the processing units.
SUCCESSFUL RETRY:
check successfully.
The processor retried a machine
UNSUCCESSFUL RETRY: The processor did not retry a
machine check successfully.
To display the Processing Unit Logout Summary screens:
UNRTY (RETRY 1): An unretriable machine check
occurred.
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in one of the following:
•
•
3.
. OEPSO for processing unit 0 (PUO)
OEPS 1 for processing unit 1 (PU 1).
Press ENTER.
Each entry on the PU Logout Summary screen has two
counters. The counters in the left-hand columns can be
changed or reset by moving the cursor to the counter
location and entering the desired value. The counters in
the center columns collect over the life of the machine;
they cannot be reset.
Machine status and storage error statistics are displayed
in the left-hand side of the screen. The rest of the screen
has error statistics for each area of the processing unit.
UNRTY (RETRY 2J: An unretriable machine check
occurred during retry.
UNRTY (NO RETRY): The processor was operating with
check control in no retry mode when a machine check
occurred.
. CK ST (RETRY 1): The processor went to check stop on
a machine check.
CK ST (RETRY 2): The processor went to check stop on
a machine check that occurred during retry.
PU LOG SUMMARY MODEL: 4381 SERIAL:
0010 0010 SUCCESSFUL RTY
0064 0064
0006 0006 UNSUCCESS. RETRY 0018 0018
0022 0022 UNRTY (RETRY 1)
0014 0014
0014 0014 UNRTY (RETRY 2)
0015 0015
0000 0000 UNRTY (NO RETRY) 0011 0011
001B 001B CK ST (RETRY 1)
0020 0020
0030 0030 CK ST (RETRY 2)
001E OOlE
0010 0010 CK ST (SKIP LOG) 0016 0016
00E7 00E7 CK ST (MC RESET) 0027 0027
0007 0007 KEYS
0015 0015
0000 0000 DBE HARD-HARD
OOlE OOlE
0000 0000 DBE HARD-SOFT
0012 0012
0002 0002 DBE SOFT-SOFT
0021 0021
0002 0002 DBE UNCORRECTED
0017 0017
0000 0000 OBE CORRECTED
0000 0000
0008 0008 TOTAL RETRY
0000 0000
000000 HARDWARE COUNTER .
COMMAND: QEPSl
>PUl
MAN
PUO
MAN
TEST
TEST
012345 LOCAL TOO
CS CONTROL
CS ARRAY 0
CS ARRAY 1
CS ARRAY 2
CS ARRAY 3
IPU DATA FLOW L
IPU DATA FLOW H
IPU SHIFTER
IPU SAR
IPU I-CYCLES
IPU INTRUPT
IPU TIMER
IPU LS/EXT
CL CONTROL 0
CL CONTROL 1
UNSUCCESSFUL I/O
EQU:
OOOB
0010
0015
0019
0010
OOOF
0069
OOOF
0002
OOOB
OOlE
DOlE
OOOC
OOOB
0035
0000
yy/mm/dd hh mm 55
OOOB CH DATA BUFFR
0010 CH CONTROL
0015 CH INTERFACEl
0019 CH INTERFACEO
0010 ST CACHE 0
OOOF ST CACHE 1
0009 ST CACHE 2
OOOF ST CACHE 3
0002 ST CTL/ECCl E
OOOB ST CTL/ECCl 0
DOlE ST BSM/ECC2 E
001E ST BSM/ECC2 0
OOOC ST SAR
OOOB ST KEYS
0035 ST OLAT
0000 SUCCESS. I/O
==>
>CHECK STOP
CSAR: 013A80
>CHECK STOP
CSAR: 018520
370 4381 RC= 5DD218AE 00008000
CK ST (SKIP LOG): The processor was operating with
check control in no log. A machine check occurred during
retry, the .counter was updated but no log was recorded.
CK ST (MC RESET): A machine check occurred during
··processor IML or system reset.
KEYS: A storage key error occurred.
DBE HARD-HARD: A storage double-bit error where
both bits are solid failures.
DBE HARD-SOFT: A storage double-bit error where one
bit is a solid failure and the other bit is an intermittent
failure.
DBE SOFT-SOFT: A storage double-bit error where both
bits fail intermittently.
HARDWARE COUNTER: Records the number of
single-bit main storage errors.
4381
B/M 2676380
e Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
GF025
LOG 060
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000'
"nl,
l'
'I
t,
I
"pH
II
'I'.'
t""""jt!/:!
"";,,W't¥ ""," , ""IM,eiI,.'.'1
WIUM."......'".!.y.".,,,,,,j.i+'di+'+ji
:,.'.!I""+ijt'Y!i"J!!I""iIM~t'ld/t'i,.yMI,'(fn'rJ,tJJWijN\!f"eD'N"'f!!:!UIUI.. uN.j..'P'.S'VH:.tlWf _ _
'.'/, "d&W'
,1/",/
V" "'#"Irii=WftW
Ilmw"m'l'H!!If1zrl'1I
w"ld,fll"
WW':"'I/lb\"Ii*", !J±h!,.w,w
'rlI'I!l"="Mr"
,I I
I,
!
'''"''
+,*,"""i!Ir!r"dI'tt!I Y"
8!!tir,
'Wil",,,,,'" "t
"'4JLtyJ.I!4""U.!IUII!!i'!\lulJi'il',,'" ,I'
1"
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
lOG 065
PU Reconfigurstion Data
•
To display the last 15 reconfiguration logs:
Press MODE SEL.
•
2. Key in aEPR and press ENTER.
0008
0007
0006
0005
0004
0003
0002
STG OBE
SS
Both bits ar~ failing intermittently (soft-soft).
This error is not correctable.
HH
Directory screen (OEPO). Since all processing unit errors
do not result in reconfiguration, all log IDs on the OEPO
screen may not be displayed on thePU Reconfiguration
Data screen.
Both bits are failing all the time (hard-hard).
This error is correctable.
HS
One bit is failing all the time; the other is
failing intermittently (hard-soft). This error is
correctable.
TODC: The time of the failure.
CR
The error is correctable.
Reconfiguration Data: Shows what areas of the
processing unit have been reconfigured because of the
error. The areas that can be reconfigured are:
NC
The error is not correctable.
ERR
A machine check occurred while trying to
analyze an error. The error type was not
determined.
label Identification
LOGID: The same 10 as the Processing Unit logout
CACHE
Cache is reconfigured on a byte basis. If byte four of
cache is bad, byte four is assigned to the backup area
for all cache pages. The reconfigured bytes (0
through 7) are indicated by an X.
•
ID
0
yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
1
yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
1 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
t
yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
0 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
SWAP BUFF. BYTE
CHANNEL
RECONFIG
MUlT.
CACHE
BYTE
CNT. STG
BYTE
CACHE OIR. CONGo Cl
STG. DBE.
coa
TOO: yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
--23-----------X03 Y05
-1-----2/6 20=1
10
SLOT 00
SS NC
ADDR
ADDR
ADDR
ADDR
ADDR
ADDR
ADDR
0017E7CO
00103ECO
00087EOO
00000048
00103AOO
0007ACOO
001FCFCO
If a double-bit error occurs in main storage, the error
type is displayed with the address of the failing
doubleword. The error types are:
If there are more than 15 reconfiguration logs, the
message PRESS ENTER is displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
•
PU.RECONFIGURATION DATA MODEL: 4381
SERIAL: 012345
PU TOO EQUiVALENT
RECONFIGURATION DATA
The channel data buffer has four extra buffers that
can be used for reconfiguration: two extra buffers (X
and Y) for channels 0 through 5 and two extra
buffers (X and Y) for channels 6 through 8. The extra
buffers are shown with the channels assigned to
them.
The PU Reconfiguration Data screen records any
reconfiguration that takes place because of a processing
unit error. Up to thirty reconfiguration logs can be stored.
1.
CDS
NE
•
•
CNT STG
HW MUlT
If the multiply function fails, multiply instructions are
done by microcode.
•
If a part of the cache backup area is bad, the
associated cache directory entry is used to flag the
processor that this area of cache cannot be used. The
cache directory has 32 associated classes (CONG.
Cl) with eight slots each.
==>
Control storage is reconfigured to a 2K backup area
on a byte pair basis. The screen displays the byte pair
that was reconfigured, bit 20, and the address.
No error was found
The error type is displayed to the left if an even
address failed and to the right if an odd address
failed. The sample screen on this page shows a
soft-soft, noncorrectable error for an even address.
CACHE DIR
LATEST LOGID: 0008
COMMAND: QEPR
SWAP BUFF
The swap buffer is reconfigured on a byte pair basis.
The reconfigured bytes (0 through F) are indicated
with an x.
LA TEST LOGID: The last log that required
reconfiguration.
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GF026
I
II
PN 6169383
.60f6
.
EC A20668
I
~.~0~1~O~ct~8~4~~.
__________~________~________-*__________~
LOG 065
----
- - - - - -
0000000000000000000000000000000000
,,, ..,eI_"':';",,',"!!!!'
'f'BW"U';",,'fw 'f'd"!iII""IUM'.""
HI! "il't ·"U"'flIIH'IItr! ..... t1fHr '91"".....111"1],' " '!Ib'U'we.w,.:-It
f'1Ij!f~ l'O'!iN".!('WMW"""
["!"wNW Wr'H!!!N:'lll [fm Vi! "I "d'HliU'bbmW'f ,I, ¥ 1'''·I!!''hlrtn·' Y""I!III,j;!!65'fMf',HMM'VfN!!¥J"U'Nln"'M'';'''dM'!F.e.,p,
t'
wrl':R¥
'WMtMMlm'
'J
'
."
db+'
'd'd
Hlb
,"+
'!
','f"
J
'"1 . Ii ht'l ", , d, ,
1:1 I
'* II!
1·!"~nI" ,II'f' !'.i!!W tb, ,d,!l
"+1"\:/1" '.t!!!'H'I!±t!'" Mil "LI
,!.lIIlY • •l,,'uw!!!5'
11."
L,trl"
'I
re'''''''
',,",i!!!
'I'," '''I!
i!f,". ". . . . ". '
,j
'l.!IhH M '±
'±
I,.,','
rl
t
f , .. ,"
.irlf+l+."i,+,tH!±+t8'tI'!,,! 0"+""" '''HErNe 1....4'*\,' 'r!!.
,j
[
Nt
L
Hilt-Ern*
,II
,j'
hI''Mn !HeM
u+m't-Wwl ,++
%1\;"
+ 'f'" H+'i lid' '(
+
0' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00-0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LOG 075
Channel Interface Control Check (lFCC) Logs
_Two channel IFCC log screens are available:
•
Channel Interface logout Summary
•
Channel Interface logout Detail.
Channel Interface Logout Summary Screen
*ERROR DISPLAYS*
XXY=CHNLXX,L Y
The Channel Interface logout Summary screen displays
the number of Interface Control Check (lFCC) logs taken
for each channel up to eight logs per channel. For
channels with greater than eight logs, 8+ is displayed.
The last channel to have an IFCC is displayed under LAST
IFCC SAVED.
*INTERFACE CONTROL CHECK LOGOUTS*
PU/
CHNL
DXXY DISPLAY
To display the Channel Interface logout Summary screen:
1. Press MODE SEl.
P
PURGE IFCC LOGOUTS
Q.
GENERAL SELECT
z
RTN TO SYSTEM
2. Key in aEI and press ENTER.
Notes:
1. Only channels-which are configured for the processor
LAST PURGE: yy/mm/dd
COMMAND: Q.EI
are displayed on the Channel Interface logout
Summary screen.
...
2.
If a reconfiguration has taken place, the LAST IFCC
SAVED field may point to a channel that is not
displayed on the screen.
3~
If multiple errors occur in a short time span, IFCC
logging can be stopped to 'increase processor speed •
If logging hess been stopped, you can start logging
again by clearing the channel interface logs or by
re-IMLing. The processors must be in instruction
stop while clearing the 10g.''"'lf a processor is in
_hardstop when th~ logs are cleared, logging will not
continue when the systern -~ started again.
•
.
-
_4.
5.
4381
B/M 2676380
I
If·· is displayed in the LAST IFCC SAVED-fjeld~ no ,_
'FCCs have occurred since the~FCC logs were
purged.
If you display one of the Channel Interface Logout
screens (QEI or QEIDxxy) with the system running
and an interface control check occurs, the General
Selection (Q) screen is displayed. (This will occur for
any console function screen.) If IFCCs are occurring
and you want to display a console function screen,
press STOP.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
hh mm
'FCC
LOGGED
LAST
IFCC
SAVED
03
00
02
00
01
00
00
00
00
00
PU/
CHNL
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
IFCC
LOGGED
00
00
00
00
00
00
08+
00
00
==>
To clear the Channel Interface Logout Summary screen:
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
2:
'If either processor is running, press STOP on the
operator console.
3.
Key in QEIP, and press ENTER.
4.
When prompted, key in P and press ENTER again.
The IFCC log screens for all channels are cleared.
MI
I PN 6169384 II EC A20558 -I EC A20559I
&...:;.S8::;,;a:a.,.o;G_F..;::0;.;::3;.;::O_--Io• ..;.1..,;o;.;.,f.,;;;2....._ _...I• • 01 Oct 84 . 03 Dec 84 .
o Copyright IBM Corp. ~1984
LOG 075
f
LOG 080.
Channel Interface Logout Detail Screen
*ERROR LOGOUTS*
*CHANNEL 00 INTERFACE LOGOUTS*
TOO: yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
---ADDR--- -TAGS---BUS-ENGINEERING
CAT
L TYPE DEVA SCHID IN OUT SQ IN OUT CNT NUM
DATA
TOO
1 370X 0233 7777 44 32 11 55
77 FF 55 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 00000000000000
On the Channel Interface Logout Detail Screen, log 1
always contains information about the latest failure. If
there are more than eight logs on the selected channel,
8+ is displayed for the selected -channel on the Channel
Interface Logout Summary Screen. Logs 1 through 4
contain information about the latest failures, and logs 5
through 8 contain information about the first four logs
occurring after the logs were cleared. In this case, log 8
is the first error to occur after the logs were cleared.
To display the Channel Interface Logout Detail screen:
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in OEIDxx and press ENTER. Where xx is the
address of the PU/channel (00 through 08 for
channels on PUO or 10 through 18 for channels on
PU 1) that you want to display.
3.
00
02
44
00
00
04
42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss OEOOF01C20
00
02
44
00
09
09
42 yy/mm/dd hh :mm: ss 2400201C92
4 370
OOOE
****
****
****
00
02
44
00
00
03
42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss OEOOF01C20
5
OOOE ****
00
02
44
00
09
05
42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 2400201C92
****
00
02
44
00
00
02
42 yy/mm/dd hh:mni:ss OEOOF01C20
7 370X 0233 8657
44
32
77
55
77
64
55 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 00000000000000
2 370
OOOE
3 370
OOOE
370
6 370
OOOE
8 370 OOOE **** 00 02 44 00
09 03 42 yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss 2400201C92
TAGIN= REQ OPL DIS AOR SEL STA SRV/DAT TAGOUT= ADR CMD OAT SRV SUP OPL SEL
==>
COMMAND: QEIDOOl
Note: Tags Out gives the tag values before the
interface drivers. The interface lines can be different from
the values of Tags Out if a driver fails.
The abbreviations used for the tag lines are:
ADR
SEL
CMD
SRV
DIS
OAT
OPL
STA
REO
SUP
Address in/out
Select in/out
Command out
Service in/out
Disconnect in
Data in/out
Operational in/out
Status in
Request in
Suppress out
BUS IN:
BUS OUT:
To intensify the tag lines active for a specific failure,
key in OEIDxxy and press ENTER. xx is the same
PU/channel and y is the log number (1 through 8)
from the L field.
c.).
Data on bus-in at the time of failure.
Data on bus-out at the time of failure.
CNT: The number of times the same error occurred
sequentially.
CAT NUM: The microcode catalog number for the error.
For information on catalog numbers, see Volume A06,
"Servjce Aids," "Catalog Numbers (S/370)" or "Catalog
Numbers (S/370XA)."
Note: If the sequence count (SO) contains 68, 6C,or
78, the device address (DEVA) a-nd logical address
(SCHID) are invalid.
TAGS IN: Tag in lines active on the channel at the time
of failure as follows:
Label Identification
,..~
L: The log number.
TYPE: 370 if the device active at the time of failure
Bit:
0
Tag:
REQ
OPL
2
3
4
DIS
ADR
SEL
5
STA
6
SRV/DATA
uses 370 mode; 370X if the device uses 370XA mode.
DEVA: The address of the device the channel was
working with at the time of failure.
7
Not
used
TAGS OUT: Tag out lines active on the channel at the
time of failure as follows:
so:
The microcode sequence count for the error. For
information on sequence counts, see Volume A06,
'·Service Aids," "Catalog Numbers (S/370)" or "Catalog
Numbers (S/370XA)."
Bit:
0
Tag:
Not
used
ADR
r:
2
.J
"T
J
U
"-
7
CMD
OAT
SRV
SUP
OPL
SEL
')
J.
. ENGINEERING DATA: Additional data logged to help
identify the failure. The fields are all one byte long and are
labeled:
Byte Field 10
Note: Tags In gives the tag values after the interface
receivers. The interface lines can be different from the
values of Tags In ifareceiver fails.
SCHID: The operating system's logical device address
(for 370XA mode only).
.Il..
TOO: Time-of-day equivalent of the error if the CNT field
is one; or the time-of-day equivalent for the last error of
the group if the CNT field is greater than one.
OCHSYNCO
1
CHDATAO
2
CHSYNC1
3
CHDATA2
4
CHCMDR
5
CHIMODE (370XA only)
6
VvRKPATH (370XA oniy)
TOO (top line):
Detail screen.
Time you requested the IFCC Logout
TAGIN=.;.TAGOUT= ... (/ine 19): The tag lines active at
the time of failure are intensified on this line for the log 10
you entered.
4381
81M 2676380
I
• Copyright IBM Corp. '984
o
I
ILQi
I
MI
PN 6169384 riCA20558
EC A20559I
&..S;:;.e;::.:g__G~F..;:0;.;:3;.;:0~....L. .::2...;:o~f..;:2:...-_ _-,.
Oct 84 _ 03 Dec 84 .
LOG 080
0 0 0 0 --0--0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (}~-O---O- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0" 0
r:nW!!!ihilli'lfIIfl'ff''''"]'rnI"'w'''H''lfm'''n",'uw''
1'1' ±ZM'i+t
'I"'"
JJ"tW'fIILIIt ...ieftrtwSN".4,'Ll'r'J"W+lttyl'.,t\,[Hizj·d ;llIli)''''''
"","~
(."
b'
!
(tI
/'
N'
{lit
i'%*"±#t'fij'
,·bu'.W·' fiji'.
'"
tlceeN!:ttWt!ttI'
WWfIp/;""e,,;e,p.·'\'+,~' '" . "";f
1 , .. ' ', ... ", ../"1'
••
Voiltfdi±&
".
'M.,'
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
LOG 085
POWER LOGS
Two power error logout screens are available:
•
Power Error Logout Directory
•
Power Error Logout Detail.
·Power Error Logout Directory Screen
the Power Error Logout Directory screen displays the
reference codes and times of the last 16 power logs. Line
00 represents the latest power log.
To display the Power Error Logout Directory screen:
1.
Press MODE SEL.
2.
Key in OEWD and press ENTER.
To clear the Power Error Logout Directory screen:
1.
Key inOEWOP and press ENTER.
2.
When prompted, key in P and press ENTER again.
POWER LOGOUT DIRECTORY
LINE
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
All the Power Error Logout screens are cleared.
4381
B/M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
.GF036
I
II
PN 6169386
. ' ~2
.
EC A2066S1
L.~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~_~
TOOe EQUIVALENT
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
yy/mm/dd
COMMAND:
QEWD
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
hh:mm:ss
CURRENT TODC EQUIVALENT: yy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss
REFERENCE CODE
l1A0920E
11D1600E
1141300E
1101920E
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
TI ME OF LAST PURGE: yy/mm/dd hh :mm: ss
==>
______~________~________~________~
LOG 085
LOG 090
Power Error Logout Detail Screen
Label Identification
The Power Error Logout Detail Screen gives detailed
information about the power system at the time an error
occurs.
POWER LOGOUT xx: The detail logout number you
selected by entering QEWDxx.
Note: Only the last four logs of the Power Error Logout
Summary screen (00 through 03) can be displayed in
detail.
To select the Power Error Logout Detail screen:
1.
Enter QEWDxx; where xx is the selected line number
from the Power Error Logout Summary screen (00
through 03).
t
REFERENCE CODE: The reference code that defines the
power error condition.
TOO: The time of the failure.
CONTROL LATCHES AT TIME OF ERROR: The sequence
of power control latches up to the failure.
POWER ERRORS:
time of failure.
I~~g
It Copyright IBM CcIc'p. 1984
GF035
= llD1350E
TOO
= yy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss
CONTROL LATCHES ON AT TIME OF ERROR:
01)
02)
03)
04)
OS}
PICK K3
PICK K4
-2.2V PS103 START
-1.5V PS10S START
-4.3V PS106 START
06)
07}
oa}
09)
10)
-1.5 PS111 START
-4.3 PS112 START
+5V PS109 START
+5V PS10a START
+6V PS107 START
POWER ERRORS:
+6V PS107 CURRENT LIMIT
The power error(s) detected at the
COMMAND: QEWDOO
4381
B/M 2676380
REFERENCE CODE
POWER LOGOUT: 00
==>
PN 6169385 II- ECA20558 -I
1-_
.20f2
._._0_1_0_c_t_8_4~.~______~~~~__~~______~____~__~.
I
LOG 090
() 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
•• 00000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 001
SYSTEM TEST
Contents
System Test/4381 ••••••••••••••••• SYS TEST 015
Introduction ••........••..•••..••...
Wait State Codes •...••...•........
ST4381 and ST4381 XA Run Flowchart ••..•
Channel-ta-Channel .••••.••••••.•..•
3890 Initialization Procedures .••••.••.
Using MVS Utilities to Copy System
Test/4381XA .......•••.•••••••••••
SYS TEST 015
SYS TEST 015
SYS TEST 020
SYS TEST 025
SYS TEST 025
SYS TEST 030
4300-FRIEND ••••••••••••••••••••• SYS TESt 036
Introduction to 4300-FRIEND ..••.•••..•• SYS TEST 035
How to Use 4300-FRIEND ...••..••.••••. SYS TEST 035
Loading 4300-FRIEND from the DIAG1
Diskette ••..•.....•.....••.•...• SYS TEST 035
Overview on Making a CCW Chain .•••.. SYS TEST 040
Specifying a Single CCW Chain •.•••.•. SYs TEST 040
Advanced Capabilities of 4300-FRIEND •.••• SYS TEST 045
Specifying Multiple CCW Chains •••••• ~. SYS TEST 045
Symbolic I/O Areas ••••..••••••••..• SYS TEST 045
CCW Chain Sequence Control and .Delay
Between CCW Chains .•..•••••••••• SYS TEST 050
Data Compare ••..•••••...•.••.•.•• SYS TEST 050
Increase/Decrease Counter ••.•.••...•• SYSTEST 050
Data Ripple/Random ••..•.••.••....• SYS TEST 055
Predefined CCW Chains ....••...•..•• SYS TEST 055
Storage Protection Key Modification •..•. SYS TEST 055
Trace Function .•.••.....•..•..•.•. SYS TEST 055
Special Storage Areas .••.....••..•.•••• SYS TEST 060
Unit Control Block (UCB) .•••..•••...• SYS TEST 060
Information Requested by 4300-FRIENO •.•. SYS TEST 065
4300-FRIEND Messages .•.•..•••...••. SYS TEST 075
Status and Operator Messages .•••...•• SYS TEST 075
Error Messages ...••..••••..•••..•. SYS TEST 080
4300-FRIEND Commands •••..••...••.. SYS TEST 095
Changing Existing CCW Chains •.••.•.•• SYS TEST 115
Change Commands .•. ~ . • • . . . • • . . . •. SYS TEST 125
CCW Chain Execution Control ........•. SYS TEST 125
CCW COMMANDS .......•....•...• ;. SYS TEST 130
General CCWs .......••...••...... SYS TEST 130
Disk CCWs •..........•...•....... SYS TEST 130
Fixed Block (FB) Commands - 3370 •.... SYS TEST 135
Tape CCWs .;.................... SYS TEST 135
Card Reader/Punch CCWs ...•••..•... SYS TEST 140
Printer CCWs ...•.•..•.....•..•... SYS TEST 140
CRT an~ Hard-Copy Printer CCWs
(3277/3278-3287) ..•...•.•.••... SYS TEST 140
Teleprocessing CCWs (270x, 370x) •...• SYS TEST 145
CCW FLAGS •....•.•..••.••.•...•... SYS TEST 150
CCW COMMAND MODIFIERS •.••.. . • • . .. SYS TEST 150
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG006
I
II
PN 6169386
.10f1
.
EC A20558
I
~.~O~1~O~ct~8~4~~.
____________________~________~__________
SYS TEST 001
----
--------
----------------
0000000000000000000000000000000000
wl
',/II'H±oi :
I" r
~'! 1+ *~I4,N"y"
"1=8' 'dtJ!.lt'rIMbI' . H'"HltHK' Lh' I. 1'/
I.bIII)!,'!
",','wtr
',£"'zi& ,
'Hel'e u'!
Ifl'
uti"
'Nt t'
"l,
"i"d·IJ' "I m!!tjj+-,LllWj'tl1l"li!. "'W1r!,ltlldlH'IHI!!l!,IMI'MlII'jf" 'jr" ,n",!'", !fJ!Jlffl"'MI!!V ",(,rl'l III ··""".I'.ea'Wl/"" ' thriHns'wPtI ';Mft\li.......'.......!II·W• •fflW'.Wr'r.''H ""f'HWddWM'"W"
,,,,] IV"i.:.. ...... 'MdPN"fHlli'W'M!'.Htlll.!o!!!'r,'''.l 'nrU&\iff'} !
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 015
System Test/4381
Introduction
Wait State Codes
Reasons to Run ST4381
To Run ST4381, You Need:
There are two versions of System Test for the 4381.
Use System Test/4381 (abbreviation: ST4381) if your
system runs in 370 mode only. Use System
Test/4381XA (abbreviation: ST4381XA) if your system
runs in 370XA mode or in both 370 and 370XA modes.
To display the wait state codes, press the STOP key. The
code is displayed in the status area of the screen.
•
To test the I/O configuration
•
A tape load device
•
After you install an EC
•
An operator console
•
To attempt to repeat an earlier failure
•
Two megabytes of processor storage
OODEADO 1: An irrecoverable error on the operator
console is preventing communication with the operator.
More information maybe available on the printer.
•
To copy your ST4381 tape.
•
The I/O devices to be tested
Data Protection
•
An output printer (recommended).
Use the flowcharts on this page and page
SYS TEST 020 for general information on running either
ST4381 or ST4381 XA. The operation of either System
Test is the same.
OODEAD02: An irrecoverable error occurred on the
ST4381 load device. More information may be available
on the 'printer.
Warning:
Getting Ready To Run ST 4381
This page provides information about System Test. If
you are not sure how to begin, read this page. Be
especially attentive to the information about protecting
customer data.
OODEAD03: The ST4381 control program was
damaged by an unexpected storage alteration or program
interrupt, or a tape for 5/370 mode (ST4381) was IPled
in S/370XA mode.
To run System Test, go to page SY5 TEST 020.
OODEAD04: Unrequested continuous interrupts are
occurring when they are masked off. More information
may be available on the printer or the operator console.
OOOOFF01: Enabled wait state at IPl time; ST4381 is
waiting for the ENTER key to be pressed.
Note: ST4381 XA is a limited use licensed maintenance
program.
For information on copying ST4381XA using MVS
utilities, see page SYS TEST 030.
Magnetic Tape Drives
•
•
•
OODEAD05: An irrecoverable error occurred while
changing processing units for an I/O operation.
Note: For more information on running System Test,
see the information shipped with your 5T4381 tape and
the information printed on the system printer after you
IPL.
Have You Protected The Customer's Data?
•
OOEEEEEE: System Test is terminated in response to
the Terminate command. This is the normal end of test.
/'
Do not test a tape drive if it is shared by another
system; always make it not available. Directions on
how to so this are displayed, when needed, on the
screen.
Always install a scratch (spare) tape on the tape
drives being tested.
1.
Note: An IPl from PU 1 in 370 mode requires a
channel attached display console.
2.
Ready your IPL device.
3.
Display the Program Load (Ql)screen, and ensure:
•
Always remove a customer's tape from a tape drive if
you are not sure of its safety.
Write a tape mark on all blank tapes (the screen gives
directions when needed).
.
Do not change the switches on tape control units
with the communicator feature after the start of
preconfiguration.
,
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
I
II
I.
Install a CE pack on DASD with removable packs for
level 1 testing.
•
U IPl UNIT specifies the ST4381 load device.
•
The correct processor is selected.
To select the IPL processor key QTO for PUO or
QT1 for PU1.
4.
Display the QFO screen, and ensure that the console
is in DISPLAY mode and that the display consoles
have assigned addresses.
5.
Make ready the devices to be tested.
Note: The hard copy output printer must be
connected to the same processor used for IPL.
6.
Go to the next page.
I
iVIl
PN 6169387
EC A20558
EC A20560
L.=S..::.e.:l-gG=G;,;;;;O...;.1..::.0_--I-...;;.1...;:o:;.;;.f...;.2~_ _--,.. 01 Oct 84 . '8 Feb 85 .
«l Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
.
Do not test a DASD device that is shared. This slows
system operation and may stop (lock out) the
customer's processor. To prevent this, either make
the shared DASD not available (drop it) or vary it to
Test level 2 (the screen gives you directions when
they are needed).
The correct mode is specified (5/370 or
S/370XA).
To change the mode, display the QU screen, and
select the correct mode.
DASD Devices
•
Ensure that the processor is IMled.
SYS TEST 015
SYS TEST 020
ST4381 and ST4381XA Run Flowchart
From previous column
From previous column
~
~
to ---- This starts loading ST4381
and displays the ST4381
logo on all available
native display consoles
(for PUO only).
No
Press ENTER to display
the logo on the display
console you want to use.
If you used PUI to IPL,
press ENTER on the channel
attached display console.
Press ENTER to
load the ST4381
control program.
Do you really
mean no?
No
.>----.
Follow the
directions on
the screen.
Enter the
following when
prompted.
Output address
Density.
When prompted,
set time-of-day
clock.
Preconfiguration ends and
configuration
starts.
A table of the
available
devices is
displayed.
Enter S to test
the 4381 and I/O,
~----------------. or enter C to
copy your ST4381
tape.
ST4381 tape is
copied and the
selection menu
is d i sp layed.
Note: Press RESTORE
on all line printers.
(Channel 9 causes a
unit check during
configuration.)
1. I f you are test i n9
channel-to-channel,
see "Channel-to-Channel"
on page SYS TEST 025.
2. If you are testing a
3890, see "3890
Initialization Procedure"
on page SYS TEST 025.
Vary the test
leve Is.
' - -_ _ 1 _ _---'
When prompted,
set time-of-day
clock.
I
I
Preconflguration
starts; a list
of system I/O
devices displays.
Note: Processor tests
start.
BE SURE TO DROP
Yes
ALL SHARED
>-----+1 DEVICES.
Follow the
directions on
the screen.
We recommend
you assi gn an
output printer.
This supplies a
detailed copy
of ST4381 error
information.
Yes
,
To next column
Yes
No
~--.To
4381-3
81M 2676380
Notes:
Configuration
ends. The I/O
tests start to
run.
To display test
status, press
the ENTER key.
Activity Screen
is displayed •
Enter C for
a list of
commands.
Follow the
directions on
the screen.
Write tape
ma r k ( s ). F0 1 1ow
the directions
. on the screen.
TEST LEtEL 0
Seek/read on DASD.
Buffer test on printers.
Read/write on tapes
and displays.
Read/write on TP
(wrap only).
CTCA not tested.
Sense/NOP test for
all.other devices.
TEST LEVEL 1
Install CE pack/cell
for level 1 testing.
Seek/read/write on DASD.
Print test on printers
(load the UCS code).
Reads/punches cards.
CTCA is tested.
All other devices run
the same as level O.
TEST LEVEL 2
Testing is suppressed.
Enter T. The
ST4381 tests
stop running.
next column
MI
I PN 6169387 II EC A20558I EC A20560 .1
I S=..;e=9a......;;:;G;..;:;G;.;;.0..;;..1O=--.---&._=2..;;o..;;..f=2_ _----'_ _ 01 Oct 84 _ 1 8 Feb 85 _
.....
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
SYS TEST 020
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
1
'"",;,=1,1"
,
I"
'L4..
.,' \'
'f""lbt'!I'u "
,..,..........
'I+'
JJ
"
¥'H "
ftiI'"
"lIE'
1!l 1h"N'd""
"",
!'
'JI
J'lf
';"
r
lt'lt!
"
"I' ' II ' ~
, M, b
"!
""""t' , "'ilSw
'w
U
'4.1",,')'*#'t..
"f".'#,t
W"'Mr"
.
t
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 025
Channe/-to-Channel
.3890 Initialization Procedures
No testing is done on a channel-ta-channel adapter or a
3088 unless they are varied to level 1 after configuration.
Also, either run in wrap mode or run one of the following
programs on the other CPU at the same time:
To test a 3890 Document Processor with System
Test/4381 or System Test/4381XA, do the following:
ST4300
ST370
NST-2
System Test/4381
System Test/4381XA.
:~~ 2676380 I~~g GG016
o Copyright IBM Corp.
1984
1.
Ensure that functional coreload -FAO is loaded and
that the test routine switch is set to image run.
2. Set all features to off using the operator panel. For
details, see the 3890 Document Processor
Operator's Guide.
3.
Install a jumper from 01B-C3J06 to ground. (This
prevents time-outs.>
4~
Set the On Line switch to On Line and press START.
5.
After starting System Test/4381, make the 3890
not ready.
6.
Vary the 3890 to test level 1.
7.
Set the Test Routine switch to Process.
8.
Place test documents in the hopper and press
START. Testing of the 3890 begins.
9.
Remove the time-out jumper Oat the end of the test.
SYSTEST 025
SYSTEST 030
Use the following JCL for step 3.
Using MVS Utilities to Copy System
Test/4381XA
Note: All lowercase characters are installation
dependent and must be specified by the user.
Copy System Test/4381XA to one of the following Direct
Access Storage Devices (DASD):
//WRIPL
/ISTEP3
/ISYSPRINT
/IIPLTEXT
JOB parameters
EXEC PGM=ICKDSF
DO
SYSOUT=A
DD
DISP=SHR,DSN=S80.SYSM(UIPLDR),
II
VOL=SER=volid,UNIT=disk
/1580
DO
DISP=OLD,UNIT=disk,VOL=SER=volid
//SYSIN
DO
*
REFORMAT DDNAME(S80) VERIFY(volid) IPLDD(IPLTEXT)
1*
3330
3340
3350
3375
3380.
To copy System Test/4381XA:
1.
Delete the System Test/4381XA data set if it exists.
2.
Copy System Test/4381/XA to DASD.
3.
Create an IPL record.
Use the following JCL for steps 1 and 2.
Note: All lowercase characters are installation
dependent and mustbe specified by the user.
//COPYST
//STEPl
IIDELOSN
I/STEP2
IISYSLIN
II
IISYSLOUT
IITAPEFILE
II
II
II
IIDISKFILE
IISYSPRINT
JOB parameters
EXEC PGH=IEFBR14
DO
DSN=S80.SYSM,VOL=SER=volid,UNIT=disk,DISP=(OLD,DELETE)
EXEC PGH=LOAOER,REGION=1024K
DO
VOL=SER=S80TAP,UNfT=tape,LABEL=(3,NL)~
. .
OCB=(LRECL-aO,BLKSIZE=2000,RECFM-FB,DEN=3),DISP-OLD
DO
SYSOUT=A
DO
VOL=REF=*.SYSLIN,UNIT-AFF-SVSLIN,LABEL=(,NL),
DCB-DEN-3,DISP=OLO
DO . OSN=S80.SVSM,VOL=REF=*.OEL.OELDSN,UNIT-disk
OlSP=(,KEEP),SPACE=(2000,(3420,O,100)"CONTIG),
DCB={LRECL=aO,BLKSIZE-2000,RECFM=FB)
..
DO
SYSOUT-A
Notes:
1.
Correct execution results in a return code of O. If the
return code is not 0, refer to the SYSPR INT output
for the error messages.
2.
System Test/4381XA requires a new or empty data
set. If the data set already exists, delete it and
reallocate it prior to the copy.
3.
The copy program requires a 100K region.
4381
81M 2676380
I
MI··'
I
PN 6169388
II
EC A20558
I
I
I·
~S~.~g~G=G~01~5~~.2~of~2~__~.L.~O~1~O~d~84~•.________~.~______~.________~__----~
C Cclpyright IBM Corp. 1984
. SYS TEST 030
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 035
4300-FRIEND
Introduction to 4300-FRIEND
How to Use 4300-FRIEND
11. Key QZ next to COMMAND, press the ENTER key.
430()"FRIEND (Fast Running Interpreter Enabling Natural
Diagnosis) is a test tool that lets you analyze complex I/O
problems. It is a stand-alone, offline program that
requires 64K bytes of customer storage and a display
console.
Loading 4300-FRIEND from the DIAG1
12. Press the ENTER key twice (4300-FRIEND starts
running).
430()"FRIEND supports all channel command words
(CCWs) for most S/370 files, drums, tapes, card
reader/punch units, and teleprocessing devices. You·
enter each channel command from the console keyboard.
Channel programs for up to 99 devices can be entered
and run at the same time.
Diskette
13. Enter your replies to the 430Q-FRIEND requests.
. Note: To run 4300-FRIEND to Processing Unit 1 (PU 1)
requires a display console attached to channel 0 on PU 1.
14. Press the ENTER key on the display console that you
want to use to control 4300-FRIEND.
To load 4300-FRIEND fromthe DrAG 1 diskette:
1.
Do a system IML (5/370 mode).
Note: If your normal console keyboard language is
Japanese/Katakana, use the OFL screen to select
U.S. English before running 4300-FRIEND. For
information on changing console keyboard language,
see Volume A06, "(QFL~ Language Configuration. "
If 4300-FRIEND needs any additional information about
the command (such as record numbers or data length),
the program asks you for the information.
2.
Key QCLEAR next to COMMAND, press the ENTER
key.
3.
Key QFO next to COMMAND and then key N next to
PRT/KYBD, press the ENTER key.
4.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
5.
Key either QTO or aT1 next to COMMAND to select
PUO or PU1, press the ENTER key.
6.
Key QLKE next to COMMAND, press the ENTER key.
Message MOUNT PROPER DISK, ENTER is
displayed.
7.
Remove the FUNC2 diskette from diskette drive 2,
insert the DIAG 1 diskette into diskette drive 2, and
press the ENTER key. After 4300-FRIEND is loaded,
message REMOUNT FUNCTIONAL DISK is displayed.
8.
Remove the DIAG 1 diskette and insert the FU NC2
diskette into diskette drive 2.
9.
Press the MODE SEL key on the system display
console (the keyboard near the OCP).
10. Key ORES next to COMMAND, press the ENTER key.
15. Enter your replies to the 4300-FRIEND requests on
the display console you selected in step 14. (You
can now use the system display console for normal
manual system console functions while the display
console you selected in step 14 is controlling
43OQ-FRIEND.)
The following lists 430Q-FRIEND requests. For details
about these requests, see "Information Requested by
4300-FRIEND."
ADR=
ATT=
BBCCHH=
BL OFFS=
BLCK CNT=
CMD=
CYL=
DATA=
DEV=
DEV ADDR=
DEV TYPE=
DL=
HARD COPY(Y IN)=
HD=
IDAWS IN HEX=
KEY=
KL=
LOG END=
LOG START=
MASK==
MASK BYTE=
MLCCCBBCCHHRDDS=
MODE (Be/EC)=
MODE CMD=
MODEL=
NUMBER OF TIMES=
OP BYTE=
PHY START==
RCD NO=
REPL CNT=
SD=
SEC ~RINTER ADDR=
SECOND SD=
THIRD 50=
Wcc=
The following lists 4300-FRIEND commands. For details
about these commands, see "4300-FRIEND
Commands."
$$1
$$nnn,*
$*=hh
10r11 .
ACTIVATE
ADD
ALARM
ALTER KEY
ALTER nnn
BMPX
BTS
BUILD
CCW
CHANGE KEYBOARD
CHANGE nnn
CLEAR
CLEAR$c
COMPARE
CON FIG
CONNECT
COpy
COUNTER
CREATE
CSW=xxxx
DATA DUMP
DECREASE
DEVICE=
DISCONNECT
DISPLAY
DUMP $
DUMP KEY
DUMP
DUMPT
EXCLRIO
EXHDV
EXHIO
EX STIDC
EXTCH
EXTIO
FLAG
GO
HALT
HELP
I
INCREASE
INT
KEY CAW
KEYCCW
KEY DATA
KEY IDA
LIST
LOOP
NO ALARM
NO BMPX
NO COMPARE
NO DATA DUMP
NO DECREASE
NO HALT
NO INCREASE
NOINT
NO TEST I/O
NO TIME DELAY
NO WAIT
POINTER CCW
POINTER DATA
POINTER IDA
PRINT SENSE
PSW
QUIT
REMOVE
REP
RESET
RETURN
SCOPE
SENSE
SET FB
SIZE
START READER
STATUS
STOP
SUBST
TEST I/O
TIME DELAY
TRACE
WAIT
Note: If you are using a single console system, do
steps 11 through 13; if you are using a multiple
console system, skip steps 11 through 13, and go to
step 14.
4381
B/M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
GG020
SYSTEST 035
SYS TEST 040
Summary on Making a CCW Chain
Examples of a Single CCW Chain
Restrictions
To make a CCW chain:
The following example instructs 4300-FRIEND to first
seek cylinder 5, head 5 and then to seek cylinder 198,
head 9 on device address 260.
4300-FRIEND inserts TIC *-8 or SET FILE MASK CCWs
if you leave it out. This can cause a not valid CCW chain.
•
Respond to 4300-FRIEND requests (see
"Information Requested by 4300-FRIEND").
Example of an Invalid CCW Chain
•
Respond to 4300-FRIEND messages (see
"4300-FRIE,ND Messages").
•
Optionally specify a predefined CCW chain (see
"Predefined CCWChains").
DEV=DEVICE ADDRESS=260 (Enter address)
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
seek
(Enter command)
CYL=5
(Enter number)
HD =5
(Enter number)
seek
(Enter command)
198
(Enter number)
HD =9
(Enter number)
go
reset
cn=
•
Specify 4300-FRIEND commands (see
"4300-FRIEND Commands").
•
Specify CCW commands (see "CCW Commands").
Specifying 8 Single .CCW Chsln
To specify a single CCW chain:
1.
Specify the device address of the unit you want to
test when 4300-FRIEND asks for it (DEV= ).
2.
When COMMAND appears on line 20, key a CCW
command and press the ENTER key.
3.
Key any additional information 430o-FRIEND
requests.
4.
After you have specified the entire CCW chain, key
GO and press the ENTER key. The device performs
the operation you requested.
5.
If you want to specify another CCW chain, press the
REQUEST key.
6.
When the PROCEED indicator turns on, key RESET or
The next example instructs 4300-FRIEND to read one
block of data from a fixed block device (3370).
DEV= 240
1/0= 438100-337000
CHAR= 3008210102 .••
set fb
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
def ext
MASK BYTE= cO
PHY.START=
LOG.START=
LOG .. END = 31
locate
OPe BYTE = 06
REPL. CNT=
BLCK. CNT= 32
BL. OFFS.=
. read fb
Dl= 16384
loop 1
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT 0240
seek
CYL= 5
HD== 1
search ha eq
write rO
N 10
SET FILE MASK INSERTED
(Placed before the WRITE RO)
KL=O
DL= 100
The above CCW chain is not valid because the write rO
command is not directly preceded by a SEARCH CCW.
You must specify a Set File Mask before the search ha
command.
I.
7.
Go to step 1, and specify the new CCW chain.
4381
81M 2676380
I~~9
4D Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG020
I
PN 6169389
.2m2
II
EC A20558·1
.L.~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~L.
________~________~__________________~
SVS TEST 040
OOOOO()OOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
. " ·""t' ,#
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 045
Advanced Capabilities of 4300-FRIEND
Example of a Multiple CCW Chain
Symbolic I/O Areas
Specifying Multiple CCW Chains
This example assumes that you are overlapping a seek
operation on devices 160 and 161.
You can reference the data address specified in one CCW
from another CCW by using 4300-FRIEND. This lets you
first read and then write the same data or vice versa.
Also, by using the same area to read into and write from,
you can conserve storage space.
To enter (and run) multiple CCW chains for the same or
different devices, do the following:
1.
Perform steps 1 through 4 in "Specifying a Single
CCW Chain." (After you key GO and press the
ENTER key, the first CCW chain begins to run.)
2.
Press the ENTER key again (While the first CCW
chain is running).
3.
DEV= 160
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
seek
CYL=O
HD == 1
seek
CYL= 100
HD == 2
go (First CCW chain starts to run)
(Press ENTER)
When PROCEED appears on line 20, key dev= xxx
(xxx is a device address). You can enter the
previously-specified device address or a different
device address.
4.
Do not key RESET.
5.
Enter the CCW chain to be overlapped.
dev=161
(Enter address for next CCW chain)
seek
CYl= 100
HD == 3
seek
CYL= 200
HD == 4
go
(Both CCW chains run)
6. Key GO.
7.
Repeat steps 2 through 6 to specify another CCW
chain.
To change one or more of the CCW chains in a multiple
CCW chain, see "Changing CCW Chains."
For disk files, the symbolic I/O area applies only to the
data area of any count-key-data (CKD) or key-data
command. 4300-FRIEND uses data chaining to get the
data field of these commands.
To use symbolic I/O areas:
1. Key the normal READ, WRITE, or PRINT commands
followed by a comma and into $x if the command is
an input command, or from $x if the command is an
output command.
x can be any keyboard character, but we recommend
you use characters a to z for easy cross-referencing.
Characters entered in lowercase are converted to
uppercase.
2.
If your data is in character and hex format, use the
CREATE/BUILD command. This command builds a
symbolic output area that can be used by following
write-type CCW commands.
3.
If this is the first time you use a symbolic character,
4300-FRIEND asks for the more information. If you
have already used the symbolic character and have
not issued a RESET command, you are not asked for
the data length or the data field. (The Symbolic
Table generated by 4300-FRIEND contains the
corresponding data address and the implied length of
the data area.)
To get a list of the assigned symbolic names, use the
DUMP$ command.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
I
II
DEV= 160
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
seek
CYL== 5
HD = 1
set file mask
MASK== cO
search ha eq
tic *-8
write rO,from$a
($a points to data area)
KEY=
DATA= 500xfOfO (1000 bytes of data)
write count key data,from $a
ReO NO.= 1
KEY=
go
Example 2: Using the CREATE I BUILD Command
DEV= 184
create 50,$b
(Creates area $b with length 50)
DATA= x02
OATA= 4cABCDEFGH 1234
DATA=x03
DATA= (Press ENTER to end requests)
write,from$b
read backwards
read into $a
DL= 50
1-compare $a,$b
(Specifies data compare)
go
(Press ENTER)
counter
(Prints loop counter)
01-UNIT=0184, LOOP= 0000000/0001585-A
go
(Restarts operation)
I
MI
PN 6169390
EC A20558
EC A20560 \.
....;:;.Se~g:::L...,.;G:;.;G::;.O;;.:2:;.;5~.........-...;1;....o.;;;.;f;....4.;..-._ _--'.. 01 Oct 84 • 18 Feb 85 .
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
Example 1: Writing Disk Records 0 and 1 from Same
Area
SYS TEST 045
SYS TEST 050
CCW Chain Sequence Control and Delay
Between CCW Chsins
The WAIT command causes 4300-FRIEND to wait until a
CCW chain routine completes (device-end interrupt)
before the next chain starts. You usually use the WAIT
command with symbolic I/O areas when you are writing
data that was read by a previous CCW chain. This
ensures that all the data is read before the write CCW is
run. You can also use the WAIT command for a single
CCWchain.
To use WAIT:
Data Compare
Example 2: Write and Read a Tape Record
Example 1: Record Counter for Tape
Specify the COMPARE command anytime during the entry
of a CCW chain. If you are using symbolic I/O areas, you
must have already defined them. 4300-FRIEND
compares the areas when it completes each CCW chain.
In this example of the COMPARE command, dOOO and
d3e9 are the addresses of the areas you want to
compare. (To obtain the addresses, use the CCW
command.) 1000 is the number of bytes to be
compared in decimal or hex.
DEV= 1S0
write,from $a
DATA= 1ooc1234567890
(See data pointer address
on the status line or enter
STATUS command .... C= OOAOOS,
1 0= 0003ES, 1 I.... ..
To use last 4 bytes of write
data field as counter, subtract
4 from (D) data pointer.)
increase 4,d3e4, 1,0, 1
loop 1000
(Writes 1000 records)
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT 01 SO
1-stop
(Stops first CCW chain)
(New UCB)
dev... 1S0
rewind
loop 1
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT 01S0
rep 1
read, into $b
DL= 1000
increase 4,d3e4, 1 /0, 1
(Updates old $a area)
compare $a,$b
(Compares record to expected one)
loop 1000
go
Example 1: Write and Read Disk Record Zero
In this example of the COMPARE command, $r and $5
are any previously defined symbolic I/O areas. If you do
not specify a compare length, 4300-FRIEND uses the
length of the operand r for the amount of data to be
compared.
1. Specify WAIT anytime during the entry of the CCW
chain. '
2. After you key WAIT in the last CCW chain, key GO.
Example 1: Tape to Printer (80/80 List)
DEV- 281
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
read,into$a
DL= 80
wait
OEV= e
print,from$a
csw=01
sns=01
wait
go
Example 2: WAIT with Time Delay (Single CCW
Chain)
reset
DEV= 1S5
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
write
OATA= 100xfOfO
wait 500 (Causes delay of 500 ms
after device end before
starting the next write CCW)
go
DEV- 161
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
seek
CYL- xaO
HD-7
write ha (Writes home address
from seek argument)
SET FILE MASK INSERTED
write rO,from$r
KEY=
DATA= 1800xfOfO
read rO,i,1to$s
KL=
DL= 3600
compare $r,$s (Uses length of $r)
go
reset
DEV- 180
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
write
DATA- 1000xff
backspace
read
OL- 1000
ccw
(Displays a CCW chain)
1-00AOOO 01 000000 6000 03E8
2-00AOOS 27 0003ES 6000 0001
3-00A010 02 00D3E9 6000 03ES
compare dOOO,d3e9, 1000
(Compares data addresses)
go
Increase / Decrease Counter
Use the INCREASE or DECREASE command to increase
or decrease a one- to four-byte field by a specified
amount after each running of the CCW chain. You can
use this function to change seek arguments in the data
field of a CCW chain or to step a hex record counter.
Example 2: Change a Device Address
This example shows how to test a certain range of device
addresses for availability (see also CONFIG command).
OEV= 0
sense device,into$x
list ... 1 (Gets UCB address)
01-UNIT= 0000/ UCS= 000000, FL=0019
OOAOOO E4 000000 6000 0007
increase 2,dOOOO,1 ,xff,O
(Changes device address from
X'OOO' to X'OFF')
data dump$x, *
(Dumps result of sense I/O)
go
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I&l Copyright IBM Corp, 1984
SYS
TEST 050
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
l'
,1111
I!
I
_'b
~"r1'It!W'!t7t4rlH+'
0000000000000000000000000 008000000
SYS TEST 055
Data Ripple/Random
Predefined CCW Chains
Example 1: Load 1403/3203 with peS-AN Image
RIPPLE and RANDOM are CCW command modifiers that
you can specify with a CCW command. If you specify
RIPPLE or RANDOM, 4300-FRIEND searches for all
CCWs to be rippled or randomized in the CCW chain and
either ripples (moves the data pattern one byte to the left)
or generates a random data pattern at each completion of
the CCW chain. Random data is generated four bytes at
a time, and data is rippled in blocks of 256 bytes.
SEARCH, WRITE HA, and the count field of WRITE
COUNT KEY DATA CCWs are bypassed.
Specify $$xxx to use the predefined CCW chains (and
data strings) provided by 4300-FRIEND. To display the
available CCW chains, key $$7.
DEV= OOe
$$010
(Loads 4 UCS images
into symbolic area)
$$004
(Loads UCS buffer with PCS-AN image)
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT OOOE
You may need to specify a RESET command or the device
address (DEV=cuu) before using a predefined CCW chain.
In some cases, the device address is fixed, and you must
change it with the n-DEV=cuu or SUBcuu,nnn command.
The predefined chains are:
$$001
$$002
Restrictions: Do not use RIPPLE or RANDOM with
indirect data addressing (IDA) or with WRITE SPECIAL
COUNT KEY DATA CCWs.
$$010
Example 1: Write Random Data on Disk
DEV= 161
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
seek
CYL= 5
HD = 1
set mask
MASK= cO
write ha
write rO,random
KEY=
DATA= 3600xff (Data used for first
. record and establishes data length)
read ha (Verifies home address)
read rO (Verifies record zero written)
KL= 0
DL= 3600
go
$$101
$$102
$$103
$$104
$$110
$$111
$$119
$$5nn
$$500
$$501
$$510
$$511
$$520
$$521
Example 2: Ripple Data on Printer
reset
DEV= e
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
space 1,ripple
DATA= 4cABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
csw=0100
loop
NUMBER OF TIMES= 500
go
Card to Printer (OOC/OOE)
Sets Tape to 1600 BPI (181) and Copies Tape
to Tape (180/181)
Defines four UCS images for symbolic data
areas $A, $H, $1, and $2. $A = AN-train, $H
= HN-train, $1 = PCS-AN train, $2 = PCS-HN
train. (Use Examples 1 and 2 below as a guide
in the use of $$010.)
3287 Ripple Print 1 (specify DEV= ... before).
3287 Ripple Print 2 (specify DEV= ... before).
3287 Color Print (specify DEV= ... before).
3287 Color Print of programmed symbols
(specify DEV= ... before}.
327x Display/read (specify DEV= ... before).
Two SIOs are used with increments on the
screen buffer addresses, and the read data is
compared.
3278 Display/read (specify DEV= ... before).
Same as 110, but with a single SIO.
327x Display with Increment (specify DEV= ...
before).
Type RESET before $$50n commands, and
specify the device address DEV= ...
3310 - CE Track Initialization
3310 - Read FB with Increment
3370 - CE Track Initialization
3370 - Read FB with Increment
3370 - Verify CE Track
3370 - Repair
Note: The 3262 Models 3 and 13 also run the 3287
CCW chains.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
co Copyright IBM Corp.
I
II
I
DEV= ODe
$$010
gtld (Needed for 1403 only)
load ucs,from $x
(x is either A (AN),
H (HN), or 2 (PCS-HN))
loop 1
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT OOOE
Example 3: Ripple Print Using the AN Image
This example assumes that you have loaded the UCS
buffer with the AN image (see Example 2 above).
DEV= 2e
$$010
(Gets train data images)
print, from$a,r1pple
(Ripples AN-train image)
csw=O 1
(Masks unit exception)
sns=O 1
(Masks sense X'O 1')
loop 100 (Do 100 times)
go
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT 002E
Storage Protection Key Modification
Use the KEY CAW, KEY CCW, KEY DATA, KEY IDA,
DUMP KEY, and ALTER KEY commands to display or
modify the storage keys of the different storage areas
used for CCW chains. Initially, and after a RESET
command, all areas are storage protected with key one
( 1). The current assignments are displayed on line 20 or
after the STATUS command.
You can dump or alter the storage keys of any area with
the DUMP KEY or ALTER KEY commands. You can alter
the special areas for CCWs, data, and IDAW with the
KEY CCW= , KEY DATA= , or KEY IDA= commands.
You can display for each CCW chain the key used for the
CAW with
Trace Function
Use the TRACE command to make a trace table in
storage of all SIOs issued for, and all interrupts received
from, the test devices during the running of the CCW
chains. You can use the TRACE command instead of the
GO command. If you specify the TRACE, * command, all
SIOs, TIOs, and HIOs are traced, including those for the
operator console and the secondary printer. You can
restrict the trace to one device by specifying a device
address with the TRACE command. The trace table start
address is stored at location X'040C'; the current trace
table pointer is stored at address X'0414'. Use the
DUMP function after the trace loop is finished (or the
running is stopped).
Example:
dump12,40c
00040C 000D2000000D3F70 OOOD28FO
The trace function stores trace information in 16-byte
records.
The CPU timer value stored in the trace entry represents
bytes 3 to 5 of the doubleword binary counter. The last
digit of the stored value is decremented every 16
microseconds.
The one-byte repetition counter is incremented if identical
trace entries (except the time value) are stored in
sequence. The first entry isstored and all others are
ignored.
An entry of 16 bytes containing all X'FF' indicates the
end of the current trace area. If the trace reaches the last
trace area entry, the trace again uses the first entry and
all following. You can display the last trace entries or the
complete trace table with the DUMP command; for
example, DUMP x300,d20eO. The DUMPT command
automatically displays the last trace entries (up to a
maximum of 36).
Because the same storage area is used for predefined
chains, these chains (command $$nnn) are destroyed
after a trace run as well as the HELP command text.
I
, MI
PN 6169390
EC A20558
EC A20560
L=.S=.;eg:L...:G::.;G::.0:.:2:.:5::"'---I...:3~o::.;f:...4':'-_ _---i• • 01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85 .
1984
Example 2: Load 1403/3203 with AN, HN. or
PCS-HN image
the CCW= or LIST = commands in the third flag digit; you
can alter it with the nn-KEY CAW= command.
SYS TEST 055
SYS TEST 060
To change where 430o-FRIEND locates the data area,
the CCW area, or the IDA area, use the following patch
(REP) card before the END (last) card, or alter the storage
areas after 4300-FRIEND is loaded by the ALTER
command. Note that CCWs start on doubleword
boundaries and IDAWs on word boundaries; these areas
must not overlap. Assign the data area to the last part of
the storage.
Special Storage Areas
X'0300'
Special TIO/SIO loop area.
X'0400'
Four-byte data area address (standard
X'DOOO'). This address should point behind
all other FRIEND areas because FRIEND uses
the data space up to the end of the storage.
X'0404'
Four-byte CCW area address (standard
X'AOO,O' must start on double word
boundary).
X'0408'
column
1234 7
X'040C'
Four-byte trace area start address (standard
X'4FFF' before storage end).
X'04 10'
Four-byte trace area end address (standard
X'2FFF' before storage end).
X'0414'
Four-byte current trace entry pointer.
X'0418'
Four-byte address of first unit control block
(UeB).
X'041 C'
Two-byte internal program version/level
(xxyy).
X'041 E'
Two-byte secondary output station (printer)
address.
X'0402'
Two-byte keyboard device address.
X'0422'
Two-byte printer device address (for internal
use).
X'0424'
Two-byte current test device unit address
used for TIO.
X'0426'
Two-byte last test device used unit address
used for HIO after 2x external interrupt (lNT
command).
X'044C'
Control indicator byte (lNDBYTE)
X'044F
=
=
For each CCW chain that is made, 4300-FRIEND uses a
special control block called a UCB. The address of each
can be displayed by the CCW= or LIST= commands.
The length of one UCB entry is 48 bytes.
uce
Patch Card Format
Four-byte IDA area address (standard
,X'9F80' must start on word boundary).
X'01'
X' 10'
Unit Control Siock (UCS)
17
&REP 000400
XXXX,XXXX
(XXXXXXXX is the address of the
new data area)
2
9
8 te
Size
Dec
00
02
Hex
00
02
04
08
10
12
16
04
08
OA
OC
10
4
20
24
28
30
32
36
40
42
44
14
18
1C
1E
20
24
28
2A
2C
4
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
2
2
ALTER command example:
OEV-DEVICE ADDRESS=(Any
device address)
alter 8,400,xxxxxx (xxxxxx is address
of new data area)
0003f8 ................ xxxxxxxx
(Altered storage is displayed)
reset
(Activates changes)
OEV=
4
2
2
4
Contents
Device address
Chain flags:
8000 Wait
~OOO Compare
2000 Increase/decrease
1000 Ripple/random/zero (plus
indicator In CCW byte 5)
0800 Data dump
O~OO Data dump on operator console
0200 Continue if loop is flnished
0100 FB device
OOxO CAW key
0008 uce Is used
0004 Device or control unit is busy
0002 Chain being executed
0001 Device ready (active)
CCW pointer = address of first CCW
CSW mask bytes set by CSW=command
Sense bytes mask set by SENSE= command
Time delay set by WAIT command
Time out counter for missing device end
(TIME DELAY)
Operand one address of COMPARE
Operand two address of COMPARE
Length of compare fields
Length for DATA DUMP function
Address for DATA DUMP function
Address of the INCREASE/DECREASE table
Loop count; set by LOOP cmd (threshold)
Number of SIOs run
Not used
3277-type console
EC mode.
SP console control byte X'01' = SP console
unit control block area; storage end =
X'6FFF.
4381-3
81M 2676380
I
IPN
II
I
I
MI
6169390
EC A20558
EC A20560
....S:.e::;.:9:L...,;:G:.,:G:.,:0;,:2;,;:5_..........4..:..::;.of;...4..:......._ _....J• • 01 Oct 84 . , 8 Feb 85 .
Cl Copyright IBM Corp, 1984
SYS TEST 060
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
I[''''!!'' • .w,
.l.!'[
II!,"[','IIIO! I.1t
f
MH
wt..p:'"",dl'
='"
'MM
!iIlW" [
,u
"'4
Wi. I
W,i1\W ,
1.1"'.' •• .1... .
"',j
,""r "'i',o'o,t! ".'!lI,., •• ,.'W+ilW'\e"'H....... a.W,""t
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 065
Information Requested by
4300-FRIEND
listed below are the 4300-FRIEND requests and your
replies to them. Enter decimal data with no separation:,
that is, 123456 (not 123,456 or 123 456). Enter an x
before the hex data; for example, x60. If you enter
wrong information, 4300-FRIEND asks you to try again.
If a program loop occurs, enter the character i or perform
a program (PSW) restart.
CMD=
Example of OAT A=
Specify a 3277 command.
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
DATA=
'EM'
'EU'
'FF'
'IC'
'MF'
'NL'
'PT'
'RA'
'SA'
ADR=
Specify (in hex) a two-byte 3277 buffer address.
'S8'
'SF'
'SX'
ATT=
'.'
Specify (in hex) a one-byte 3277 attribute character. The
default is x60.
CYL-
End of message - for printer
Erase unprotected + address
Forms feed - for printer
Insert cursor
Modify field + attribute character
New line - for printer
Program tabulator
Repeat to address + address and fill character
Set attribute + attribute character
Set buffer address + address
Start field + attribute character
Start field extended + attribute character
ENTER = no command
End of data stream (no code generated)
BBCCHH=
Specify (in decimal or hex) a cylinder number for a seek
command. The default is O.
Specify (in hex) a six-byte 232 1 seek argument.
DATA==
100xff
1000xfOfO
80cl
12cabc
12cABC
12cAaB
Press ENTER
DL=
(100 bytes of X'FF)
(1000 groups of X'FOFO')
(80 bytes of X'Fl')
(12 groups of X'818283')
(12 groups of X'C1C2C3')
(12 groups of X'C181C2')
(after all data is entered)
Byte
1
2
3
4
5
Function/Range (hex)
-/00
Cell/OQ-09
Subcell/OO-13
Strip/OO-09
Head position/00-04
Head number/OO-13
Specify data. 43DO-FRIEND repeats the DATA= request
until no more data is entered. (You can specify both hex
and decimal data for one symbolic data area by using the
CREATE/BUILD command.)
BL.OFFS.=
Specify a block offset value for the LOCATE fixed block
command. Enter either a decimal value (0 to
4294967295) or a hex value (xO to xffffffff). The default
value is O.
BLCK.CNT=
Specify a block count value for the LOCATE fixed block
command. Enter either a decimal value (1 to 65535) or a
hex value (x 1 to xffff). The default value is 1.
:~~ 2676380 I~~q GG030
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 6169391
.1015
II
.
EC A20558I
~.~0~1~O:ct~8~4~~.
nn
is an optional decimal duplication factor.
x
indicates hex data.
hhhhh
is the hex data.
c
indicates EBCDIC data.
dddddis the EBCDIC data (up to 242 characters).
4300-FRIEND does not convert lowercase
characters to uppercase.
If the device did not respond to the Sense 10 command,
4300-FRIEND requests the printer device type for the
UCSB load.
ENTER TIME hh:mm:ss=
(appears first time only)
DEV=
Enter the current time of day. The default time-of-day is
zero.
(all other times)
HARD COPY (Y I N)=
Specify a device address in hex. Leading zeros are not
required. If you do not specify a device address,
4300-FRIEND uses the last entered device address or
enters the command input mode ,if you didn't specify a
device address before. For more details, see the
"DEVICE=" command.
Specify Y for·a copy of all console messages; press the
ENTER key if you do not want a copy (4300-FRIEND
defaults to the N reply).
Specify the device address of the new operator console or
the address of the secondary output station, the printer.
If the secondary output station address is set to zero, the
secondary printer function is not active.
Specify the data in one of the following formats:
nnxhhhhh or nncddddd
ENTER DEVICE TYPE (32xx)=
DEV=DEVICE ADDRESS=
DEV.ADDR""
o
Specify the data length; either a decimal (1 to 32767) or
hex (x0001 to x7ffff) value. The default value is 1.
DEV.TYPE
Specify the type of new console.
1052
327x
PRT
SP
TP
1052-type console
327x-type console
Secondary output printer, which must accept a
X'Og' print command. The PRT function is not
used for a 1052 and SP console.
System console with X'83' op code enabled.
Terminal printer as secondary output required.
HD=
Specify (in decimal or hex) a head number. The default is
head O.
IDAWS IN HEX=
Specify the real storage addresses for the IDA address list
(tDAWs). Enter as many addresses as required,
separated by commas (leading zeros are not required).
Do not use storage range X'OOOO' to X'AOOO' (the
4300-FRIEND program resides there). If data is
requested for the CCW, 4300-FRIEND automatically
moves the data to the specified real storage area(s).
KEY=
Specify the key for the data field. Enter the data as
shown for DATA=.
______~__~________~________~________~
SYS TEST 065
SYSTEST 070
KL=
MLCCCBBCCHHRDDS=
NUMBER OF TIMES=
SELECT UCS-TYPE (xx,xx.xx,xx)
Specify the key length. Enter either a decimal (0 to 255)
or hex (xOO to xff) value. The default value is O.
Specify (in hex) 15 bytes of buffer control information for
the buffer control record· (this is the record transferred to
the 2314 on an INIT BUF command).
Specify the number of times you want to run the last
entered CCW chain or the CCW chain specified in the
LOOP command. Enter 1 to 32767 in decimal.
Select a UCS buffer type from a displayed menu.
M
L
CCC
OPe BYTE=
Specify (in decimal) the third defect skip displacement for
the 3340/3350 home address.
THIRD SD=
LOG. END=
Specify the logical.end for the DEFINE EXTENT fixed
block command. Enter a decimal value (up to
4294967295) or a hex value (up to xffffffff). The default
is the value read by the READ DEVICE CHAR fixed block.
command.
BBCCHH
R
DO
LOG.START=
Specify the logical start for the DEFINE EXTENT fixed
block command. Enter a decimal value (up to
4294967295) or a hex value (up to xffffffff). The default
value is O.
MASKSpecify (in hex) a one-byte file mask for the SET FILE
MASK command (for example, MASK= 18). The default
is X'CO' (press the ENTER key).
MASK BYTESpecify (in hex) a one-byte mask for the DEFINE EXTENT
fixed block command. If you do not provide a mask, the
default mask for the first 12 bytes of the data area is
X'OO'. 4300-FRIEND sets the last four bytes in the data
area to the value read by the READ DEVICE CHAR
command (logical end).
S
Mode byte; 81 (needs write buffer) or 01
Length byte; 60
Command 1 (OO, 07, 13)
Command 2 (29, 31, 69, A9, E9)
Command 3 (05, 06, 00, OE, 16, lA, 35,
3D)
Seek argument
Record number
Data length
Search key length
Example:
INIT BUF
MLCCCBBCCHHRDDS= 816d0731350
OOOOOc3000101005000
WRITE BUF
DATA". 40xfOfO
MODE (BC/EC)Specify the control mode;BC for Basic Control mode or
EC for Extended Control mode. The default is EC.
MODECMDSpecify (in hex) a MODE SET command code. The
default is x93(7-track tape/sao bpj).
IVIODEL=
Specify 81 for the processor model. This chooses the
prOper time calculation for the WAIT and TIME DELAY
commands.
Specify (in hex) the operation byte for the LOCATE fixed
block command. The default is X·06'.
PHY.START=
Specify the physical start for the DEFINE EXTENT fixed
block command. Enter a decimal (up to 4294967295) or
hex value (up to xffffffff). The default is O.
R'CD NO.=
Specify the record number to be used in the file identifier
field. Enter a decimal (0 to 255) or hex value (xOO to
xff).
WCC=
Specify (in hex) the 3277 write control character. The
default is X·C3'.
XATT
Enter 327x extended data stream attribute TYPE/VALUE
pair as four hex digits. If commands START FIELD
EXTE NDED or MODIFY FIELD were specified, you can
enter more than one attribute pair. To end the sequence,
enter '.'. If you press the ENTER key only, value
X'C040' is entered and the sequence ends.
REPl. CNT=
Specify the replication count for the LOCATE fixed block
command. Enter a decimal (0 to 255) or hex value (xOO
to xff). The default is O.
SD=
Specify (in decimal) the defect skip displacement for the
3340/3350 home address.
SEC. PRINTER ADDRESS=
Specify either the device address of the secondary output
printer on which a hard copy of all operator messages are
to be printed or UCSB which invokes the UCBS load
routine to load a UCS buffer. You can enter the optional
LOG operand after the printer address; for example,
OE,lOG. This causes the call of the PRINT LOG function.
If you want to modify the secondary printer address later,
use the CHANGE KEYBOARD command.
SECOND SD=
Specify (in decimal) the second defect skip displacement
for the 3340/3350 home address.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
I' Copyright IBM corp. 1984
GG030
I
PN 6169391
,20f5
II
ECA20668·1
~·_O_1_0_~~8_4__.,________~________~________~~______~
SYS TEST 070
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00-00- 0 0-0 0 0
i:o 0
t::'
1<
I!
,t.. ;,.
:.
t"
$1
WHW
t
r
'~"2
.'j
··'ti'
«t
""t,
1'±:f'±t#M'ttW
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SYS TEST 075
4300-FRIEND Messages
If a message starts with *, 4300-FRIEND waits before
displaying the message so you can use the ENTER key to
stop the processing. Status information is displayed as
follows (the current UCB is displayed together with area
pointers):
aa nn-ccuu-ff C=xx,kf D=xx,kf I=xx.kf mm
•
nn = Chain number
COND CODE= n ON UNIT xxxx
HALT
•
ccuu = Unit address
Displayed after 4300-FRIEND detects a condition that
requires a program halt. To continue, specify GO.
•
ff
Displays condition code n for device xxxx after an XTIO,
XClRIO, XHIO, XHDV, XTCH, or XSTIDC command. This
message is also displayed to indicate the status of the
Test I/O.
Condition code 0 indicates that device xxxx is ready and
available. Condition code 2 indicates that the channel or
subchannel to which the device is attached is busy.
Condition code 3 indicates that the address is not
recognized by a channel or any device on the channel. To
enter commands, press the ENTER key and enter
NOTEST. If SCOPE is active, 4300-FRIEND requires a
PSW restart to exit from the scope loop.
Indicates that an error occurred during the running of a
CCW chain. It also indicates a unit check or a permanent
CU-busy condition at the device used for the START
READER command.
=
Flag bytes
C=xx
=
•
k = Area key
•
f = Fetch protection on if F
•
D=xx
•
I=xx = IDA area address
•
mm = Block multiplexer mode (BMPX) or selector
mode (SELl.
aa indicates the following:
COMMAND
Keya 4300-FRIEND command.
REPLACE
Key a replacement CCW
command.
RESPOND
Key requested information.
RUNNING
4300-FRIEND is running CCW
chain(s). If stop address
X'ODEADO' is displayed,
4300-FRIEND is waiting for an
I/O interrupt from a device being
tested. You can enter
4300-FRIEND commands during
this mode without stopping the
processing.
TRACING
4300-FRIEND is tracing CCW
chain(s) as they run.
SCOPING
4300-FRIEND is looping on a SIO
or TIO command.
TIOlOOP
4300-FRIEND is repeating a TIO
command.
=
Data area address
PRINT lOG function; copies the
screen to a printer.
4300-FRIEND commands are
running; no action is required.
WORKING
4381
B/M 2676380
I~q
~ Copyright 16M Ccxp. 1964
Displays the condition code, CSW, and sense bytes for
device xxxx after an XTIO, XClRIO, XHIO, XHDV, XTCH,
or XSTIDC command.
$x aaaaaa 1111
Appears after the DUMP$ command. x = the symbolic
I/O area name; aaaaaa = address (in hex) of the area; 1111
length (in hex) of the area.
=
K=k.F=f.R=r.C=c
Displays the storage protection keys of a 2K storage area.
Address aaaaaa is the first byte of the area; k = storage
key in hex; f = fetch protection on if 1; r = reference bit
on if 1; c = change bit on if 1.
CHAR= xxx ...
PRNTlOG
COND CODE= 1 ON UNIT xxxx
CSW yy yy ... yy yy
SNS zzzzzzzzzz.zzzzzzzz
Status and Operator Messages
aaaaaa
HALT ON ERROR
CCW area address
Displays the data received for a READ DEVICE CHAR
fixed block command.
This message is also displayed to indicate the status of
the TEST I/O. Condition code 1 indicates that the CSW
was stored.
EC-MODE SET. NO RESET POSSIBLE
Indicates that the Extended Control mode was set, and
return'to Basic Control Mode is not possible unless you
re-IPL 4300-FRIEND.
ENTER CCW LIST IN ENGLISH
Displayed after you enter reply to DEV= at the beginning
of a new CCW chain.
EXT -INTRPT BROKE CHAIN
Indicates that the INT feature was active and that the
second external interrupt stopped 4300-FRIEND. The
TID mode is reset.
ID = xxxx ...
Displays the ID of the processor.
1/0= cccctf-ddddtt
Displays bytes two to seven of the Sense I/O command
for the new device specified. This message does not
appear if the Sense I/O command is not supported by the
device (first byte is not X·FF').
LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT xxxx
Displayed if the CCW chain of unit xxxx has run the
number of times specified by the LOOP command. The
running of all active CCW chains is discontinued after
waiting for outstanding I/O interrupts. If busy devices do
not present their interrupt in the time specified by the
TIME DELAY command, a Halt I/O is issued.
nn*UNIT=ccuu. LOOP=xxx/yyy - I
Appears after the COUNTER command. nn = CCW chain
number; ccuu = unit address; xxx = loop threshold; yyy =
SID counter. I = active/stopped line indication.
nn*UNIT=ccuu. UCB=aaaaaa. FL=cccc
Indicates the UCB entry if you specified the CCW= or
LlST=. nn = CCW chain number; ccuu = unit address;
aaaaaa = address of 34-byte long UCB entry; cccc =
active UCB flags.
GG030
SYS TEST 075
SYS TEST 080
psw ...
n'n-ccuu-ff C ... xxx,kf D"yyy,kf I-zzz.kf mmm
UCSB LOAD SUCCESSFUL FINISHED
EXT-INTRPT. PSW .. xxx/yyy E
PGM~INTRPT,
Appears after the STATUS command. The current UCB is
displayed together with area pointers. nn = CCW chain
number; ccuu = unit address; ff = flag bytes; xxx = CCW
area address; k ... area key; f .,. fetch protection if F; yyy ...
data area address; zzz .. IDA area address: C ... CCW area;
D= data area; 1= IDA area; mmm ... block multiplexer
mode if BMPX or selector mode if SEL.
The UCS buffer load was successful.
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected external interrupt.
xxx is the old PSW for the interrupt.
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected program interrupt.
xxx is the old PSW for the interrupt.
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interruption code.
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
-IDAW POINTS TO PROGRAM AREA
If PGM i~terrupts start to be displayed, do a PSW restart.
If this does not help, reload 4300-FRIEND. For the
DUMP, DISPLAY, or ALTER commands, this error can
occur if the specified address is out of storage or the page
is disconnected in VSE mode.
UNIT=xxxx - COUNT=nnn
Indicates a DATA DUMP print out. xxxx .. unit address"
nnn = SIO counter.
WAIT UP TO 5 SECONDS UNTil LOAD IS FINISHED
PRINTER NOT READY
Displayed if the secondary printer is not available or not
ready. Make the printer ready or correct the device
address.
SET FILE MASK INSERTED
Indicates that you did not specify a SET FILE MASK
command. Therefore, 4300-FRIEND automatically
inserted a Set File Mask CCW preceding the last CCW
entered. Because the CCW chain being generated
requires a set file mask if you specify a WRITE HA (home
address) or WRITE RO (record zero) command, a not valid
CCW chain may result.
Indicates that the UCS buffer load is in process.
4300-FRIEND STANDARD OPTION SET
Displayed after you start running the CCW chain by
pressing the ENTER key without input GO.
Indicates that one of the specified IDA addresses points
inside the 4300-FRIEND program. 4300-FRIEND
ignores all entered IDAWs and repeats the request for
IDAWs.
-INVALID MODEL, USE 31-41-81 OR 11 5-1 68 OR
25-75
Error Messages
I/O-INTRPT. PSW
DEVICE END OR OTHER 110 INTERRUPT MISSING
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interrupt code.
PRINTER NOT READY
Displays all the standard options of 4300-FRIEND set
during program initialization. If you want to change
options, use the BMPX, NO BMPX, TIME DELAY nn,
HALT, ALARM, or NO INT commands.
Indicates that a working device did not issue an I/O
interrupt within 15 seconds.
START
xxx / yyy E
CC=O was not received from the printer during the UCSB
load.
Indicates that you specified the wrong model.
SVC-INTRPT, PSW
= xxx/yyy
= xxx/yyy
E
E
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected input/output
interrupt (usually from other devices becoming ready).
xxx is the old PSW for the interrupt. The CSW and sense
data are also displayed.
DEVICE NOT AVAILABLE, CC=3
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interruption code.
Indicates that the specified printer is not operational.
MCK-INTRPT, PSW = xxx/yyy E
-DEVICE QUEUE FULL. LAST CMD IGNORED
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected machine check
interrupt. The log out area is saved so that it can be
displayed by the DUMP command. xxx is the old PSW
for the interrupt.
4300-FRIEND detected an unexpected supervisor call
(SVC) interrupt. xxx is the old PSW for the interrupt.
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interrupt code.
-SYMBOL TABLE FULL, LAST CMD IGNORED
You tried to enter more than 40 symbolic characters. To
clear the symbol table, key CLEAR$.
STORAGE SIZE= xxxxxx
Displays (in hex) the storage size of the system.
You have tried to enter more than 99 devices'into the
device queue. Enter RESET to clear the device queue,
and start again.
TIC *-8 INSERTED
Indicates that you did not specify a TIC. Therefore,
4300-FRIEND automatically inserted a TIC *-8 CCW
before the last CCW entered. Because the CCW chain
being generated requires a TIC if you specify a Search
CCW command, a not valid CCW chain may result.
-ENTER
Indicates that an error was detected in the CSW during
the UCSB load.
I~~g
e Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
Displayed for misspelled statements or information,
invalid or wrong number of characters, undefined CCWs,
missing delimiter (comma), unknown verbs, etc. Key?
and correct the error.
'' '
-SYNTAX ERROR- ON INPUT
"DEV=" OR "ADD" BEFORE CCW- You entered a CCW
command with an incorrect UCB (device) assignment.
ERROR DURING UCSB LOAD
4381
B/M 2676380
E at the end of the message indicates an EC mode
interrupt. In this case, yyy is the interrupt code.
-SYNT AX ERROR-
NO UCS SUPPORT FOR THIS DEVICE
The specified printer is not a 3203, 321'1, 3262, or
3289 device.
4300-FRIEND detected an error in the information
entered for a DATA=, KEY=, or BBCCHH= request,
Possible data field errors are missing x or c (indicates type
of data) or no data after x or c. Enter? and correct the
error.
GG030
SYS TEST 080
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
kUf ."
1 tll#WgrtfWtt,"
.J"W"we1t"fwS"r,;z'
f'tW'iff''Swm
rif .,
"-T'··[':-TI'-'·:· ,'·,··,n-g':"',:r':'p""rn
.,'
mil
II'
I
'I
II
"'f"
' ,
"nllw :'1. 'b'
I')'
',',I
j1]!(!
[.1
t('tiVrIlUetllw["tltll!!M'K'f'
'ww'.r:
t'
'b '
HtHt"HtI!ttf
"W .:.
1'.,,"1, "'
"ItrWt'INfff
n't"""""",:"",'rt
t
'
W!N
',,'"t dM
m
t'tt
iw
,.... tU
we.
DOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SYS TEST 085
·UNIT=xxxx - INCORRECT CSW
CSW yyy
LOOP nnn
-UNDEFINED SYMBOL(S}
4300-FRIEND detected a symbol that was not previously
defined. You cannot COMPARE or DUMP from a
symbolic 1/0- area unless it has already been defined by a
BUILD or CREATE command or the FROM or INTO CCW
command modifier.
Indicates any unusual status; for example, attention, unit
exception, and any channel status in the CSW.
·UNIT=xxxx -I/O INTRPT.UNIT CHECK
CSW 00 00D4EO OE 00 0000
SNS 100020CSOO 0000000000 •.•
LOOP 00662
·UNIT=xxxx - CC= 1 AFTER SIO
CSWyyy
SNS zzz
lOOP nnn
Indicates that 4300-FRIEND received an I/O interrupt,
and unit check is on in the CSW. 4300-FRIEND displays
the device. address that gave the unit check, the actual
CSW,and the sense bytes received from the device. If
the message ERROR ON SENSE is displayed in front of
the sense data, the SIO sense ended with an not valid
status.
Indicates that the Start I/O command is not accepted
(condition code = 1). The CSW device status is not
control unit busy or device busy or not a single channel
end or device end/channel end (immediate commands).
Check that the device is ready and online. LOOP counter
nnn is not incremented and indicates the number of
successfully initiated I/O operations.
".
·UNIT=xxxx - NO DEV-END OR CU-END I/O INTRPT
·UNIT=xxxx - CC=3 AFTER SIO
lOOP nnn
Indicates that 4300-FRIEND did not receive a device end
or control uri it end within five to ten seconds after
starting a CCW chain or receiving a control unit busy.
The delay time depends on the number of devices
running.
Indicates that the Start I/O command is not accepted
(condition code = 3). LOOP counter nnn is not
incremented.
·UNIT=xxxx - DATA COMPARE ERROR
BYTE NO.=aaaa $X=bb $Y=cc
'(one entry for each byte
, that failed to compare)
lOOP nnn
You can change the time delay with the TIME DELAY
command. If a timeout occurs, 4300-FRIEND issues a
HALT I/O to reset the device and then waits another time
period for a device interrupt from the HALT I/O.
Indicate$ a data compare error.
xxxx
nnn
aaaa
X
Y
bb
cc
Device address.
Loop number that failed ..
Relative byte number of the two areas compared
(first byte = 1).
Represents the first area and is a symbolic
character if symbolic I/O areas were used
(otherwise = 1).
Represents the second area (= 2, if no symbolic
area).
Represents the hex byte in the first area.
Represents the hex byte in the second area.
4381
81M 2676380
I:g
C Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 6169391
GG030
.50f5
II
.
EC A20558
I
~.~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~~.
________________~____________~____________~__________~
SYS TEST 085
0000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000 000008000
SYS TEST 095
4300-FRIEND Commands
ADD
BTS
In general,4300-FRIEND ignores all vowels, blanks,
periods, and asterisks input except in data. You can use
a comma to separate a parameter from the command.
Use this command to add a CCW to the last CCW chain
entered. (4300":,,FRIEND turns on the command chain bit
in the preceding CCW.) For an existing CCW chain,
additional CCWs can be added by using the nn-ADD
command (see "Modifying Existing CCW Chains").
Branch to Tic/SIO loop
For syntax errors or to repeat the previous input, enter a
question mark (1).
Use this command to loop (using a small TIO/SIO loop at
address X'300') the last CCW chain entered. Stop the
loop by pressing the external interrupt button twice if INT
is active. If INT is not active, do a PSW restart.
ALARM
If storage addresses are entered for a command, they
must be entered in hex. Other numeric data (for example,
data length) can be entered in either decimal or hex (an x
must precede the hex value).
Use this command to sound an audible alarm after a
message appears that requires operator action.
BUILD nnn,Se
BlD nnn,Se
CREATE nnn,Se
CRT nnn,Se
To reset ALARM, see the "NO ALARM" command.
The first line of the commands shows the primary form of
the commands; accepted alternate forms are listed after
the primary form.
AL TER KEY nnn,addr,k,f
ALTER KEY nnn.$e,k,f
ALTER KEY $c.k.f
$$7
Use this command to display the first 79 source
characters of all predefined CCW chains.
SSnnn,Use this command to display the source of predefined
CCW chain nnn.
S-=hh
Use this command to assign two hex digits (hh) for the
characters $ and ... The characters $ and .. in hex input
fields are replaced by the digits assigned. The default
value is X'FF'.
Use this command to alter the storage key for storage
area addr or symbolic I/O area $c (c can be any
alphabetic character) to the key specified by k. This
command also sets fetch protection on if you specify an f
as the last operand. The length is nnn bytes.
ALTER nnn,addr,hhhh
ALTER nnn,$e,hhhh
ALTER Sc,hhhh
Use this command to alter up to 80 bytes at address
addror symbolic I/O area $c (c can be any alphabetic
character). Data hhhh is moved to storage. The length
nnn of the area to be altered can be specified in decimal
or hex. After the alter operation, the changed data is
dumped (this includes the preceding and following eight
bytes).
7 or 71
BMPX
Use this command (7) to display (and modify) the last
input entered on a 3277-type console (up to 30 bytes).
If you specify two question marks (71), the next to last
input is displayed.
nn-ACTIVA TE. nn-ACT
Enable block multiplexer mode
Use this command to set block multiplexer mode on
(standard if you specify EC mode).
To disable block multiplexer mode, see the "NO BMPX"
command.
Use this command to reserve a symbolic data area $c (c
represents any alphabetic character). You can specify the
length nnn of the area in decimal or hex. If you specify
length zero (0)' a data area with length one is created and
no data is requested (pointer). The created data area can
be used in all following CCWs until you specify the RESET
command. (Enter data in response to message DATA=.
4300-FRIEND repeats the DATA= request until you enter
no more data or the length count decrements to 0).
CCW or CCW=xxx
LIST
CHANGE KEYBOARD
CK
Use this command to request a new keyboard address for
command input or the address of the secondary printer
for CRT hard copy.
Note: 4300-FRIEND asks for the device type of the
new console/secondary output station. Secondary output
station printing produces a hard copy of all messages for
the console. If a secondary output station is specified,
make sure that it can handle the print CCW X'Og'. Reset
the secondary output by specifying address = 0 and type
= PRT.
CHANGE nnn,addr,ecce
. CHANGE nnn.$b.eeee
CHANGE $b.ccee
Use this command to alter up to 80 bytes at address
addr or symbolic I/O area $b ($b represents any
alphabetic character). Data cccc is moved to storage
(lowercase characters are accepted). You can specify the
length (nnn) of the area in decimal or hex. After the
storage alter operation, the changed area is displayed.
CLEAR
List CCWs Use this command to display the channel
program being generated together with up to 16 data
bytes in hex. If you specify a device address, all CCW
blocks for this specific device are listed. If you specify a
device address of 0 or CCW== alone, 4300-FRIEND
displays all CCW blocks of all devices.
Use this command to clear all CCW execution flags in all
active UCBsand to reset the execution counters. You
can use this command after an error stop to reinitialize
the CCWrun sequence.
ClEAR$c
eLRS
If you have not entered GO, the command chain bit is on
in the last CCW. If you enter CCW immediately after an
I/O error message, the displayed CCW chain is the one
that detected the error. The actual failing command is
flagged by ** (CCW address in CSW minus 8).
Use this command to clear the reference to symbolic data
area $c or to all symbolic references if you do not specify
a symbolic data area.
Example:
COLOR TEST
UCB= unit control block address for this CCW chain. FL=
flag bytes in this UCB. Use tbe nn-CCW command for
one UCB; for example, 2-CCW to display UCB chain two.
Use this command to invoke an interactive test case for
. extended data stream orders (requires 327x extended
features).
Use this command to reactivate a CCW chain(s). nn is
the UCB number displayed by the LlST= function. If the
optional parameter .. is specified, all stopped CCW chains
are activated (see "LOOP" commmand).
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
e Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG035
SYS TEST 095
SYS TEST 100
COMPARE$x,$y,nnn
CMP addr1 ,addr2,nnn
Use this command to compare two data areas (addr 1 to
addr2 or symbolic I/O area $x to $y). Specify the length
(nnn) of the area in decimal or hex format (maximum
length is 65535 or X'ffff'). If you do not specify a length,
the length of the first symbolic I/O area is used. Only
two areas can be compared for one CCW chain. The two
areas comp@red can be different in any CCW chain(s).
You can enter COMPARE anytime during the generation
of a CCW chain, and you can specify it for each CCW
chain entered .. Any symbolic I/O areas to be used must
have been defined before. 430o-FRIEND. does the
comparison when it completes the CCW chain.
To reset COMPARE, see the "NO COMPARE" command.
CONNECT nnn, addr
CONN nnn. Sc
CNNSc
DECREASE n.addr .incr,thr,ini, •
OCR n.addr.incr.thr .ini,n2.
addr2.incr2.thr2.ini2. •
DISPlA Y nnn,addr.xxx
DISPLAY nnn,Sc,xxx
DSPl Sc,xxx
Use this command to connect a storage block of length
.
nnn (full 2K blocks are used).
Use this command to decrement a counter after each
completion of a channel program. You can specify a
second counter which is updated if the threshold of the
first counter is reached. Use this command with the
INCREASE command only. For an explanation of the
parameters, see the "INCREASE" command.
Use this command to display the contents of storage in
character format. Storage is displayed in lines of 64
bytes (maximum) along with the address of the first byte.
addr indicates the beginning address; nnn indicates the
length
decimal or hex) of the area to be displayed.
Optionally, you can specify a line printer address xxx for
output.
COpy xxx
Use this command to copy the last-entered CCW chain
for device xxx. The CCW chain is not actually duplicated.
Instead, the same physical CCW chain is used. This
permits the same CCW chain to be run on several devices
(of the same type) at the same time.
·COUNTER
CNTR
Use this command to display the LOOP values and the
510 counters for all active CCW chains/UCBs.
CONFIG xxx,yyy
CNFG
Use this command to test a range of devices (from
address xxx to address yyy). If you do not specify device
addresses, all device addresses from X'OOO' to X'FFF'
are tested.
4300-FRIEND issues a TIO command, a SIO sense, and
510 sense I/O command to each· device. The resulting
condition codes, first four sense bytes, and sense I/O
information bytes one to seven are displayed. In addition,
TCH and STIDC commands are issued for the first device
and for all following channel addresses ending with
X'OO'. The first byte of the channellD means X'OO' selector channel; X'10' = byte-MPX channel; X'20' =
burst-MPX channel. Devices or channels that store
condition code 3 after TIO/TCH are not displayed.
All outstanding t/O interrupts are cleared before the
CONFIG command; If an I/O interrupt is encountered
after one device is tested, a message is displayed.
CREATE
See the "BUILD" command.
.CSW=xxxx
CSW status mask
Use this command to generate a CSW device and channel
status mask. The two-byte long hex xxxx field indicates
those bits that you want 4300-FRIEND to ignore. You
can enter CSW== anytime during the generation of a CCW
chain and you can specify it for each CCW chain entered.
The device-end bit cannot be turned off.
.
DATA DUMP nnn,addr,·
DATA DUMP nnn,$c,"
. DTDMP Sc,Use· this command to dump the specified data area (addr
or symbotic I/O area $c) on the secondary printer after
running each CCW chain. You do not have to specify the
length (nnn) of the area for a symbolic I/O area. If the
secondary printer is not specified, the operator console is
used for the display. If the optional parameter * is
specified, the dump also appears on the operator console.
(in
To reset the DECREASE command, see the "NO
DECREASE"command.
DUMPS
DEVICE=xxx
DEV=xxx
Use this command to dump the names of all assigned
symbolic I/O areas along with their storage address and
. length in hex.
Use this command to create a new UCB for the next
CCW chain entered with the unit address of xxx (leading
zeros are not reQuired). If the device address is ., the
address of the operator console is used. The last-entered
UCB entry is completed by turning the command chaining
bit off in the last CCW.
DUMP KEY nnn,addr
DUMP KEY nnn.Se
DMPK $c
Use this command to dump the storage keys of storage
area addr for nnn bytes.
Note: 4300-FRIEND analyzes the device type at this
time. The following commands are run if the device is
ready:
DUMP nnn,addr,xxx
DUMP nnn,$c,xxx
DMP $c,xxx
For FB device type determination: Sense I/O (X'E4')
2321 determination (if Sense I/O not accepted):
Seek Cylinder (X'OB') - length 4 X'FF.FF'
Seek (X'07') X '0000 10000000'
After previous checks:
Sense (X'04') - if any error occurred before to clean
status.
Use this command to dump nnn bytes of storage starting
a~ address addr. You can· specify nnn in decimal or hex.
You can specify a line printer address xxx for output. $c
is any symbolic I/O area specified by a previous BUILD or
CREATE command or by the FROM or INTO CCW
command modifiers (if you do not specify a length, the
one stored for the symbolic field is used). Symbolic
address can be offset $c+a (a = offset 1.. F).
If the specified device does not handle the above
commands, you can specify a dummy device address (for
example, 0) and later specify the real device address with
the nn-DEVICE= command.
DUMPT
Use this command to dump the last entries (36
maximum) of the TRACE area.
DISCONNECT nnn, addr
DISC nnn. $c
DSCSc
EX CLRIO,xxx
XC
Use this command to disconnect a stoiage block of
length nnn (full 2K blocks are used). Reconnect the
block(s) before using the DUMP/AlTER commands.
Execute Clear I/O Use this command to display the
condition code received after running the Clear I/O
command to device xxx.
To reset DATA DUMP, see the "NO DATA DUMP"
command.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~g
GG035
SYS TEST 100
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
0000000000000000000000000
o
0 () 0
o
0 0 0 ()
0000000000·000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 105
EX HDV.xxx
KEY DA T A=k.f
GO
•
n
Use this command to start running all active CCW chains.
After they have started running, the CRT console accepts
commands (for example, STOP, ACTIVATE, COUNTER,
EXHIO, etc.) without halting the run. You can stop
4300-FRIEND with an I/O interrupt by pressing the
ENTER key on the operator's console.
•
addr
•
inc = optional increase value (in decimal or hex). The
default is 1.
•
thr = optional threshold value (decimal or hex) of the
counter at which the counter is initialized. The
default = O.
•
ini = optional value (decimal or hex) to which the
counter is initialized at the beginning and when the
threshold is reached. The default is O.
=
length of the counter (field) 1 to 4.
XHD
Execute Halt Device
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Halt Device command to device xxx.
EX HIO.xxx
XH
HALT
Execute Halt I/O
Use this command to halt processing after an I/O error or
false PSW swap occurs. No device is restarted, but
additional errors can be indicated.
=
hex address of the counter.
Use this command to specify storage key k for the data
area (for the next CCW chains to be entered).
4300-FRIEND increments the data area pointer to the
next 2K storage boundary and sets the specified key up
through the end of storage. The standard key is 1
without fetch protection. Specify f to fetch-protect the
data area.
KEY IDA=k.f
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Halt I/O command to device xxx.
To not halt after an I/O error occurs, see the "NO HALTil
command.
EX STIDC,xxx
XS
HELP
Execute Store Channel 10
Use this command to display operating hints.
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Store Channel 10 command for device
xxx.
Initialize
Use this command to initialize 4300-FRIEND. (This
command is the same as RESET, except it is accepted in
all input fields; for example, in data request.) The device
queue, CCW area, data area, and IDA areas are zeroed.
All references to symbolic I/O areas ($a to $z) are reset.
A new device address is requested.
Execute Test Channel
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Test Channel command for device xxx.
EX TIO.xxx
XT
INCREASE n.addr.inc. thr.ini. •
INCR n,addr,inc.thr .ini.
n2.addr2.inc2,thr2.ini2. •
Execute Test I/O
Use this command to advance a counter after each
channel program completes. You can specify a second
counter that is updated if the threshold of the first
counter is reached. Use this command with the
DECREASE command only.
Use this command to display the condition code received
after running the Test I/O command to device xxx. If you
do not specify device address xxx, 4300-FRIEND uses
the last device address entered.
or second
To reset the INCREASE function, see the "NO
INCREASE" command.
INT
Use this command to discontinue the running of CCW
chain(s) after the external interrupt button has been
pressed twice. A Halt I/O instruction is issued after about
five seconds to those I/O devices that are still active. The
TIO mode of 4300-FRIEND is reset.
To handle external interruptions normally, see the "NO
tNT" command.
KEY CAW=k
Use this command to specify CAW key k for the running
of the CCW chain. k can be any hex digit 0 to F. The
standard key used is 1.
KEY CCW=k.f
Use this command to specify storage key k for the CCW
area (for all CCW chains). The standard key is 1 without
fetch protection. Specify f to fetch-protect the CCW
area.
FLAG nn.xx
Modify Flag Byte
Use this command to modify the flag byte in CCW nn to
hex value xx. If you specify no value, the flag is set to
zero.
C)
* =: stop processing if threshold of the only
counter is reached.
Interrupt
EX TCH,xxx
XTC
4381
B/M 2676380
•
I~~g
Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
GG036
I
II
PN 6169392
.30f6
.
EC A20558
Use this command to specify the storage key k for the
IDA area (for all CCW chains). The standard key is 1
without fetch protection. Specify f to fetch-protect the
IDA area.
LIST
See the "CCW" Command.
LOAD UCSB
Use this command to load the UCSB buffer of the 3203,
3211, 3262 or 3289 printers (4300-FRIEND requests all
necessary load information). The Block Data Check
function is set for the printer.
LOOP
I LOOP nnn.·
Use this command to specify the number of times to loop
the entered CCW chain. Specify the loop number nnn in
decimal {the maximum number is 65535}. The 510
counter is reset to zero.
If you specify the optional parameter * , the CCW chain is
stopped when the specified loop count is reached. You
can activate the stopped CCW chains again with the
ACT, * command. If you do not specify the parameter *
and the CCW chain has looped the specified number of
times, 4300-FRIEND stops running all active CCW
chains, displays LOOP IS FINISHED ON UNIT xxxx, and
requests a new command.
Enter GO to repeat the CCW chain(s). You can display
the current loop values (thresholds) with'the COUNTER
command.
I
L.~0~'~O~ct~8~4~~.____________________~______________~________~____________~
SYS TEST 105
SYSTEST 110
NO ALARM
NLRM
NO TIME DELAY
NTD
QUIT
Use this command to reset the audible alarm on the
operator' console.
Use this command to instruct 4300-:FRIEND to go to
wait state after all active UCB devices are started until an
I/O interrupt occurs. Devices that do not return a
device-end interrupt are not restarted. This mode is
recommended, in order to save processor time, if
4300-FRIEND is used in the VM environment.
Use this command to 'quit (cancel) a 430Q-FRIEND
request for console input (for example, DATA=). The last
command is ignored, and a new command is requested.
The REPLACE function is reset.
NO BMPX·
Use this command to set block multiplexer mode off
(standard if you specify BC mode).
Use this command to reset the compare indication for the
last entered chain or for the chain specified in the
nn-NOCOMPARE format.
NO DATA DUMP
NDTDMP
SENSE=xxxx
Use this command to reset the wait indication for the last
entered chain or for the chain specified in the nn-NOWAIT
format.
Use this command to remove all CCW chains for device
xxx from the device queue. If you are running several
different devices in overlap mode, the complete CCW
chain(s) of a device can be removed with this command.
To remove a single CCW chain, use the STOP command.
Use this command to create a sense byte status mask.
The two-byte long, hex xxxx field indicates those bits
4300-FRIEND will ignore in the first two bytes of the
sense field. You can enter this command anytime during
generation of a CCW chain, and you can specify it for
each CCW chain entered.
POINTER CCW-xxx
PTRCCW""xxx
REP nn
SETFB
Replace CCW
Set Fixed-Block Device
Use this command to replace CCW nn in the last CCW
chain entered with the next CCW entered. Use the
nn-REP command to modify a specific CCW chain. When
you are entering a CCW chain, specifying REP alone
replaces the last entered CCW with the next one.
Use this command if a device does not store the correct
FB 10 after a sense I/O.
Use this command to specify the next CCW address (xxx)
(must be on doubleword boundary).
Use this command to reset the Data Dump command.
POINTER DATA-xxx
PTRDT=xxx
NO DECREASE
NDCR
Use this command to reset the Decrease command •.
Use this command to specify the next CCW data area
address (xxx).
RESET
POINTER IDA-x.xx
PTRD-xxx
NO HALT
Use this command for a no halt after an I/O error occurs.
NO INCREASE
NINeR
Use this command to specify the next IDAW address
(xxx) (must be on word boundary).
Use this command to reinitialize 4300-FRIEND. The
device queue, CCW area, data area, and IDA areas are
zeroed. All references to symbolic I/O areas ($a to $z)
are reset. A new device address is requested.
PRINT SENSE
PRTSNS
RETURN
NOINT
Use this command to display the 32-byte long standard
sense area. The TIO mode of 4300-FRIEND is reset.
Use this command to change from card/tape input to
operator console input. Otherwise, use the GO or TRACE
command.
Use this command to instruct 43OQ-FRIEND to handle
the external interruptions normally (no interrupt).
PSW
NO TEST I/O
Program (PSW) Restart
Use this command to reset the T!O mode,
In execution mode, use this command to request a Clear
function without a counter reset.
Use this command to reset the Increase command.
Use this command to loop on a Start I/O or Test I/O
instruction. SCOPE can only be used in single CCW chain
mode. If you specify SCOPE after a TEST I/O, do a PSW
RESTART to exit SCOPE mode. If you specify SCOPE
after a START I/O, use the console REQUEST to exit.
REMOVE=xxx
RMV=xxx
NO WAIT
NO COMPARE
NCMP
SCOPE
Q
SIZE
Use this command to display the storage size in hex.
START READER,xxx;· .nnnn.B
S.xxx
Use this command to read the CCW chain(s) from either a
card reader or a tape drive with address xxx. If the
second parameter is *, all records read are displayed. As
an optional third parameter, a four-digit test case number
can be specified. This number must be located in
columns 3 to 6 of the first record of a test case. If a tape
. is used and a desired test case has been passed, a fourth
parameter B for backward read can be used.
4300-FRIEND skips all test cases up to the one
specified~
STATUS
Use this command to print all the program indicators
normally displayed on line 20.
nn-STOP
Use this command to deactivate CCW chain nn. nn is the
UCB number displayed by the L1ST= function.
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
CI Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG036
I
II
PN 6169392 ,· __ECA20668·1
.40f6
0_1_0_~
__8_4___
. ____________~____________~________~____________
SYS TEST 110
OOOOOOO()OOOOO()O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 115
TRACE xxx
TRC
SUBST xxx,yyy
Substitute
Use this command to start running all active CCW chains
and to build up a trace area that contains information
about all SIOs and I/O interrupts of all test devices. If you
specify an asterisk (*) for device address xxx, the SIOs
and TIOs for the operator console and the secondary
printer are also traced. If you specify device address xxx,
onry trace entries for this device are stored in the trace
area. You can dump the last entries in the trace area with
the OUMPT command.
Use this command to search all channel programs for
device address yyy and then change the device address to
xxx. If you want to change the device address in a
specific CCW chain, use the nn-OEV=xxx CCW chain
control command.
TEST I/O
T
WAIT nn,n
Use this command to repeatedly run the TID instruction
(using the last-entered device address only) and to display
the resulting condition code, CSW, and sense bytes. If
you specify a loop coont for the last entered UCB, the TIO
loop can be restricted. To execute the TJOonly once, use
the EX TIO command. By entering SCOPE instead of GO,
the results are not displayed.
Use this command to instruct 4300-FRIEND to complete
the current CCW chain (device end interrupt) before
starting the next CCW chain. If you do not specify nn,
4300-FRIEND starts the next CCW chain when it
receives the device end interrupt. Otherwise, it waits for
nn milliseconds before starting the next CCW chain. The
second parameter (n) is optional and specifies 0.1
milfiseconds.
Reset TIO mode by pressing the ENTER key twice (it tNT
feature is active) or by commands NO TEST I/O, PRINT
SENSE, or RESET.
Changing Existing CCW Chains
Quring the generation of a CCW chain, all entered
commands are related to the current UCB (the number of
the current UCB is displayed on the screen). To change
an existing CCW chain (UCB), specify the UCB/CCW
chain number (get the UCB/CCW chain number by using
the CCW= or L1ST= commands), a hyphen (-l, and then
the command.
Example 1
This command changes the loop count for CCW chain 12:
12-loop 5000
Example 2
This command copies CCW chain number 2 to the current
UCB by using the same CCWs and data:
2-copy
To reset the Wait function, see the "NO WAIT"
command.
TIME
Use this command to get the current time. This is either
the time-ot-day or the elapsed time since the program
was started.
TIME DELAY nn
TMDL nn
Use this command to set the timeout counter (for the
running of all CCW chains) to decimal nn seconds. An
error message is displayed if 4300-FRIEND does not
receive a device end for a CCW chain within the specified
time period. Also use this command if an operator
console or secondary printer is used as a test device.
For no time delay, see the "NO TIME DELAY" command.
4381
B/M 2676380
1:9
II Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG035
I
II
PN 6169392
.50f5
.
EC A20558
I
~.~0~1~O~ct~8~4~_.
__________~________~________- *________~
SYS TEST 115
0000000000000000000000000000000000
I ,It! I
"!
kU.!.:H!Ill4&.hWLL!J!,1 1'M I ,I
wi+idw ",', ',' "NiwH,.'.''''' eM 1..,:.,
,'.ri.... '.n'i".~,ijijjHW,t,',
+..
rip+*! +{,.Ieu'!', ili'vgrlrl'll
":"(,{,"\Wil!!Krli(" Iryuh' """i'/IJ(ilit!'Wff'f'Yf
1"
,i' r",i
"MIt9'ft!fKlMfMfV!WWel.eti.J.:.
jW
,
'"
"i\"t."U"
'4#'"
'
',"'ilHl"!""""'" " •• HHy. . .#ieij..... :...IIe"! !!.:.jI!i.JI.!!iII4IeH .'
",~.
'"
I dd"d\4"
'AI!· I
,IHi "'tK'"M it "t"
.,
"'."'rlm
'e"
d bj.siSYIIWI
I' ' . I II
b','g"
IU' '\ 1"'JlJhl;j/{.Lllj,i Uil',!II' ,r"I'1 I!I.i '""; ' HWYWUu'd' ""h"IIr H''t ti"IH'u"
"i"I',wi1M',19w'",,"y." I'
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 125
Change Commands
nn-NO DECREASE
nn-STOP
For more information on these commands, see
"4300-FRIEND Commands."
Deactivates DECREASE for CCW chain number nn.
Stops/deactivates UCB/CCW chain number nn.
nn-DEVICE=
nn-WAIT nnnn
Changes the device address for CCW chain number nn.
Specifies/changes WAIT for CCW chain number nn.
nn-FLAG nn,xx
nn-NO WAIT
Changes the flag byte in CCW chain number nn.
Deactivates WAIT for CCW chain number nn.
Adds a command after CCW chain number nn (see also
"nn-SETFB") .
nn-INCREASE ••
CCW Chain Execution Control
nn-CCW
Specifies/changes the INCREASE values.
Lists the CCWs of UCB/chain number nne
nn-NO INCREASE
Before an SIO is issued, 4300-FRIEND checks the CCW
chain and zeros all input areas indicated by the ZERO flag
in the CCW.
nn-COMPARE •••
Deactivates INCREASE for CCW chain number nn.
Specifies/changes COMPARE values.
nn-KEY CAW=
If an I/O interrupt or condition code 1 or 3 occurrs after a
Start I/O, 4300-FRIEND analyzes the CSW and issues
the specified UCB control commands:
nn-NO COMPARE
Specifies/changes the CAW key.
1. Successful completion of a CCW chain (either no
Deactivates COMPARE for CCW chain number nn.
nn-LiST
nn-COPY
Lists the CCWs of UCB/CCW chain number nn.
Copies CCW chain number nn to the current UCB.
nn-LOOP
nn-COUNTER
Specifies/changes the LOOP count.
Lists the counters of UCB/CCW chain number nn.
nn-REP nn
nn-CSW=xxxx
Replaces a CCW in CCW chain number nn (see also
"nn-SETFB") .
a.
nn-SENSE=nnnn
b.
Specifies/changes the sense bits to be ignored.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Condition Code 1 (CSW stored) after Start I/O with
unexpected CSW status.
a.
nn-ACTIVATE
Activates UCB/CCW chain number nne
nn-ADD
If all the CSW status error bits are masked,
handle it as immediate interrupt.
b. Issue sense command in case of unit check in
CSW.
c. .If all the sense bytes are masked and no other
error is in CSW, handle it as immediate interrupt.
d. Display error message.
e. Increment or decrement storage field.
f. Retry Start I/O (SID counter is not incremented).
The SIO is not retried if the loop count is one.
4.
nn-DATA DUMP
Specifies/changes the DATA DUMP values.
nn-SETFB
nn-NO DATA DUMP
Sets FB type for device (nn-REP and nn-ADD commands
require a previous nn-SETFB command for 3370).
Deactivates DATA DUMP for CCW chain number nn.
a.
b.
c.
5.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Data compare
Data dump
Data ripple or random
Increment or decrement storage field
Compare .loop count
Unsuccessful execution of a CCW chain (error in
CSW after I/O interrupt and CSW status not
masked).
Display error message.
Increment or decrement storage field.
Retry Start I/O (SIO counter is not incremented).
The SID is not retried if the loop count is one.
Condition Code 2 (busy) after Start I/O.
•
If WAIT specified, wait until device end is
signaled by device, or stop execution if interrupt
not received after about five seconds.
•
If WAIT was not specified, start next device (if
specified).
error detected or error was masked out by
CSW=/SENSE= commands).
2.
Specifies/changes the CSW bits to be ignored.
Condition Code 3 after Start I/O.
6. Test I/O Loop (last entered device address at storage
location X'420').
a.
b.
c.
Print condition code.
Increment or decrement storage field.
Compare loop count.
Issue sense command if there is a unit check in
CSW.
If all the sense bytes are masked and no other
error is in CSW, handle it as normal interrupt.
Display error message.
Data dump.
Data ripple or random.
Increment or decrement storage field.
Compare loop count.
nn-DECREASE ••
Specifies/changes the DECREASE values.
4381
81M 2676380
o Copyright IBM Corp.
I~~g
1984
I
PN 6'69393
GG040
.' of6
II
EC A20558I
_ ~_~O~1~O~ct~8~4~~.__________~________~________~________~
SYS TEST 125
SYS TEST 130
CCW COMMANDS
In general,4300-FRIEND ignores all vowels, blanks,
periods, and asterisks except in requested data. All
commands can be' entered in either uppercase or
lowercase characters.
READ BUF (X'E2')
SENSE (X'04') ·S·
SNS
Read Buffer - 2314
Length is always 32 bytes. The standard sense bits (byte
zero) are:
RESERVE (X'B4')
RSV
Device Reserve - string switch
READ BUFFERED LOG (X'A4')
RBL
RESET BUF (X'C3') ·S·
RSTBF
Read Buffered Log - 33XX
Following the CCW command, a CCW flag or CCW
command modifier can be entered, separated by a
comma.
The CCWs that have an *S· following the command are
automatically generated with the Suppress Incorrect
Length Indicator (SILl) set on. If you do not want the Sill
bit set on, specify NOSILI after the CCW command.
For a detailed description of the device CCWs, refer to the
Component Description manual for that device.
General CCWs
CMD HH
READ (X'02') ·S·
·S·
X'SO' ==
X'40' ==
X'20' =
X' 10' ==
X'OS' ==
X'04' ,==
Command reject
Intervention required
Bus-out check
Equipment check
Data check
Overrun
SENSE I/O DEVICE (X'E4') ·S·
SNSDVC
TIC ·-n.. n or -n .. n (X'OB')
TIC ·+n ..n or +n ..n
Transfer in Channel
Command Code in Hex
Enter any hex command code. If the last hex digit is odd,
data is requested.
n •• n is the decimal number of bytes for the channel to
transfer to (displacement) the * and + or - are optional. If
only TIC is entered, *-8 is assumed. If X is the first
character of n •• n, the following characters are taken as
hex displacement.
Reset Btdter - 2314
READ COUNT (X'12')
RC
READ COUNT KEY DATA (X'1E') ·S·
RDCKD
READ DATA (X'06') ·S·
READ DIAGNOSTIC STATUS (X'44')
RDDGS
READ HA (X'1 A')
RH
Read Home Address
READ IPL (X'02') ·S·
RDPL
RESTORE (X'17') • S·
RSTR
SEARCH HA EQ (X'39')
SHQ
Search Home Address Equal
SEARCH ID EQ (X'31')
SQD
SEARCH ID HI (X'S1')
SDH
SEARCH 10 HI EQ (X'71')
SOQH
SEARCH KD EQ (X'20') ·S·
SDT
WRITE,(X'Of') ·S·
READ KEY DATA (X'OE') ·S*
RKD
Complete CCW in Hex
DiskCCWs
READ RO (X'16') ·S·
RRO
Enter a complete CCW in hex. Sixteen hex characters are
packed into an S-byte CCW and inserted into the CCW
chain. The data address in the CCW is changed to point
to the next available data area location of 4300-FRIEND
(if SKIP bit is not on in CCW flag). Blanks can be inserted
to separate fields. No CCW flag or CCW command
modifier can be specified.
DIAGNOSTIC LOAD (X'53')
DGL
Read Record Zero
DIAGNOSTIC WRITE (X'73') .
OW
READ SECTOR (X'22')
RSC
ERASE (X'11') ·S·
RECALIBRATE (X'13') ·S·
RCL
Search Key and Data High
NOP (X'03') ·S·
INIT aUF (X'E3')
NTBF
RELEASE (X'94')
RL
SEARCH KEY EQ (X'29') • S·
SQK
Device Release - string switch
SEARCH KEY EQ HI (X'69') ·S·
SKQH
HEX HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Initialize Buffer - 2314
MT,+CCW
Search Key and Data Equal
SEARCH KO EQ HI (X'6D') ·S·
SKDQH
Search Key/Data Eq/Hi
'SEARCH KOHl (X'40') ·S·
'SCHKDH
Set multitrack bit for specified CCW
I"
4381
81M 2676380
I~~q
GG040
PN 616939.3 I"
.20f6
I
EC A20558 ','I
.~.~O~1~O~~~8~4~_~__________~~~_____~_____~________~~______-J
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
r
:0 () 0 0 0 0 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SYS TEST 130
o 00000000
4"'1#'1
"
u"P""'IIU1'Wklt.
t* ".'
""t*Wlltlt!It"L,+!
"li"ltI....!lUIIM'fdf1M"
tw'
,
""""""r'!"',U,!,LIWW't"!)!,"II''''"'W,,,;":.;"'I'ilrirliijlj'*Wt","'tnCrt*ht!t ""Mt'j,j*lt,.Wtt'W."tM
=d·
"d'"'' '"
t,· '.
t'tt«
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
SYS TEST 135
DIAGNOSTIC SENSE (X'C4') ·8·
SEARCH KEY HI (X'49') ·S·
SKH
WRITE RO eX'1S')
WRRO
DGSNS
SEEK (X'01')
SK
Write Record Zero
LOCATE (X'43')
BACKSPACE (X'27')
BSR
lC
WRITE SPECIAL COUNT KEY DATA (X'01')
WSPCKD
SEEK CYL (X'OB')
SKCL
Fixed Block (FB) Commands - 3370
SEEK HEAD (X'1 B')
SKHD
SET SECTOR (X'23')
SS
Fixed block (FB) devices are identified during device
address specification time (DEV= •.• ). If the device
handles FB (depends on SENSE I/O bytes 4 and 5 which
must be X'3370'), the DEVICE CHARACTERISTIC is read
and saved for later use. If the device does not store the
correct FB to after the sense I/O command, the SET FB
command can be used after DEV= •
SPACE COUNT (X'OF') ·S·
SPCNT
DEFINE EXTENT (X'63')
DX
SET FILE MASK (X'1 F')
SFM
WRITE BUF (X'E1')
WBF
WRITE HA (X'19')
WH
or up to 8 hex digits
LOG. END= (decimal value or up to 8 hex digits
preceded by "X").
.
Write Home Address
If nothing is entered, the defaults are:
WRITE H40 (X"9')
WH40
First three parameters are all O.
Write 3340 Home Address
LOG. END is the value read by the READ DEVICE
CHAR command (reduced by 1).
WRITE H50 (X'19')
WH50
DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL (X'F3')
DCNT
Write 3350 Home Address
Backspace File
OP. BYTE =(two hex digits)
REPL. CNT=(decimal value or up to 2 hex digits
preceded by "X").
BLCK. CNT=(decimal value or up to 4 hex digits
preceded by "X").
ERG eX'11') • S·
Erase Record Gap
FSF (X'3F') • S·
Forward Space File
Forward Space Record
PHY.START== (decimal value or up to 8 hex digits
preceded by "X").
LOG.START= (decimal value
preceded by "X").
·5·
FSR (X'37') ·S·
MASK BYTE= (two hex digits)
WRITE DATA (X'OS')
WD
BSF (X'2F')
Requested parameters are:
If nothing is entered the defaults are:
Requested parameters are:
WRITE COUNT KEY DATA (X'' D')
WCKD
·5·
Backspace Record
(8 bytes)
BL. OFFS.=(decimal value or up to 8 hex digits
preceded by "X").
(1S bytes)
Write Buffer - 2314
Tape CCWs
WRITE KEY DATA (X'OD')
WKD
OP. BYTE = X'OS'
REPL. CNT= X'OO'
BLCK. CNT= X'OO01'
BL. OFFS.= X'OOOOOOOO'
READ BUFFERED lOG (X'A4')
RBl
MODE SET (X'93')
MOST
·5·
READ DEVICE CHAR (X'64')
RDDVC
READ FB (X'42')
RFB
·5·
READ IPl (X'02') ·S·
ROPL
RELEASE (X'94')
RL
·5·
Mode Set 7 -track, 800 bpi
MODE SET 800 (X'CB')
MDST8
Mode Set 9-track, 800 bpi
MODE SET' 600 (X'C3')
MOST 1
Mode Set 9-track, 1600 bpi
MODE SET 6250 !X'D3')
MDSTS
Mode Set 9-track, 6250 bpi
Device Release - string switch
RESERVE (X'B4')
RSV
·5·
Device Reserve - string switch
READ (X'02') • S·
RD
READ BACKWARDS (X'OC')
RDBK
·5·
SENSE EXTENDED (X'84') • S·
SNSX
WRITE FB (X'41')
WFB
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GG040
I
PN 6169393
.30f6
II
EC A20558
I
________~________~________~________~
_~._O~1~O~c~t_8~4~.
SYS TEST 135
SYS TEST 140
REWIND (X'07') ·S·
REW
FOLD (X'43')
FLO
READ UCSB (X'OA') ·S·
RCSB
ERASE WRITE CRT (X'05') ·S·
RSW3277
UNLOAD (X'OF') • S·
RUN
Fold -3211 + 3203-4
Read UCSB 3211
Erase Write 3277 Data
GATE LOAD (X'EB')
GTLD
SKIP n ·S·
SKPn
Instead of DATA= 3277, specific requests are keyed. To
end them, enter • after CMD= is keyed. See "Command
Table." po not specify indirect addressing (iDA).
Gate Load - 1403
Skip to Channel n; n is 1 to 12
IMM + CCW command
WRITE (X'01 ') ·S·
WRT
WTM
(X'1 F') ·S·
READ BUFFER (X'02') ·S·
RBFF
Write Tape Mark
MM
SKIP a (X'S3')
SKPO
Card Reader/Punch CCWs
Immediate - use with SPACE/SKIP commands
Skip to Channel 0 immediate - 3211
READ MODIFIED (X'06') ·S·
RMD
LOAD FCB (X'63')
LDFCB
SPACE n (X'CC ' ) ·S·
SPCn
SELECT (X'OB') ·S·
SLCT
Load Forms Control Buffer
Print with n Spaces After
WRITE (X'01 ') • S·
LOAD UCS (X'FB') ·S·
LDCS
n is 1,2, or 3; command is X'09', X'll', or X'19';
immediate X'OB', X'13', or X'lB'.
WRITE CRT (X'01') • S·
W3277
Load UCS Buffer without Folding
UNFOLD (X'23')
NFLD
Write 3277 Data Stream
Unfold [3211 + 3203-4]
Instead of DATA= 3277 specific requests are typed. To
end them, enter • after CMD= is typed. See "Command
Table" below. Do not specify indirect addressing (IDA).
PUNCH (X'01') ·S·
PCH
2540 punch, feed, select stacker
PUNCH BINARY (X'21') ·S·
PNCHBNR
2540 punch binary, feed, select stacker
·5·
For 1403, a GATE LOAD command must be executed
before a LOAD UCS.
PUNCH 42 (X'C1') ·S·
·PNCH42
l..OAD UCS F (X'F3') ·S·
LDCSF
1442 punch, eject, select stacker 2
PUNCH 42 BINARY (X'E1 ')·S·
PNCH42BNR
Load UCS Buffer and Fold; not for 3211
·S·
1442 punch binary/eject/select stacker
. PRINT (X'09')
PRT
READ CARD (X'02')
RCD
.
. Print with one Space after
·S·
RAISE COVER (X'6B')
RSCVR
Printer CCWs
READ FeB (X'12') ·S·
·RFCB
ALLQW DC (X'7S')
LLWDC
Allow Data Check
Read FeB 3211
BLOCK DC (X'73')
BLCKDC
READ PLB (X'02') ·S·
RDPLB
. Block Data Check
Read PLB 3211
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
GG040
I
WRITE (X'01 ') ·S·
Write without Space Warning:
ribbons.
This can destroy printer
CRT and Hard-Copy Printer CCWs
(327713278-3287)
ERASE ALL U (X'OF') ·S·
RSlL
Erase All Unprotected
ERASE/WRITE (X'05') ·5·
RSW
Command Table
If you specify WRITE CRT or ERASE WRITE CRT,
4300-FRIEND asks for the 3277 command (buffer
control order).
Set Buffer Address (X' 11') + address
Start Field (X' 10') + attribute character
Insert Cursor (X'13')
. Program Tabulator (X'05')
. Repeat to Address (X'3C') + address and 'fill'
character (DATA=)
Erase Unprotected (X' 12') + address
'Eu'
'.EM'
End of Message (X' 19') - for printer
'FF'
Forms Feed (X'OC') - for printer
'N!'
New Line (X'1S') - for printer
'CJ{,CJ{,'
ENTER key = no command
end of data stream (no code generated)
'SB'
'Sf'
. 'IC'
OPt'
'Ra'
'.a..'
:~f ~169393 J ·&. I_~_~. . ;:· ~:;.;:!o.:.·~.;:;:~:_8·....
I_ _ _ _--'-_ _ _ _ _-4.._ _ _ _··...LI_ _ _ _....1
SYS TEST 140
~ Copyright IBM Corp. '984
OO()O()OOOOOOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
...
-_ .....__ .. _--_._...-.. _-_. __ ...
------
--~------
t"
,,-.t,1'j"'('tU"
'"''';''-'W"Mri'rljfl''' I 'it"
000000000000000 0000000000 0,00000000
SYS TEST 145
Teleprocessing CCWs (270x, 370x)
POLL (X'09') ·S·
ADPREP (X'1 E') ·S·
ADp·
Poll/Autopoll
POLL SCB (X'09't ·S·
PLLS
Address Prepare
Poll SeB -SOLC Autopoll
Enter SCBs as for Control SCB command. End command
with answer on' after V-N=.
BREAK (X'OD') ·S·
BRK
CONTROL SCB (X'OS')·S·
CS
POLL SDLC (X'OF") ·S·
PLLSD
(Ctl SCB SOle -16 bytes)
Address aligned on ful/word boundary.
OFS
ADR
FlG
NSC
NSA
NRA
lOT
Enter buffer offset in decimal (default= 2).
Enter SOle station address.
Enter control flag byte' in hex:
X'SO' Inactive station (0= active).
X'40' Datapoll station (0= contact).
X'20' Send ror poll (0= rr).
X'10' Reply rnr to poll (0= rr).
Enter ns current.
Enter ns acknowledged.
Enter nr of next frame to be received.
Enter four byte identification field in hex.
PREPARE (X'OS') ·S·
PP
READ (X'02') ·S·
READ PIU (X'06')·S·
RDP
Read PIU - SOLe
SADn ·S·
SDn
SAD n -270x; n is 0, 1,2, or 3
DIAL (X'29') ·S·
DL
SET MODE (X'23')
Dial, switched line with autocall
SENSE
SNSS
sea
·S·
(X'14') ·S·
DISABLE (X'2F') ·S·
DSBL
Sense SeB SOle - 24 bytes
Disable Line
Address aligned on fullword boundary.
ENABLE (X'27"l·S·
NBL
WRAP (X'OS')
WRP
Enable Line
WRITE (X'01') • S· ,
INHIBIT (X'OA') ·S·
NHBT
WRITE PIU (X'OS') ·S·
WP
LISTEN (X'OA') • S·
LSN
Write PIU - SOle
SOlC X.2 1 switched
4381
81M 2676380
I::!q
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
GG040
I
PN 6169393 II EC A20558I
.50f6
. ~.~O~1~O~c~t~8~4~.~________________~________~________~
SYS TEST 145
SVS .TEST 150
CCW FLAGS
CCW COMMAND MODIFIERS
RIPPLE
RP
You can enter a CCW flag after a CCW command, a CCW
modifier, or another CCW flag (separated by a comma).
Note that some CCW flags are automatically set by
43OD-FRIEND. After the CCW has been specified, you
can change these flags with the 4300-FRIEND FLAG
command.
Add the following CCW command modifiers to a CCW
command for the indicated reasons. You can combine
these modifiers when needed.
Moves the data area one byte to the left for all write
CCWs.
CRT or 3277
DC (X'SO')
Requests a special 3277 data stream after WRITE and
ERASE WRITE.
Data Chaining
FROM
Uses address portion of next CCW (command chaining is
not turned on)
Specifies a symbolic I/O area is to be used.
ZERO
ZR
Clears input area of CCW before performing a Start I/O
command.
INTO
IDA (X'04')
Specifies a symbolic I/O area is to be used.
Indirect Data Addressing
LENGTH
LN
Note: This parameter must be the last one you enter in
the CCW command. 4300-FRIEND requests IDA areas
for IDAW.Do not specify a CCW command modifier with
IDA.
Data length
Reset Suppress Incorrect Length Indicator
4300-FRIEND requests key length and data field length
for the file count instead of using the amount of.data
entered from KEY= and DATA= •. For commands which
have a fixed data length assigned by 4300-FRIEND, use
LENGTH to change the fixed data length.
PCI (X'OS')
NEW
Program Controlled Interrupt
ResetCCW indicators.
Causes a channel controlled interruption. 4300-FRIEND
ignores all interrupts with PCI on in the CSW until device
end is posted in the CSW.
This modifier resets the disk indicators for:
NOSILI (resets X'20')
NSL
•
•
•
Sill (X'20')
TIC required
Seek argument not required
Set File Mask required.
RANDOM
RN
Suppress Incorrect length Indicator
Causes suppression of possible incorrect length indication
inCSW.
Generates random data, bypasses 'home address' and
'count fieids'.
SKIP (X"O')
Suppresses transfer of information to storage.
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~q
GG040
PN 6169393
.6m6
I
1.1
EC A20558
·1
.~.~O~'~O~c~t~8~4~~.________~____~__~~________~______~
SVS TEST 150
CI Copyright IBM Corp- 1984
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OO()OOOOOOO 0. OO()OOOOO
)'11
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
INSTALLATION
INST 001
Contents
Installation Time Guideline ••••....•••••.•••.•••.•.••..•
Processor and Ship Group Checkout ........................ .
INST 002
INSTD02
Final System Check ..•...........•......••...•....•. .tNST 061
Running System Test/4381 ................................ INST 0'61
Completing the Installation ................................. INST 0'61
Relocation or Discontinuance Procedure ........................ INST 0'61
Power Plug Installation (If Required) •••••.••••••••.•••••.• INST 011
Preparing the Power Cable for Plug ...............•........... INST 011
Installing the Power Plug .................................. INST 0' 11
Site and Processor Safety Checkout ...•••...••••.•..••.•. INST 012
Checking the 4381 Processor Power Plug ............••........ INST 012
Checking the Customer Power Receptacle ••••........•••••..... INST 012
Measuring the Customer Primary Power ••••••••••••.••••••
INST 015
Physical Setup ..............••.....••••.•••.••...••• INST 016
Processor Location ....................................... INST 0' 16
Channel To Channel Adapter (CTCA) Only .....•.............. INST 016
Installing
3278-2A
3279-2C
320'5 and
Operator Console. . • • • • • • • . • . • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ..
.......................•••••.•..•..•...••....
........•....•.........•••••..•.....•••••••...
Operator Control Panel ...••.........•••.....•.....
INST 0'21
INST 0'21
INST 0'22
INST 0'25
Installing Remote Support Facility (RSF) ...••....•.•....••. INST 0'31
Unpacking the Cable Box .............................•.... INST 0'31
External Cable -- Part 8482931 •..••....••••.•••••.••..• INST 032
Set Modem Adapter Card (Canada/U .S.A.) ..•...•............ INST 032
• Set Modem Adapter Card (Japan) ......•..•••.••...•.....•. INST 0'32
External Cable -- Part 8482930' (External Modem) ••••••••••• INST 035
Set Modem Adapter Card (External Modem) ...... , ........... INST 0'35
External Cable -- Part 8482934 .•••••••••••••.••••••...• INST 0'36
Set Modem Adapter Card ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. INST 036
External Cable - Part 8482933 ••••••••••.•••••••••••••• INST 0'41
Set Modem Adapter Card (External Modems) ..........•....... INST 0'41
External Cable -- Part 40'1441 •••••.•••.• ~ . • • • . . • . • • • . .• INST 0'42
Set Modem Adapter Card ....................•••......... INST 042
MSS Power-On Checks and Diagnostics ••.••.••••..••••... INST 0'45
Running MSS Extended Diagnostics •••.••.........•.. ,'........ INST 045
Running Additional MSS Tests .....•..•.....•...•. ! • • • • • • • • • INST 0'45
Running PU Diagnostics Based on Initial Install or Relocation ••••
General Instructions ....................................
OCP Checkout ..........................................
Running Cable Wrap Test (CWT) .............................
INST 0'46
INST 0'46
INST 0'46
INST 0'46
System Configuration •••••••••••••••••••••••••...•••..
3279 Display Console Aids ...........••....................
Configuration Aids ................................•..•...
Diskette Aids ...........................................
Remote Support Facility Aids ..........................•....
Patch Aids ............................................
Running Channel To Channel Adapter (CTCA) Test ................
INST 0'51
INST 0'51
INST 051
INST 0'51
INST 0'51
INST 0'51
INST 0'51
Installing Interface Cables •••••••••••••••••.••••••••••.•
INST 0'55
4381-3
BIM 2676380'
I~~g
ID Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GHOO'5
IPN 6169590'
1 of 2
EC A2O'558
0'1 Oct 84
EC A2O'559
0'3 Dec 84
EC A2O'56O'
18 Feb 85
INST 001
_i
INST 002
Installation Time Guideline
Clock Time
Area
1.0
Processor and Ship Group Checkout
Power' Plug Installation (If Required)
Site and Processor Safety Checkout
Phvsical Setup
.6
Instali Operator Console
Install RSF
2.0
1.4
MSS Power-On Checks and DiaQnostics
System Configuration
1.5
Install Interface Cables
2.0
Final System Checkout
8.5 Hours Total Install Time
Processor and Ship Group Checkout
Note: If the Remote Support Facility (RSF) feature
(8jM 1806885) was ordered, cable and coupler
assembly (part 401441) will be installed in gate
01 G. Go to "Site and Processor Safety Checkout."
DANGER
Do not touch any customer power receptacles at the
installation site until instructed in the "Site and
Processor Safety Checkout" procedure.
Start here after completing the unpacking instructions.
1.
Check the processor for physical damage.
2.
Ensure that the processor history matches the
features listed on the customer order, and notify your
manager of any differences.
3.
Ensure that possible last minute processor location
changes have not affected I/O cable lengths or power
outlets.
4.
Unpack the large shipping group package and open
the boxes. Ensure that the following items were
shipped:
Vol AOl thru AOa, COl, Operations Manual, and
the PA Guide.
RSF phone with hardware (if featured), DC? with
OCP cable, coax cable, channel wrap blocks,
CTCA interface cables (if featured), module pin
alignment template, module pin aligner, leveler
assemblies, and terminators.
5.
6.
If the RSF feature other than 81M 1806885 was
ordered, verify the correct external RSF cable is part
of the ship group. For the correct cable part number,
refer to the RSF table shown at
13.
Cable Part Number
Feature Code
8482931
8482934
8382934
8482931
401441
8482930
9510
2837
2836
2944/2943
9514
9511
QAQ,)Q~/"\
"0')') '''0')0
Verify that one DIAG1, two FUNC1, and two FUNC2
diskettes are packed in the storage pocket near the
service panel.
4391 -3
B/M 2676380
INST 002
~ Copyright IBM Corp. '984
()
o o
o () o
00000
()
o
()
o
~··l,
\I,
.J
'-...'
() 0'.1')
~,
~Ift.i
II
'-'
0000
000000000000000 0000000'000 000000000
INST 011
Power Plug Installation (If Required)
This procedure applies only in countries where the
machine is shipped without a plug on the power cable.
Because of the various styles of power plugs, This
Procedure is for Reference Only. The shield must be
properly terminated at the plug to ensure proper
grounding of the power cable.
Preparing the Power Cable for Plug
Installing the Power Plug
Note: Nonraised Floor Only. Slide the power cable
under the machine frame before connecting the power
plug.
1.
Remove the tape from the shield, and then loosen
and separate the strands.
1. Remove about 65 mm (2-5/8 in) of the cable jacket
2.
Slide the rubber insulator up against the shield.
starting at the plug end of the cable.
3.
the conductors.
4. Carefully fold the shield back over the cable jacket,
Complete the installation of the power plug by
installing the contact assembly to the proper .
conductors of the power plug. Ensure that the shell
makes contact with the shield at all places (360
degrees).
6~
Phase 1
Phase 2
Red
Phase 3
Green/Yellow
Shield
Ground
Line Cord Identification
and temporarily wrap tape to protect the shield.
5.
Black
Blue
Note: Ensure that the ground wire is slightly longer
than the adjacent wires.
2. Unbraid (do not cud, and carefully comb out the
3. Remove the Mylar separator and cable filler exposing
Line
Cord
The following steps show you how to attach one style of
the power plug to the line cord.
Review the figure before starting, and refer to this figure
during the procedure.
shield exposing the cable core.
Line Cord Identification
Install clamp, rubber insulator, and connector shell
over the cable core.
Line
Cord
Remove 14 mm (9/16 in~ of insulation from the
conductors.
Blue
Neutral
Black
Phase 1
Black
Phase 2
Brown
Phase 3
Green/Yellow
Shield
Ground
• For 220V wiring, tie the neutral to the line cord.
Cable Bulk
Clamp
Connector Shell
Contact Assembly
Green/Yellow
Phase 3 (Red)
J......,.....--- Ground (Green/Yellow)
Phase 2 (Blue)--....
14
4381-3
B/M 2676380
~ Copyright IBM Corp. '984
Phase 1 (Black)
INST 011
INST 012
Site and Processor Safety Checkout
Tools required:
CE Tool Kit
Checking the Customer Power
Receptacle
CE Meter (part 8496278)
If any problems are found:
High Voltage Test Probes (parts 1749249 and
1749250).
•
Alert the responsible Field Manager.
•
Call your Installation Planning Representative OPR) for
assistance.
This procedure must be performed to ensure that the
installation environment is safe. For plug and receptacle
Place a CHECK MARK next
pin locations, see figure
to each completed step.
13.
Checking the 4381 Processor Power
Plug
Repair all IBM product problems if any are found.
1.
Verify CB 1 and CB2 are in the OFF position.
2.
Make the following resistance measurements; a
reading of less than . 1 ohm shows a safe
grounding conductor.
a.
b.
3.
Measure the resistance between the
ground pin of the processor power plug
and the processor frame.
Measure the resistance between the
processor power plug shell and the
processor frame. If there is no plug,
measure between the green/yellow wire
and the processor frame.
•
DANGER
With ths customer branch CB in the OFF position,
do not touch the extsrior shell of the customer
receptacle with anything except the test probes
until you have completed step 2.
Note: Water pipes, raised floors, and electrical conduit
MA Y be connected to building ground; therefore, provide
a usable ground reference. If you are unable to locate
building ground, contact your IPR for assistance.
,.
Ensure that the customer branch CB is in the
OFF position.
2.
Perform the following voltage measurements; all
voltage values should be less than 1 Vac.
a.
Make the following resistance measurements; a
value greater than 2000 ohms shows a safe
processor power plug.
c.
b.
Measure the phase-ta-phase resistance
of the processor power plug.
Measure the resistance between the
ground pin of the customer receptacle
to the exterior shell.
b.
Measure the resistance between the
ground pin of the customer receptacle
to the building ground.
Note: Digital meters may give unstable
readings if leakage current is flowing in the
building ground circuit. If the reading
appears unstable or greater than 1 ohm,
use an ECOS 1020, 1023, or equivalent
to measure ground impedance only. If the
resistance is less than 1 ohm, the
customer receptacle has a safe ground.
Power must not be applied to the processor if the building
ground cannot be located and verified.
b.
Measure the resistance from the phase
pins to the processor power piug sheiL
a.
Notify the customer of the problem.
Note: If the resistance values are less than . 1
ohm, the processor power plug has a safe
ground. Continue this procedure.
a.
Make the following resistance
3. measurements; a reading of less than 1
ohm shows a safe grounding conductor.
4.
Perform the following voltage measurements of
the customer receptacle; all voltage values
should be less than 1 Vae.
Measure the voltage between the
exterior shell of the customer receptacle
and the building ground.
a.
Measure the phase-to-phase voltage.
b.
Measure the phase-to-ground voltage.
c.
(World Trade Only) Measure
phase-to-neutral voltage (if present).
d.
(World Trade Only) Measure
neutral-to-ground voltage (if present).
Measure the voltage between the
ground pin of the customer receptacle
and the building ground.
Notes:
1. If voltage values are less than 1 Vac, continue.
(World Trade Only) Measure the voltage
between the neutral of the customer
receptacle (if present) and the building
ground.
2. Ensure that the language on all safety labels match
the country to which the processor is being installed.
Refer to "4381 Processor Safety Inspection Guide"
for the correct locations and part numbers.
Note: If the voltage values are less than 1 Vac,
the customer receptacle is safe to touch.
Phase Pins
Ground
4381-3
81M 2676380
e Cop~ght IBM Corp.
I~~g
Power Plug
Customer Receptacle
GH010
INST 012
19B4
!
(0000000000
o o
00
o o
00 00
,~
I)
I
""'""
o o
o
o
·
JI
!fi*'Wt'ftdlt'rld'!dIU
"f
+'
Jt'!t'It'It'r!r!\jI@f'''I'd hWemry'"",,#,W= ' 1=" "'t"" ''''IBI!
w,
-.r··"'W?b'p'-U]"h,wrmrml"4w'\'w"rir· ...nt'rre.'" btbzti&'
, : " "'" " , "" : "
,r "" I 'lU'gr' 'P,"!!::,I,I,"", " . , ' 1\ '"
11
"I\J l'jIl
dIllWNt"r:ere""
Ed""
J
\IL, II
'lijbtbM' ,
't:riw"
"m"
,It,
¥Ni''''':'! W ""Hr',=t
...,' 1#'+ "./:0 "r'H m •
t
!""
"f"
r,w", ,ft!!!!!!I!II""'rIr""l!ljdlU"W.'.,.','ti.t· ..,, ."
. ''''rt'''trif( 1"*
0, 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 0--0-0--=0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • • 0 0 0
....
ttW't'M"Mt
o
',(
0----0-0-0 0 0 0
d.
DANGER
This procedure must not be performed until you
have completed the following procedures.
"Checking the 4381 Processor Power Plug"
"Checking the Customer Power Receptacle"
Do not touch the internal parts of the customer
receptacle with anything except the test probes.
e.
Place the customer branch CB in the ON
position.
Measure the voltage between the
exterior shell of the customer receptacle
and the building ground.
b.
Measure the voltage between the
ground pin of·the customer receptacle
and the exterior shell.
Impedance-grounded neutral power
systems only. Measure the voltage
between neutral of the customer
receptacle. and building ground. If the
.voltage is greater than .10 Vac, check
the phase fault indicator for a phase
fault and notify the customer. Do not
continue until the phase fault is
corrected.
Measure the phase-to-phase voltage of
the customer receptacle. Continue only
if the voltage values measured meet the
requirements as indicated in chart
m.
2. Perform the following voltage measurements; all
voltage values should be· less than 1 Vae.
a.
O~
INST 015
Measuring the Customer Primary Power
1.
It'd·' .,«11...,
f.
_
g.
II 50/60 Hertz Primary Power Voltage
Nominal
50 Hz
200
220
380
400
415
60 Hz
200
208
220
240
Minimum
Maximum
180
193
333
350
363
220
238
410
432
448
180
180
193
208
220
220
238
254
Check the voltage label on the cover of
the Primary Control Compartment (PCC)
box to ensure the processor is correctly
wired for the customer outlet. If there
is a problem, see Volume C01, "Power
Logics" on page YA081 for proper
wiring, or invoke your support structure.
Place the customer branch CB in the
OFF position.
c.
(World Trade only) Measure the voltage
between the neutral of the customer
receptacle and the building ground.
Note: If the voltage values are less
than 1 Vac, the customer receptacle is
safe.
m
Phase Pins
\
Ground
Power Plug
Customer Receptacle
4381
B/M 2676380
• Copyright IBM Corp. '984
INST 015
Physical Setup
INST 016
Leveling Pads (4X)
Processor Location
1. The cable ent~nd exit holes in the processor frame
are shown at iii. The opening in the subfloor hole
must be large enough to accommodate aliI/a,
Power, and Power Control Interface (PCI) cables.
1m
Note: Excessive cold air on the Air Flow Sensors
can cause a power-on failure.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the I/O cable cover 01 E, and route the
power cable through the frame opening.
Install two plate assemblies (part 401502) under the
-frame as shown at
Adjust the levelers until the
casters are free to rotate. The levelers will stabilize
the processor.
iii .
~,
t.:1L..lJ
Top View of Frame
Front
For nonraised floor installations only.
a.
Remove two setscrews shown at
II·
Plate Assembly
b. -Remove rubber 0 ring, and slide locking collar
away from power plug.
c.
Slide the power plug under the processor frame.
d.
For replacement reverse the procedure.
Note:_ Ensure that the a ring is seated in the
grooved area of the plug.
5.
(Japan only). For machines with B/M -1806743,
install leveler retainers as shown at
6.
Install cable tie (part 2637668) from the frame
support shown at
to the cable.
7.
Connect the power plug to the customer receptacle.
m·
II
_ /Retainer Clip
Channel-To-Channel Adapter (CTCA) Only
ForCTCA switch settings, see Volume A06, Service Aids,
"CTCA Switch Settings."
~---...
-
--
,
4381
81M 2676380
INST 016
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
0- 0 0 0 0----0-0---0 0 -0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0
O~-O--O----
0 0 0 0 0
o
0-
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INST 021
Installing Operator Console
8.
CAUTION
The weight of the display console is approximately
36 kg (80 Ib). Get aid in lifting.
Perform the offline test using the 3278 Model 2A
Display Console Maintenance Information, Order No.
SY27-2546.
9.
Connect all optional printers or displays to gate 0 1F
at positions 1, 2, or 3.
Note: For the correct setup procedures, see 3278-2A
Setup Instructions, and follow normal safety practices.
10. If RSF is featured on this processor, go to IN ST 03 1.
1. The operator console consists of a keyboard with the
11. If RSF is not featured on this processor, go to INST
3278-2A
operator control panel (OCP) and display console unit.
This unit is placed on the operator console table.
2.
3.
--
045.
Remove the cover on gate 01F/01H as shown at
a·
RDR
Ground
Post
Connect the coaxial cable (part 5578477) to the
display console, route the cable to gate 01 F. and
connect to socket 0 as shown at
m.
Note: If the processor was shipped with a
stand-alone OCP, do not use it with the 3278-2A
console. Disconnect the the OCP cable (part
401462) from the OCP unit. This cable connects the
3278-2A to the processor. The OCP unit should be
left on-site with the customer.
4:
3278·2A Display Console
(Front View)
Connect the OCP cable (part 401462) to the display
console, route the cable to gate 01 F, and connect to
socket J 1 and ground tab as shown at
KEYBD
Processing Unit 01 F Gate
10
Optional
Printers or
Displays
20
To Processor
1iJ·
5.
Install the EMC clamp (part 167338) to the OCP
cable, and then fasten the clamp to the grounding
stud
using a flat washer (part 1622305),
lockwasher (part 1622319), and nut (part.
1622404).
iii
6.
Connect the power cord to the customer-supplied
outlet.
Note: If the display has a Security Lock feature,
ensure that the key is in the ON position.
7.
Replace the cover on gate 01 F/0 1H.
m1
Right Side ,
__ ..,//
4381-3
81M 2676380
10 Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
INST 021
INST 022
8.
3279-2C
CAUTION
The weight of the display console' is approximately
36 kg (80 Ib). Get aid in lifting.
9.
Perform the offline test using the 3279 Display
Terminal Maintenance Information, Order No.
SY33-0069.
3279·2C Display Console
(Back View)
Connect all optional printers or displays to gate 01 F
at positions 1, 2, or 3.
Note: For the correct setup procedures, see 3279-2C
Setup Instructions, and follow normal safety practices.
10. If RSF is featured on this processor, go to INST 031.
1.
The operator console consists of a keyboard with the
operator control panel (OCP) and display console unit.
The unit is placed on the operator console table.
11. If RSF is not featured on this processor, go to INST
045.
2.
Remove the cover on gate 01 F/01 H as shown ~t
fl·,"'
3.
Connect the coaxial cable (part 5578477)to'the
display console, route the cable to gate 01 F, and
connect to socket 0 as shown at
m·
Note: If the-processor was shipped with a
stand-alone.OGP, 'do not use it with the 3279-2C
console. Disconnect the the acp cable (part
401462) from the acp unit. This cable connects the
3279-2C to the processor. The acp unit should be
left on-site with the customer.
4.
Processing Unit 01 F Gate
Connect the OCP cable (part 401462) to the display
console, route the cable to gate 01 F, and connect to
socket J 1 and the ground tab shown at
a.
5.
Install the EMC clamp (part 167338) to the acp
cable, and then fasten the clamp to the grounding
stud
using a flat washer (part 1622305),
lockwasher (part 1622319), and nut (part
1622404).
Optional
Printers
Displays
EJ
6.
Connect the power cord to the customer-supplied
outlet.
Note: If the display has a Security Keylock feature,
ensure that the key is in the ON position.
7.
Replace the cover on gate 01F/01H.
81M 2676380
I
o Cepyright IBM Corp.
1984
4381-3
MI
I,
PN 6169593
II
l
EC A20558
EC A2",:,
~21~"
Oct 8:4 .: 3(\) _;....:.... ,,:.:
~Se=!~GH::.·:;::0;.::2~O_.....L.:.2::..;:::,;of:..:2=--_ _...I". 01
00000000000'0
INST 022
0,00000000000 000000
()
o
...."".tj'rttWW,ttt
o
000000000000000000000000 000000000
INST 025
9.
3205 and Operator Console Panel
Replace the cover on gate 01F/01 H.
10. Connect a/l optional printers or displays to gate 01 F
at positions 1, 2, or 3.
CAUTION
The weight of the display console is about 20 kg (45
Ib). Get aid in lifting.
11. If RSF is featured on this processor, go to INST 031.
Note: For the correct setup procedures, see 3205 Color
Display Console Maintenance Information, and follow
normal safety practices.
12. If RSF is not featured on this processor, go to INST
045.
1 . The color display console consists of a keyboard,
video unit, and logic unit. The OCP is part of the
processor ship group.
2. Place the Color Display Console and the OCP on the
Front View 3205
operator console table.
3.
Install OCP plate (part 401345) under the right end
of the console base, and place the OCP on top of the
plate adjacent to the keyboard as shown
g.
4.
Remove the cover on gate 01 F/01 H as shown at
5.
Connect the coaxial cable (part 5578477) to the
display console, route the cable to gate 0 1F, and
connect to socket 0 as shown at
m·
Coaxial Cable
Processing Unit 01 F Gate
1i1-
6.
Route the DC? cable (part 401462) from the OCP to
gate 01 F, and connect the cable to J 1 position and
connect the ground tab shown at
m.
7.
DCP Plate
Install the EMC clamp (part 167338) to the OCP
cable, and then fasten the clamp to the grounding
stud
using a flat washer (part 1622305),
lockwasher (part 1622319), and nut (part
1622404).
Optional
Printers or
Displays
II
8. Connect the power cord to the customer-supplied
outlet.
Note: The display has a Security Keylock feature;
ensure that the key is in the ON position.
/
4381
B/M 2676380
IMI
IPN
6169594
II
EC A20558
L.!:::Se::!:g~G:::.:H:.:.;0::::.:2::.:5:::'---J....:1:...;o::!.:f,-1':"'-_ _--I__ 01 Oct 84
I
I
EC A20560
_ 18 Feb 85 _
~J
Right Side" _
~/
-"
11\1 ~T
n.".::
I
I'
0000000000000000000000000000000000
r-'''''rai'·''
i
11"d##!
000000000000000000000.000 000000000
INST 031
Installing Remote Support Facility (RSF)
Note: If this installation does not include the Remote
Support Facility feature. go to page INST 045.
This section describes the installation of the RSF cable to
gate 01G.
Unpacking the Cable Box
If feature B/M 1806885 was ordered, cable assembly
(part 401441) is installed in gate 01 G; go to page INST
042 to continue the cable installation.
1.
For external cable (part 8482931), go to page INST
032.
2.
For external cable (part 8482930), go to page INST
035.
3.
For external cable (part 8482934), go to pagelNST
036.
4.
For external cable (part 8482933), go to page INST
041.
5.
For external cable (part 401441). go to page INST
042.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~g
GH030
IPN
6169595
1 of 2
ECA20558
'01 Oct 84
01G-CCA1
PCC
Front View
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
II\I~T
n~1
INST 032
External Cable -- Part 8482931
1.
m
iii· '
m
locate and remove the cover
loosening screws
and
III
2.. Connect RSF external cable
shown.
on gate 01 G by
to 01 G-CCA 1 as
II to gate 01G (as shown).
3.
Connect cable shield
4.
Route RSF external cable through opening adjacent to
gate 01G.
'5.
Install tie wrap (part 5270166) to the external cable,
and fasten it to the adjacent frame support shown at
using screw (part 1621230).
II
6.
7.
Reinstall the cover
m·
•
Set Modem Adapter Card (Japan)
1.
Remove card (part 8564508) from 01 A-A204.
1.
Remove card (part 5688021) from 01 A-A204.
2.
Set all rocker switches to the OFF position.
2.
Set all rocker switches to the OFF position.
3.
Set rocker switch K to the ON position.
3.
Set rocker switches AA, BB,
the ON position.
4.
Use the Transmit DBM chart to match rocker
switches A through I to levels specified on the
coupler (X=ON).
4.
Use the Transmit DBM chart to match the rocker
switch settings A through Hand R levels shown on
the coupler (X=ON).
5.
If no level is shown, use the -8 dbm settings.
6.
Insta" the card in 01A-A2Q4.
7.
Go to page INST 045.
5.
If level is not shown, use the -8 dbm settings.
6.
Install the card in 01 A-A2Q4.
7.
Go to page INST 045.
II by tightening screws III and
Do one of the following to complete the RSF external
cable installation:
•
Set Modem Adapter Card (Canada/U.S.A.)
ce, DO, l, M, and N to
Rocker
Switches
0- 1 ·2 ·3 ·4 ·5 • 6 ·7· B ·9·10·11·12·13·14·15·16·17·18
X
X
X
X
X
X
B
X
X
X
C_
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
E
X
X
X
F
G_
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
H
X
R
Rocker
Switches
To connect external cable, part 8482931
(Japan), see B/M 1864633 contained within
B/M 4143541.
Transmit DBM
O· 1 ·2 . 3·4 5 6 7 8 . 9 10 11 1213 14 15161718
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
)(
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
Rocker Switch •
Identification
On Off
R
P
H
G
N
M
F
L
K
J
I
)(
Component Side
E
0
C
I~~g
«> Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GH030
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec'84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
On Off
I
CC
P
G
N
M
E
L
K
J
I
BS
AA
Component Side
F
0
C
B
A
.,. On Off
1
I
B
A
On Off
,
I
IPN
6169595
2 of 2
On Off
R
H
A_ X
To connect e~,ternal cable, part 8482931
(Canada/U.S.A.), first connect adapter (part
1853134) and then refer to coupler.
4381-3
81M 2676380
Rocker Switch
Identification
Transmit DBM
if
"~
...
m~
INST 032
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ()OOOOOOOO
l
d ''1rt''t''e#'' CH"',rr'uj'lIM;",m.!ii;pl"," 'Wi I, uVimrut'Ut"nuww"M''' j"
""
'it-.,·nit'lrn?W nIIW,,:,ItU"RrV"'"YBt-fmnumiMrrl#W'trH W Irb 'I,," f W"" I"
J"fMW'WKWmHMir "
·''t'urt':'w·ritt'
:c'/"
;,f"%ffl'tirU
!
'Wry' I 'tWg-wvrrnWlI!d!f
DOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
INST 035
External Cable -- Part 8482930
(External Modem)
1.
Locate and remove the cover
loosening screws
and
m e.
Set Modem Adapter Card (External
Modem)
E1 on gate 01 G by
iii to 01 G-CCA 1
2.
Connect RSF external cable
position.
3.
Connect cable shield
4.
Route RSF external cable through the opening
adjacent to gate 01 G.
5.
Install tie wrap (part 5270166) to the external cable,
and fasten it to the adjacent frame support shown at
using screw (part 1621230).
II to gate 01G as shown.
1.
Remove card (part 5864668) from 01A-A2Q4.
2.
Verify that positions 0 and F have jumpers installed.
3.
Install the card in 01A-A2Q4.
4.
Go to pagelNST 045.
..
-
D E
U·
II
6.
Reinstall the cover
[i.
7.
a
by tightening screws
II and
Connect external cable connector (part 8482930)
to the customer supplied modem.
Component Side
m
J
8. To complete this cable installation, see your modem
A2Q4
instructions.
4381 -3
B/M 2676380
(Reference Only)
I
MI
I
PN 6169596
II ~c
A20558
LS::=;e:::.:q1.....::G:.:..H:..::0:.::::3:.::::5_~.1~of;....::2~_ _...... ' 01 Oct 84
~ Coovriaht IBM Caro 1984
I
I
EC A20560
. 18 Feb 85 .
IN~T
n~"
INST 036
Set Modem Adapter Card
External Cable -- Part 8482934
1• Locate and remove the cover
loosening screws
and
III
El
EI on gate 01 G by
m
2.
Place foam pad (part 401478)
shown.
3.
Place the RSF external cable assembly
the foam pad in gate 01 G.
4.
on gate 01G as
Install retainer bracket (part 401479)
(part 1621176).
m
II on top of
.
1.
Remove card (part 5167246) from 01A-A2Q4.
2.
Set all rocker switches to the OFF position.
3.
Set rocker switches I, J, K, P, and N to the ON
position.
4.
Use the Transmit DBM chart to match rocker
switches A through Hand R to levels specified on the
coupler (X=ON).
5.
If no level is shown, use the -8 dbm settings.
6.
Install the card in 01A-A2Q4.
7.
Go to page INST 045.
II using screw
m
5.
Install ground wire
to housing
using screw
(part 1621190) and washer (part 1622346).
6.
Install connector
7.
Route TB 1 cable
through opening adjacent to
gate 01 G to location of the telephone coupler.
8.
Install tie wrap (part 5270166) to the external cable
and fasten it to the adjacent frame support shown at
using screw (part 1621230).
II to 01 G-CCA 1.
II
II
9.
Reinstall the cover
a·
m
by tightening screws
.
III and
/
fa
Note: For a detailed description of TB 1 wiring, refer
to Volume A06, Service Aids "Line Plate
Configuration (World Trade)."
10. To complete the RSF external cable installation,
contact your telephone company representative.
Rocker
Switches
Rocker Switch
Identification
Transmit DBM
0- 1 ·2 ·3·4·5·6 .7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.15-15°17.18
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
On Off
R
H
P
G
N
F
E
M
D
L
K
C
J
B
I
A
On Off
Component Side
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X
X
X
X X X X X X
H
R
X
J
I
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
~ Copyright IBM Corp. '984
o
I
II
I
I
MI
PN 6169596
EC A20558
EC A20560
L-S::.e:;,,:9:L...=G:.:,.H,:.:0;,.=3;,.=5_-I..:.2::....:;.:of:...,:2::.-_ _....I• • 01 Oct 84 . 18 Feb 85 .
I
INST 036
0 0' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INST 041
Set Modem Adapter Card (External
Modems)
ExternaloCable -- Part 8482933
Ii! on gate 01 G by
1.
Locate and remove the cover
loosening screws
and
2.
Install the RSF external cable assembly
m
1.
Remove card (part 5864668) from 01 A-A2Q4.
2.
Verify that positions D and F have jumpers installed.
01GII·
3.
Install the card in 01A-A204.
3.
Route the cable assembly through the opening
adjacent to gate 01 G and then to the location of
telephone coupler.
4.
Go to page INST 045.
4.
Install the two mounting screws (part 1621176) and
the two flat washers (part 1622304) shown at
5.
Connect the cable shield
6.
Ii·
m
into gate
g.
m·
m
to gate
II
01Gsho~n at
Connect the ground wire
using the screw (part
1621190) and washer (part 162346)
to gate
01 G shown at
13
II·
Component Side
m
f
7.
Connect cable
to 01 G-CCA 1.
8.
Install tie wrap (part 5270166) to the external cable,
and fasten it to the adjacent frame support shown at
using screw (part 1621230).
J
A2Q4
(Reference Only)
m
9.
Reinstall the cover
[i.
a
by tightening screws
01 G·CCA 1--.p...;~. t
m
and
10. Connect external cable connector (part 8482933)
to cable connector (part 1727744)
m·
iii
11. To complete this cable installation, see your modem
instructions.
(Female Connector!
(Male Connector)
Modem Side
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I
MI
I
PN 6169597
II
L...:S
::;.:e::,::9L,..;:G:;,;H:,;:O;..,;;4,:;O_...J.".1.;.....;;..of;;...;2
_____.......
~ Coovriahr IBM Ctvn~ 1!U14
I
EC A20558\ EC A20560
. 01 Oct 84 • 18 Feb 85 .
II\I~T
n41
INST 042
Set Modem Adapter Card
External Cable -- Part 401441
1.
Locate and remove the cover
mandB·
E1 by loosening screws
iii
2.
Route cable
through the opening adjacent to gate
01 G and then to the telephone.
3.
Ensure that the 01 G-CCA 1 connector
seated.
4.
Reinstall the cover
B·
II is properly
E1 by tightening screws mand
1.
Remove card (part 8564508) from 01 A-A2Q4.
2.
Set all rocker switches to the OFF position.
3.
Use the Transmit DBM chart to match rocker
switches A through I to the 0 dbm level (X=ON).
4.
Set rocker switch J to the ON position.
5.
Install the card in 01A-A2Q4.
6.
Go to page INST045.
.~
lused
~
I
m
I
Note: The unpacking, assembly, and connection of
the IBM supplied telephone is TOT ALL Y the
responsibility of the customer and is NOT to be
performed by the ISM service representative.
5.
Give the customer the box labeled part 4494964,
which contains the IBM supplied telephone.
'-t:..;',
Rocker
Switches
Rocker Switch
Identification
Transmit OBM
0- 1 ·2·3·4·5·6 ·7·8 ·9·10·11-12·13·14·15·16·17·18
X
A
B
C
0
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
G_
H_
I-
X
X
X
X
F
X
~
X
X
X
X
X
X X X X X X
X
X
X X X X X X
X
On Off
R
H
P
G
F
N
E
M
L
0
K
C
J
B
I
A
On Off
Component Side
.From~r~sor
I
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~g
CCl Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
0
t)
GH040
INST 042
O' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
IIJIJ
II I·'
'd.r,·'
,. I'd'·"··'·'" m
ijdL!t'J, II
·s·'.·
'[1"1
t
•••• J.
'd
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
INST 045
MSS Power-On Checks and Diagnostics
Note: If a processor failure occurs while performing the
following instructions, go to Volume AO 1, "Start Repair
Procedure," on page START 001. Once the failure has
been corrected, return to the point in the instructions
from where you left.
Running MSS Extended Diagnostics
1. Ensure the Unit Emergency Only switch is in the On
position and the customer branch CB is in the ON
position.
Running Additional MSS Tests
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to Normal.
2.
Set the I/O Power Hold switch to I/O Power Hold.
Note: A error message is displayed on the operator
console screen if ports 1, 2, or 3 on gate 01 Fare
unused.
3.
Set the Power Off switch to Power Off.
1.
Power on all displays/printers, and ensure that all
device switches are set to the Normal position.
4.
Install the DIAG 1 diskette into ·diskette drive 1.
2.
Key in the two-digit code for each selected test, and
press ENTER.
2. Diskette drives 1 and 2 are unloaded.
5.
Set the Power Off switch to Normal.
3. Ensure that the operator console is powered on.
6.
Press Power On. The Basic and Extended
Diagnostics (FF) start to run.
3.
Follow the instructions displayed on the operator
console screen.
Notes:
a.
Run Test AO against diskette drive 1 and
diskette drive 2.
b.
Run test EO ONLY if external cable 8482930 or
8482933 is installed.
MSS Test Selection.
4. Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode, the Power Off
switch to Normal, and verify the following.
a.
5.
7.
CP 1, CB 1, and CB2 are in the ON position at the
pec.
b.
CP2 is in the ON position (all 50 Hz and 60 Hz
Japan machines).
c.
The 5 Volt, 24 Volt, Basic Check, and MBC On
indicators are on.
CE
DO
EO
The message MSS EXTENDED DIAGNOSTICS
COMPLETED is displayed when the tests are
completed.
Run Service Panel diagnostics
Run DDA/Drive tests
Test all console/printer ports
Run RSF adapter diagnostics
Run RSF cable wrap test (EIA interface only)
Note: For additional information, see "Optional MSS
Diagnostics," under Diagnostics in this volume.
Note: Errors are indicated by the stop words displayed
on the service panel or by a reference code shown on the
console.
Press Power On at the service panel, and verify the
following:
a.
The Power In Process indicator is on.
b.
After about 30 seconds, 81504 appears in the
MSS Code display indicating the SP ROS
diagnostics ran error free.
Normal
CE
Mode
6.
90
AO
Press Lamp Test, and verify that the remaining
service panel lights are now on.
Power
On
Normal
Power
Off
Normal
I/O
B
0
E3
B
c:::J
c::J
c::J
t::J
c:::J
c:::J
Power In
Process
Power
Basic
24 Volt
Check
MBC
On
5 Volt
Complete
1Check
Reset
IIML
I
Power
Hold
MSS Code
I II
Logic
Reset
I/O Power
Hold
I
I
c:::J
Power
Code
Lamp
Test
Unit Emergency Only
,---
g
On
Emergency
Power Off
Service Panel (Front View)
4381-3
81M 2676380
(I)
(
~~q
Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GH045
IPN
1
6169598
of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
INST 045
INST 046
Running PU Diagnostics Based on Initial
Install or Relocation
Notes:
9.
1.
Ensure that channel 0 is terminated.
2.
If a failure should occur, correct the failure and restart
this test.
3.
8.
Key in QWW, press ENTER.
OCP Checkout
Running Cable Wrap Test (CWT)
a.
1.
Set the Power Off switch to Power Off and then back
to Normal on the service panel.
1.
Ensure that the CE Mode switch is in CE Mode.
2.
Ensure the FUNC 1 diskette is in diskette drive 1.
2.
Set the CE Mode switch to Normal.
3.
Install DIAG 1 diskette in diskette drive 2.
3.
The indicators on the OCP are not on at this point.
4.
4.
Press Power On/IML on the OCP. Enter the needed
information on the Time-of-Day screen. Verify that
the Power Complete indicator is on.
Key in QG, and press ENTER to display the
Diagnostic Mode PU Diagnostic Selection screen.
5.
Select Option C, and press ENTER.
6.
Select PU side O.
7.
Select 02 for Cable Wrap Test after the Channel Test
Selection screen is displayed.
8.
Run CWT on all channels attached to PU O.
The Power Complete indicator is now on.
10. Press MODE SEL.
Perform Language Configuration first, only if
another keyboard other than the U.S. console
keyboard is used. See Volume A06, Service Aids,
"Language Configuration."
General Instructions
11. Key in OG, and press ENTER to display the
Diagnostic Mode PU Diagnostic Selection screen.
12. Select the correct option.
Note: When either option is selected, all available
Basic and MSMD diagnostics are run against PU 1
and PU 0 hardware.
a.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install FUNC 1 diskette into diskette drive 1 and
FUNC2 diskette into diskette drive 2.
Key in T, and press ENTER.
2)
Key in Y, and press ENTER.
Note:
b.
Press IML at the service panel.
Do not terminate this test.
RELOCATION-Option I (Isolate Failure)
Note: If Option T is run at this time and
reconfiguration has occurred, a message is
displayed on the operator screen indicating that
the hardware is reconfigured. Run Option I at
this time.
Enter date and time.
Go to Volume AD6, Service Aids, and perform
"System Configuration-Service."
Note: For the correct system configuration
information, use the printout packaged with the
diskettes.
7.
1)
Note: If this machine has the channel to channel
feature, the Chan-Chan Disabled indicator is on or off
as the Channel-To-Channel switch is pressed.
5.
Remove DIAG 1 diskette from diskette drive 1.
Note: If the processor that you are installing DOES
NOT have a printout packaged with the diskettes go
to step 8.
6.
INITIAL INSTALL-Option T
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode.
Note: Ignore the message "PORT x CONFIG
ERROR."
5.
Key in UC, and press ENTER.
1)
Key in I, and press ENTER.
2)
Key in None, and press ENTER.
3)
Key inY, and press ENTER.
4)
To terminate this test, press and hold ALT
and then press MODE SEL.
6.
Press Lamp Test on the OCP, and verify that the
Power In Process, Power Complete, Basic Check,
System, Wait, and Chan-Chan Disabled (if CTCA is
featured) indicators are on.
Press Power Off on the OCP, and verify that machine
powers down.
7.
Set the CE Mode switch to CE Mode. The Basic
Check indicator is now on.
8.
Press Power On/IML on the OCP, and verify that the
processor does not power up.
Note: Detailed run instructions and test options are
displayed on the operator console.
9.
Key in option E.
10. Select Option C, and press ENTER.
11. Select PU side 1.
9.
Press Power On on the service panel, the processor
will now power up. Key in the needed information on
the Time-of-Day screen. When the OWW screen is
displayed, enter UC. Verify that power is complete.
10. Press Power On/IML on the OCP. The processor will
IML and the General Selection Screen appears.
12. Select 02 for Cable Wrap Test after the Channel Test
Selection screen is displayed.
13. Run CWT on all channels attached to PU 1.
Note: Detailed run instructions and test options are
displayed on the operator console.
14. Key in option E.
15. After completing this test, remove DIAG1 from
diskette drive 2, and install FUNC2 in diskette drive
2.
After performing "System Configuration-Service,"
continue with step 8 on this page.
4381-3
81M 2676380
ICI Copyright IBM Corp. 19B4
PN 6169598
2 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
EC A20560
18 Feb 85
INST 046
o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00- 0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
='
',1'1"" ,It
t ":r[IC' 'Urf,,""«
'tlM·".W
4' 'd' '.!4W4llltj,rr't1"g'=w"'Mt
I
'j"
j"'!"
11,11.',
f ,I, t"'#dtt"t'
tit, Wb":,rw"t':tli'" ", ••14:'''41:' !"'W'N9'it t t'IIM'rlll"'iw:!I!t!,'U
L
',tM.""".,j, .;." ~'q·"',.,"-"'"V""wm
"rinriwlm,,!"Hdd'll, 'Ptib.4n'£&W'f' 'tt'r ml , "'1 MH=;' ..... '# - "'! 'tfm" r'it!
fill
'iI, 2 "C'",''''f''flQ!'M!w",-';''Mi'fH b J ,'!·' I,n"f.t! ""! W".N'uit.....••w.ju"WN.{t"%'!;M¥W,[[·\I'1!!I!"frI'UHHt
t'I'
'.I
I
"L y;&L·t
WU1l1L,,·I!. n',..
illl!""V'''''''f'''''!F' "'4''''#t tim' m;1t 1m
. . . . . . . . ,,,,",, ",I, ••
,t' 't,··tlte·· 1ft'!
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INST 051
System Configuration
The following procedures are contained in Volume A06,
Service Aids. Perform these procedures now.
Note: Perform Language Configuration first, only if
another keyboard other than the U.S. console
keyboard is used.
Remote Support Facility Aids
Diskette Aids
Patch Aids
Perform the following RSF procedures at installation:
Perform the following diskette procedures at installation:
Perform the following patch procedure at installation:
•
"Send Service Information (Problem Analysis)"
•
"Language Configuration" (if required)
•
•
"Remote Operator Console Facility (ROCF)" (if
applicable)
•
"Module Transfer."
Running Channel-To-Channel Adapter
(CTCA) Test
•
"Data Bank Initialization."
3279 Display Console Aids
Perform the following procedure if the system has a
3279-2C Display Console attached:
•
"3279 Display Console Adjustment."
Configuration Aids
"Patch Installation" (if applicable).
Note:
Ensure that Channel 0 is terminated.
To run this test, both sides of the CTCA (X and Y) must
be cabled to channels on the same processor. Before
running this test, verify that the channels are operational.
For details on the CTCA tests, see Volume A06, Service
Aids, "CTCA Tests."
Perform the following configuration procedures at
installation:
•
"System Configuration-Customer"
•
I/O Configuration
"I/O Configuration (S/370)" for 5/370 mode of
operation.
"S/370XA Installation" for 370-XA mode of
operation.
•
"Customer Data and Security Control (Problem
Analysis)"
4381-3
81M 2676380
MI
I PN 6169599 II EC A20558 I EC A20560 I"
Ia...;S:::.;e:::.::q:L-,;:G:.:H..:;O:::.::5:::.::0:---,"...:1.-.;o:;.;f_1~_ _ _. " 01 Oct 84 "18 Feb 85 "
II\I~T
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01[
I',
00000000000 00000000000000 000000000
Installing Interface Cables
INST 055
1.
Set the CE Mode switch to Normal, and set the
Power Off switch to Power Off.
2.
Plug the Power Control Interface (PCI) cables into the
010 110 rack as shown at
EJ .
a.
Start with position 1 (top l.eft socked on the PCI
panel located at OlD.
b.
Remove the yellow wire jumper from its plug
position.
c.
Plug the PCI cables in numerical order until aI/
PCI cables are plugged.
d.
0
D 0
0
DO
D
DO
0
D DO
9DO
o
0
Install the yellow wire jumper next to the last
position plugged with the PCI cables.
2
3. Connect channel cables to gate OlE as shown at
5
To prevent cable interference, install channel
cables in a left-to-right sequence.
6
4.
Ensure that ALL channels are terminated with
370 type terminators BUS (part 2282675) and
TAG (part 2282676).
Connect CTCA cables to gate 01 H as shown at
pee
K03
K04
K05
K06
K07
K08
K09
Kl0
S
B
5. If the processor has an interrupt cable that must be
connected to the processor, go to Volume A06,
Service Aids, "External Interrupts" for more details.
6.
K02
4
Notes:
b.
KOl
Con9
3
. .
m
a.
D
1
Reinstall gates OlE and 01 F/01 H covers.
Al
A2
A3
A4
AS
A6
A7
AS
Bus
In
Tag
In
Bus
Out
Tag
Out
Bus
In
Tag
In
Bus
Out
Tag
Out
X
X
X
X
Y
Y
Y
Y
0
Can 0
Gate 010
pel Panel
Gate 01H
(CTCA)
·m
Channel
o
Al
Channel
1
Channel
4
Channel
5
Channel
6
Channel
7
Channel
Channel
8
o
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B6
B7
B8
B9
Cl
Bus Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Channel
2
Channel
A7
A2
A3
A4
A5
Bus Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus Tag
A6
11~------------------------PUl
3
B5
Bus Tag
Channel
1
Channel
2
Channel
3
Channel
4
Channel
C2
C3
C4
C5
C7
C8
C9
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag Bus
Tag
Bus Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
Bus
Tag
C6
5
Channel
6
Channel
7
Channel
8
Gate 01 E (Channel Interface)
4381-3
B/M 2676380
I~~g
tD Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GH055
INST 055
o
0 () 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 011
·L.,i"t'"ull'm""''''·v'llI'''rr'",.!'
'w
0000000000000000000000000 0000000.
INST 061
Final System Check
Running System Test/4381
Completing the Installation
System Test/4381 should be run for approximately one
hour (2 passes) with all I/O devices connected. For a
complete description of System Test/4381, see "System
Test/4381" in this volume.
1.
After running System Test/4381, go to Volume A06,
Service Aids, and perform "S/370 XA Installation" if this
is a XA account. After successfully running System
Test/4381, invoke PA Option E (service action complete).
4381-3
81M 2676380
e Copyright IBM Corp.
If you have installed more than one machine, report
your time accurately on each machine.
2.
File all documents, and complete any associated
paperwork.
3.
Turn system and the 4381 Processor Operations
Manual over to the customer.
. Relocation or Discontinuance
Procedure
By using the Processor Installation instructions and the
Unpacking Instructions, you can disconnect the system
for equipment location change or discontinuance.
Note: If this system uses the IBM supplied telephone
(part 4494964) for RSF transmissions, the telephone is
part of the system and must be packaged with the
system. The part number is located on bottom of the
telephone.
MI
/ PN 6169601 ·/1 EC A20558I EC A20562
/L-.=.S.=.eq:L..,;G;:;.;H~0;;..6;;..0~---I....,;1~o.;;..f~1~_ _....... _ 01 Oct 84 _ 30 Aug 85
1984
INST 061
I
000000000000000000000000000000000
1
I
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
4381 PROCESSOR SAFETY INSPECTION GUIDE
INSP 001
Table of Contents
Purpose ....•..••••••••.••.••.•••.••••..•........•.
Items Needed ..••........•..••...•.•••....•.. .'......
INSP 002
INS? 002
Line Cord Ground Check .•..•.•••••••••••••••.••••••.••
INSP 003
Frame ••............•.••.••.••••.••.•..••..••••••.
External Check ....•....•...•.......•.•..•...•....•...••
Internal Check •...•....•.....•.•.•••.•.••.............•
INSP 004
INS? 004
INS? 004
PCC and PS104 Fuses ..•..••.••••••••..•.••.•••.••.•.
Line Filter .••.•.••..•••..•••.••...•.•.••...•..•......•
INSP 005
INS? 006
Safety labels .•...••.•••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••
INSP 007
Gate 01 C .•...•.••...•.••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
INSP 009
Diskette Drives •••..•.••.•• • • . • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • ••
INSP 010
Gate 01 A •••••••.•..•.••••••••••.•••••••.••..•••••• INSP 011
Safety Labels ...••••••...•••......•............•....•... INS? 011
Console Devices (3205, 3278-2A. 3279-2C) .•.••...•..•...• INSP 013
External Check ..•.•..•...••••...••..............•...•... INS? 013
Internal Check ..•.•.••...•••••.••••..................•.. INSP 013
Power On I Off Check
.••..••••••••.•••••••••.•.••••••.
INSP 01 5
Safety Labels .•.••...•.••••••.••.••.••••••.••..•..••
INSP 017
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~q
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
Gl005
INSP 001
INSP 002
Purpose
To supply a safety inspection procedure for the processor.
This safety inspection should be done:
•
When you inspect a processor for an IBM
maintenance agreement and there is reason to
question the processor's safety.
•
When IBM per call service is requested and no
service has recently been performed by IBM.
•
When an alterations and attachments review is
performed.
If the· inspection indicates unacceptable safety
condition(s), the condition(s) must be corrected before
IBM provides service to the machine.
While performing this inspection, special attention must
be given to these areas:
•
50 to 60 Hz conversions using IBM or non-IBM
parts.
•
Feature/model changes and EC upgrades.
•
Additions of non-IBM power supplies or attachments.
•
Missing safety covers.
•
Removed, faded, or painted-over safety labels.
•
Primary power parts replacement requirements.
•
Other product safety related items.
Items Needed
•
CE tool kit
•
Fluke* 8060A digital voltmeter (part 8496278) or
equivalent.
* Trademark of John Fluke Mfg. Co. Mount Lake Terrace,
Washington
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
e Copyright IBM Corp. '9B4
Gl005
INSP 002
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
W,d'+IIIIW';''';'''''''
000000000000000 0000000000 000000000
INSP 003
Line Cord Ground Check
7.
After taping connector or while wearing rubber
gloves, separate connectors.
m
DANGER
Use only test probes to touch the exterior shell of
the customer's receptacle until step 9.
1.
If processor main power connector is unplugged,
go to step 8.
2.
Press Power Off at the operator control panel or
the service panel.
3.
Switch CB 1 and CB2 off.
4.
Have the customer locate and turn off the branch
circuit breaker to the processor and all physically
attached I/O devices.
5.
Use Fluke- B060A meter to check for 0 Vac
from the receptacle case
to building ground.
If Voltage is less than 1 Vae, the shell ean be
touched but not separated.
6.
Loosen locking device but do not separate
connectors.
IJ
Phase Pins
8. Carefully meter from ground pin of receptadA to
building ground for 0 Vae. 00 not continue if
condition is not met.
9.
Measure from ground pin of receptacle to the
case of the receptacle for 0 Vac. 00 not
continue if condition is not met.
10. Measure resistance from ground pin of the
customer recaptacle to building ground.
Reading should be less than 1.0 ohm.
Ground
Ground
Power Plug
Note: Digital meters may give unstable
readings if leakage current is flowing in the
building ground circuit. If the reading
appears unstable or greater than 1 ohm,
use an ECOS 1020, 1023, or equivalent
to measure ground impedance only.
Customer Receptacle
11. Measure resistance from ground pin of receptacle
to receptacle case. Reading should be less than
1.0 ohm.
Black
DANGER
Do not touch connectors to be separated.
Wrap connector with electrical tape or wear
rubber gloves.
12. Measure resistance from ground pin of
disconnected power cord to frame ground. The
resistance should be less than. 1 ohm.
Line
Cord
13. Check main power cord for damaged, broken
Phase 1
Blue
Phase 2
Red
Green/Yellow
Shield
Phase 3
Ground
Blue
Black
Neutral
insulation, or arced pins. Ensure the correct
locking plug is used.
DO NOT RECONNECT MAIN POWER CONNECTOR
UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO 00 SO.
Line
Cord
Black
Brown
Green/Yellow
Shield
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
Ground
For 220V wiring, tie the neutral to the line cord.
4381-3
B/M 2676380
\
~~g
o C~i~t IBM Corp. 1984
GI010
\PN 6169619
1 of 2
EC A20558
01 Oct 84
EC A20559
03 Dec 84
INSP 003
INSP 004
Frame
External Check
1.
Check for damaged or missing external covers.
2.
Check cover latches for functio('l!j1g correctly.
3.
As doors are opened, check the hinges for
breakage or corrosion.
4.
Check covers for sharp edges.
Internal Check
1. Check for non-IBM alterations or attachments. If
present, complete form R-009, Non-18M
Alterations/Attachments Survey.
2.
Inspect for smoke or water damage and
presence of rust or other contaminations.
3.
Inspect all cables for damage, correct ratings, all
needed grommets in place at frame
feed-throughs, and tie-downs in place.
DANGER
A shock hazard may exist while plugging or
disconnecting inline or Mate-N-Lok·
connectors because of the connector pin
slipping from its socket. 8efore working
with any connectors, ensure power is off.
4.
Check that FOS cables are correctly seated and
undamaged.
5., Check that all covers are correctly i'nstalled and
no screws or washers missing.
• Trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, Pennsylvania.
4381-3
81M 2676380
I~~g
GI010
IPN
6169619
2 of 2
'EC A20558
01 Oct 84
INSP 004
CI copyright IBM Corp. 1984
o
0 0-·-0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o
I
0·00 0 0 0 0 0
'1'1
'T
.. '",' T'
,..'1
"i
'I'd"
.• I'M
l' U
'1' -"
'.
,r
,I
'Wi
"'"
e e
,.
at> MW'
.... f~efttifff''NM'HWH'".itHt'
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 005
PCC and PS 104 Fuses
The fuses listed below are for the
pec and PS 104 only.
Located on the cover of the PCC.
EI
F1
4 amps 230 Vac
F2
2.8 amps 240 Vae
Located on PS 104 to the left of the
Fl
15 amps 600 Vac
F2
15 amps 600 Vac
F3
15 amps 600 Vac
F4
15 amps 600 Vae
F5
6 amps 600 Vae
pec.
@
m
AMD 107
PSlll
PS112
~
~
~
F6
6 amps 600 Vac
F7
6 amps 600 Vae
F8
6 amps 600 Vae
F9
1.6 amps 600 Vae
~
PS104
'"
~
Primary
Control
Compartment
(PCC)
Ensure the following:
II from pce cover to frame
1.
Green/yellow wire
is tight.
2.
Green/yellow wire
from top rear of
frame is tight. Located near J 14.
pce to
3.
Green/yellow wires
tight.
pec are
4.
The power strain relief
undamaged.
5.
Green/yellow wire
6.
Meter for less than 1 ohm from the convenience
outlet ground pin
to the frame.
m
m
at lower rear of
II is tight and
Ii in plug JO 1 is tight.
...
•••••••••
I
PS105
o
PS106
•.--~
~
,
"-J
AMD 102
m
Left Side View
4381
B/M 2676380
I~~q GI015
o Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
I
PN 6169620 II EC A20668I
.10f2
.~.~0~1~O~C~T~84~.~______~________~________~________~
Rear of pce
INSP 005
INSP 006
Ensure the following:
1.
Green/yellow wires from PS 104, PS 105,
PS106, PS111, and PS112
to the frame are
tight.
2.
Remove the acoustical barrier mat AMD 102.
Ensure green/yellow wire from motor to frame is
tight. This wire is mounted above the motor on
the blower mounting frame. Ensure
green/yellow wire from the blower mount to the
frame and green/yellow wire in plug are tight.
Install the acoustical barrier.
3.
4.
fJ
Open PCC box cover. Ensure safety covers for
CP 1
CB 1, and CB2 are in place. CB 1 is
rated for 10 amps; CB2 is rated for 25 amps
Ensure green/yellow wires
in all plugs
inside the PCC are tight.
m'
m.
AMD 107
PS112
RD
II
Green/yellow wires
D!D
Warning
Label
iii inside of PCC are tight.
Hazardous
Label
o
PS104
Line Filter
Note:
PSll1
D
Line filter is not installed on machines for Japan.
]
Primary
Control
Compartment
II .
Ensure all wires at the line
Remove line filter cover
filter are tight. Install line filter cover.
o :f
(PCC)
Warning
Label
DO
r:I---t~
a.:I
o
:fO
------r
:-4-0
0:+ CJ
U
AMD 102
Inside
Left Side View
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GI015
I
It
PN 6169620
.20f2
.
EC A20558
Inside
pee
pee
I
~.~0~1~O~C~T~8_4~.____~__~________~________~________~
INSP 006
000000000000000 000 0000000 000000000
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 007
Safety Labels
Ensure all safety labels as shown are in place and
readable. For safety label part numbers, see page INSP
017.
Item
Item
m
m
is located between CB 1 and CB2 inside the PCC.
is located inside the PCC.
Close the cover of the Power Control Compartment
(peC).
Cover
m
I
I
I
Fa
C:1-2
D
I
I
I
HAZARDOUS AREA
TRAINED SERVICE
EJ
1-'
•
I
I
I
I
0
,I
I
I
m
(r
~
I
o :-!-O
I
I
I~l.. !
o
:~O
0:+0
:
t!l!J
4 01
I·~QJ
PRESENT WITH
,\.,A.; ..
•
/tf1.
U:~o
PCC
_II.
I
I
I
I
MACHINE POWER OFF
o ;+
I
I
I
I
I
,,
J.
D
0
II
I
m
Lf ~l
D:C
I
LINE VOLTAGE
D
0
I
I
PERSONNEL 'ONLY
m
.
PCC Cover
Rear of PCC
Inside pee
This unit equipped with line filter circuits;
See installation manual for special grounding
wire requirements.
WARNING
m
High grounding conductor current. Grounding
circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of
machine. Never operate machine with grounding
conductor disconnected.
4381
81M 2676380
I~~g
• Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
GI020
PN 6169621
.10f1
I
II
EC A20558I
_________~______~______~______~
.~._O_1_0_C_T_8_4~
INSP 007
0000000000000000000000000000000000
"'e',,.,;":;'pW i4!t+rib*"·"·"J.:,rrL,II"'!I'W,jl'I'!I!UI'·dIH1IIHtlll,'I'htft'tdllMl"!itt'#'6lli116HtfIU1Hw"$"p'·WdSWfi·i!'t'l\lWuMI:'
Hb
'.!!.J.tW
''1'W!!-II' ""ljl1ii!l!Wlt!ft'!"",iJi1llj'h'I"M,n'C!N"i'i\!fI!'1~wit!':W"M",,,+,.....Mw"'++A'.t!Mi¥rlioilililQNl'WI<"4.1",,,,1!'·_#"tr....
t_"t"....
" ' ,...
' .. ' _ _
...........
·, ...........
II'"_··................·""'
. '·'oiIIoIi.,1"""Wt....
"toi/illl;fe....
··r" ...
t1"t""'f1#iIiIo·ttill6'1tt*
4W_r""'.'_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~_ _ _ _ __
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 009
Gate 01C
Transformer
Grounding Method
iii
Ensure the following:
1.
Green/yellow strap
is tight.
2. Green/yellow strap
a
from gate 01 C to frame
m
from PS107, PS108, and
PS 109 to the frame is tight.
3. Remove the acoustical barrier Bat AMD 105.
Ensure green/yellow wire to blower cover,
green/yellow wire from motor to blower cover,
and green/yellow win~ in plug are tight. Install
acoustical barrier.
4.
Green/yellow strap
frame is tight.
5.
Green/yellow strap
PS 103 is tight.
m
from AMD 105 to the
II from PS 101. PS 102. and
6. Green/yellow wire in all plugs is tight.
7. . Green/yellow strap from the service panel to the
frame is tight.
Note: Transformers 104A, 104B, 104C, and CP2 are
for all 50 Hz and Japan 60 Hz machines. If present, CP2
is mounted on the frame of gate 01 Cover PS 101.
AMD
107
PS
111
Ensure the following:
PS
112
1. Green/yellow wire in plugs for TR 101, TR 102,
TR103, TR104A, TR104B, and TR104C to
transformer case is tight.
II
2.
mountingTR101, TR102,
Nuts or screws
TR103, TR104A, TR104B, and TR104C are
tight.
3.
Check for a 3.2 amp fuse in TR102, a 4.0 amp
fuse in TR 103, and 15 amp fuses in TR 104 if
TR 104 is installed.
4.
PS
PS
105 106
pce
m
m
Gate 01C
Rear View
{Lower Portion}
Ensure the DANGER 550V label is in place for
TR 101, TR 102, and TR 103. Label is mounted
on the capacitors on the transformers. For
safety label part numbers, see page INSP 017.
4381
81M 2676380
I
MI
I
PN 6169622
II
EC A20558
I
~S~e~g~G~10~2~5~~.~1~o~f=2____~.~.~0~1~O~C~T~8~4~.________~________~________~______~
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
INSP 009
INSP 010
Diskette Drives
Ensure the following:
1.
Diskette drives are correctly installed.
2.
Green/yel/ow wires in plugs for diskette drives
are tight.
3.
Belt safety cover (if installed) is in place.
4.
Green/yellow wire from both diskette drives
to the frame is tight.
5.
a
Power cable strain relief for both diskette drives
II is tight.
It.&.-_-r--li)
Diskette Drive
4381
B/M 2676380
I~g
GI025
I
PN 6169622
.20f2
II
EC A20558
I
.L.~OU1~O~C~T~8~4~.
________~________~________~~______~
INSP 010
~ Copyright IBM Corp. 1984
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 ,0 0 0 0 0
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0'
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 011
Gate 01A
Ensure the following:
a
1.
Green/yellow straps
from board 01 A-B 1 and
01A-B2 plenums to the frame are tight.
2.
Swing open gate Ole and ensure the
green/yellow ground straps for boards 01A-B 1
and 01A-B2 are tight. The ground straps are
located at the top right corner of the boards.
3.
II
II
Remove acoustical barrier
trom AMD 101.
Ensure green/yellow wire to blower cover and
green/yellow wire in plug are tight. Install
acoustical barrier.
EI
4. Remove acoustical barrier
tram AMO 103,
AMO 104, and AMD 106. (AMD 103 located
behind AMD 104). Ensure green/yellow wire to
blower cover, green/yellow wire tram motor to
blower cover, and green/yellow wire in plugs are
tight. Install acoustical barrier.
5. Ensure the safety cover over the decoupling
iii
capacitors
are tight. Oecoupling capacitors
are mounted at top of board 01 A-B2 and the
cover is mounted over the capacitors.
6.
PS
105
Green/yellow wire in plugs at rear of PS 104 and
PS105 [I is tight. Gate 01A-B2 must be
swung open to see the rear of PS105.
B2
and
Plenum Gate
Safety Labels
II
Ensure safety label
is in place and readable. For safety
label part numbers, see page INSP 017.
IJ
:~~ 2676380 I~~q GI030
o Copyright IBM Corp.
1984
I~N
6'69623
.1 m1
II
EC A2055S1
.~.~O~1~O~C~T~S~4-L.
1
________________~__________~________~______________~_
HAZARDOUS AREA
TRAINED SERVICE
PERSONNEL ONLY
INSP011
o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0'
0000000000000000000000000 000000000
INSP 013
CRT YOKE GROUNDING
Console Devices (3205, 3218-2A, and
3219-2C)
External Check
1.
LINE CORD GROUNDING (3279-2C)
2.
Inspect for sharp edges.
3.
Ensure all feet are present and undamaged at the
base.
• Soldered Ground
f Plug Ground
o Screwed Ground
-<
Video Output RPQ
r~~:~; -_------!
4. Check CRT for cracks, bubbles, or damage.
I
I
No smoke, water damage, or foreign substances.
2.
Frayed or broken wiring.
Mate-N-Lok plugs for pushed back pins or wires.
5.
Rubber boot over filter capacitor is undamaged.
7.
Correct grounding of CRT yoke
--------r*-oa.·
Terminal board covers undamaged; no screws
missing.
4.
6.
I
l. -
~;j-ir-
EJ
G3
MAC
EI .
Correct grounding of CRT main power cord
frame.
n
V
~
Box Metalization E1
E2
Ground to Prime
J.. J,
.-'T 1 Power Assembly
7
:
B07
"--
~2~4
~
1
18-3
(i"'J
14.. ~
I
Y
O~
I~ Tray
81eed
LOPT H,eat
Sense SIOk
008
r
®8
2.
~>-<
Alarm
Block
6
Ai'"
P12
VI
Potentiometer
Mounting
......_'Ia_te_ _ __
Deflection
Coils
CRT Anode Terminal
I
CRT
e~~)
r'es eg'
£t~~L!1e:"'d-=::;;lc:::o:~:ve:::rgence
G(i
E
~e~
1
"'~4
1:~
KIB
24
P17S
4..
8. Verify connections to all capacitors are secure.
9.
Grounding Wires
/':"
.,
T3
CRT
!Puntv
C
Lt~'S09 '"'
30~.
~:~Og
~ lTestlNormal
~rr-rC3
tO _,
4 ;
P4 ~}-<~ Aala
10..B
1",
6 I'
I
7 CI------t
- - E~I;securit:~ <~>-<~ 0000/00
_----~/.~II:C7 Swj·tch
3
~
Switches
009
Sel
Pen
All capacitors for damage, expansion, or leakage.
A2
007
iii
~~
Power P3 ~
•6 ,5
~~
tn·----1~:
Prime
~~
>----1- Supply
16 Power·
I
808 ~
jt:"
.,
I
Card
AssemblY3
009 IH-------+--1'"
I
~>--.......
P3
n Ir---"
/
t
809
rt)
Mlc frame:
I
1.
Logic
Gate
CAUTION
Correct ground connections and
routings are essential for effective
lightning and flashover protection.
: 008
: Sockets
Internal Check
3.
1
Line Cord Ground
Check all covers for correct latching.
22
Video
Card
Magnetic
Assembly
Spring tension must cut
into yoke core insulation
III to
LINE CORD GROUNDING (3278-2A)
10. Correct grounding of 3205 or 3278-2A or
3279-2C line cord
B.
~ B08
~
11. All high voltage, hazardous voltage, fuse size,
and any other safety labels are in place and
readable. For safety label part numbers, see
page INSP 017.
'--
Bl0
Bt2
.. 813
-"
·Wires may be connected to
alternative screws
~
Ferrotransformer
Cord
01D/Al-
010/T1-
01D/C1·
4381
B/M 2676380
e Corwrioht IBM Com,
I~~g
1984
GI035
I
PN 6169624
.1 of1
II ~c
A20558
I
____________~_____________~____________~____________~
_~.~O~1~O~C~T~8~4-L
-Grounded only when mounted
and fastened in place.
II\I~D
n1 ~
I
I
I
0000000000000000000000000000000000
":'0$.1"'·01"
o
000000000000000000000000
Power On/Off Check
_
10. At Power Complete. switch the Unit
Emergency Only switch
to Power Off.
Verify the customer's branch circuit breaker
is off.
_
11. Ensure that the 5 Volt. 24 Volt, and MBC
On indicators at the service panel are off.
2.
Connect the processor power plug to the
customer's receptacle.
_
12. Switch the Unit Emergency Only switch to
On.
3.
Activate the customer's branch circuit
breaker.
Activate CBland cB21!1at the PCC in the
processor.
5.
Ensure the processor console is powered
on.
6.
7.
fl on the service panel.
A tPower Complete II . set the Unit
r-
Note: If the switch fails to reset 8
retention spring Glis installed. To reset the
switch. push down on the retention spring
behind the switch and push up on the Unit
Emergency Only switch on the service
panel.
_
Press Power On
_
Emergency Only switch on the service panel
to Emergency Power Off.
8.
INSP 015
-,
I
I
p' ,I
!r-:l r-:l
Rear of Unit Emergency Only Switch
!~~
OJ
13. Press Power On at the service panel. At
Power Complete. switch CBl and CB2 off.
'4. Ensure processing unit power is off and
AMOs and diskette drives are not running.
Cover
t
:
I
I
:
I
,
I
""5. Ensure that1he 5 Volt 24'
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.3
Linearized : No
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19
Create Date : 2018:10:11 13:57:25-08:00
Modify Date : 2018:10:11 14:11:41-07:00
Metadata Date : 2018:10:11 14:11:41-07:00
Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format : application/pdf
Document ID : uuid:ecaa3144-a611-0446-8176-e2c8589db38b
Instance ID : uuid:26901f5d-cd8f-e047-a68a-d2001fa03f9b
Page Layout : SinglePage
Page Mode : UseNone
Page Count : 222
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools